Home

AutoVue for Agile User Manual

1. Display Attributes Render Modes AutoVue provides several different render methods to display a 3D CAD model You can also adjust the degree of transparency change color or visibility to suit your preferences The choice of render mode varies between the level of detail and the render speed of the model For example a shaded model is three dimensional and highly detailed but requires more time to render The different render modes are as follows Method Description Wireframe A skeletal model constructed using lines and curves that represent the model s true edges All internal lines are visible Shaded A solid model constructed of planes and surfaces These surfaces are shaded to increase the illusion of three dimensions Hidden Line A wireframe constructed with all internal lines hidden Silhouette A wireframe constructed with all internal lines visible but including additional silhouette edges These are not true edges but help to visualize the model Wire Polygons A skeletal model constructed of unfilled polygons ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 149 WORKING WITH 3D FILES DISPLAY ATTRIBUTES Method Description Shaded Wire An outlined solid model constructed of planes and surfaces The outline is a solid line and the model s surfaces are shaded to increase the illusion of three dimensions Reflective A solid model constructed of planes and surfaces These s
2. ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 49 COMPARING FILES INITIATE COMPARE IN AUTOVUE Option Description Search Parameter Enter a text string or a number Agile PLM searches the object ID number attribute and the object Name or Description attribute A Quick search behaves like a Contains search for text strings The search criteria is treated as a single string and Agile PLM searches for names or descriptions that contain the search parameter string In the case of ID numbers Agile PLM searches for an exact match however you may use wildcard characters to specify part of an ID number as a search criteria Search Attachment Content Set this parameter to Yes to search the contents of the attachment files as well 3 In the Search Results table click the next to the object number to expand the list of attachment files for that object 4 Click a revision row or a version row to select the file you want to view Click Load File The selected file name appears in the File Name field of the File Open dialog 6 Click OK in the File Open dialog RESULT The Viewer opens the selected file or if appropriate adds the selected file to the current analysis function 50 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL Working With 2D Files When working with vector and non vector 2D files in AutoVue you can instantly change how the active file is displayed in the workspace by choosing from a n
3. NOTE The Rotate option is disabled for archived files text based documents and spreadsheets 54 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 2D FILES 2D VIEWING OPTIONS Menu Sub Menu Description Rotate Rotate Clockwise Rotate the file 90 degrees clockwise From the Auto Vue toolbar you can also click 60 Rotate Counter Clockwise Rotate the file 90 degrees counter clockwise From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click 962 Using the Pan and Zoom Window The Pan and Zoom Window view option allows a close up view of a particular area of a file while maintaining a full view of the file The Pan and Zoom Window displays a miniature version of the file and has a movable box frame on top of the miniature to indicate the area of the file displayed in the Auto Vue workspace NOTE The Pan and Zoom Window option is disabled for text based documents and spreadsheets TASK 1 From the View menu select Pan and Zoom Window ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Pan and Zoom Window STEP RESULT The Pan and Zoom window appears displaying a full view of the file 2 From the Options menu select Dynamic to view the changes in real time 3 To view a close up of a specific area of the file in the AutoVue work space minimize the frame box by clicking and dragging the frame handles ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 55 WORKING WITH 2D FILE
4. EDA Term PCB Printed Circuit Board Definition A PCB is a board made up of components affixed to a common surface and connected by copper tracks Pin The portion of a component to which an electrical connection can be made Polarity Positive polarity refers to visible items Negative polarity refers to items that become transparent to reveal underlaying layers or background color Ratsnest A number of unrouted straight line connections between two or more pads that represent the electrical connections in the netlist The ratsnest serves as a reminder that the pads must be connected and that currently there is no track on the board to make that connection Reference designator A character string denoting the type of component and a number that is specific to that component Routing Placing conductive interconnects between components on a PCB layout The process of turning nets into tracks Schematic A graphical description of an electrical circuit Segment The partial track that exists between two adjacent vertices or between a vertex and a pin Sometimes the track between two pins is also called a segment although connection is usually the more appropriate term here Signal An electrical impulse of a predetermined voltage current polarity and pulse width Silkscreen Text or outlines in ink on the solder mask on the top and sometimes on
5. sssssssseeesessssssssesceseessssssssseeseeessessnsssesseeseessnsssssseeserssessss 144 Viewing Missing XRef Notification ICON sesssssseesssssssssssseeeseessnssesseeeseesnsssnssseoseeesossssssossereseeosnssssss 144 Selecting Model Parts from the Model Tree ss s sseesssssssssssseeseessssssssseeseeesssssssssosceessessnssesseeesees 145 Hiding Model Partsissnensnnoneannemnannmenenn anea aR a ain s 145 Creating 3D MOckU DS aeann a na a aE A a ETEEN NNR a R S 145 Deleting Models from a Mockup scssssssssssssessssssessnssscsssssscssscsessnscasssscescesscseesuscacsuseacessesesnseaeensees 146 Manipulating Display of a 3D Model ssessesesssessessessessesssserssrseesnssessnssssssnssssssssssssssssssssssessesssssserseeeeeee 147 SPRAY CLES S cee nnne aerae a eea aeea eaS Ea TOEA Era o EES a a Neatteadeurcciae 149 PRE PUGLEY OGG assassins ite E E E EET 149 Changing the VISTI FEY Sous sescecscst send ccncecad loads bud adshcen pn dalyac ete edacas ctu sauncdahasladacusags dbdaaecocauseds chucaeats banants 150 Changing Model Colon esacsiassciccacascscssecsesnezsnrad aceite lcaseienateearsavis aoa ieee stqeita batten beams 151 Adjusting the TPES LOINC pe scste cass en tos cetcc cess clus ds as hccecdl Seca hesd ce ecad doadew cag bead eeccatobeceeea ncdcccdaciane 151 ME VEINS UCI IA E casei E S ov cev NE A AE A E E E A 152 Setting Ambient Lighting ssssssssseeeseesssssssssseseessesssssseeseeeseessnsssssseeceeososssssseesresssssssssseseresers
6. Center point Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when moving the cursor near the center of an elliptical component x Free snap Allow snapping at any point on the drawing NOTE When selecting a snapping mode you also have the option to select all snapping modes All On or to turn off snapping modes All Off The below table lists snapping locations for certain measurements ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 275 MARKUPS CREATING 2D VECTOR MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES Measurement Snapping Location Area Snaps to a shape on the drawing Arc Snaps to an arc on the drawing Angle Snap to two non parallel lines Measuring Distance Use the Distanceoption to measure the distance between two specific points TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Distance ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Measurement Entities dialog appears From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance 2 2 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring 3 To select all snapping modes click All On To clear all snapping modes click All Off 4 Fromthe Measured Distance Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance 5 Click a point on the drawing to define the starting point 6 Click another point on the drawing to define the end point ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you selected Cumulative continu
7. Trace Allows snapping to a trace Measuring Distance Use the Distance option to measure the distance between two specific points TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Distance ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance mm STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 283 MARKUPS CREATING EDA MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES 3 To select all snapping modes click All On To deselect all snapping modes click All Off 4 Fromthe Measured Distance Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance Click a point on the drawing to define the starting point 6 Click another point on the drawing to define the end point STEP RESULT The points are joined by a line The measured line path appears as an entity on the current active markup Drag to move the measured line path 8 Click on the measured line path STEP RESULT The measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measured distance Delta X Delta Y and the Manhattan Distance appear in the Measurement Entities dialog 9 To resize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement 10 Click Close t
8. ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 35 AUTOVUE BASICS OPENING AGILE ATTACHMENT FILES 4 From the Search dialog define your search and then click Search Option Description Class Select an object class for example Items Search Parameter Enter a text string or number Agile PLM searches the object ID number attribute and the object Name or Description attribute A Quick search behaves similar to a Contains search for text strings The search criteria is treated as a single string and Agile PLM searches for names or descriptions that contain the search parameter string In the case of ID numbers Agile PLM searches for a exact match However you may use wildcard characters to specify part of an ID number as a search criteria Search Attachment Content Set this parameter to Yes in order to search the contents of attachment files as well 5 From the Search Results table click the next to the object number to expand the list of attachment files for the object 6 Clicka revision row or a version row to select the file you want to review Click Load File STEP RESULT The selected file name appears in the File Name field of the File Open dialog 8 From the File open dialog click OK RESULT AutoVue opens the selected file or if appropriate adds the selected file to the current analysis function Comparing Revisions or Versions of a File AutoVue allows you to compare multiple revisions
9. TASK 1 From the View menu select Re Center and then select Entity STEP RESULT The Re Center dialog appears 2 Select the entity that you want to use as the central reference point STEP RESULT All instances of the entity are highlighted 3 Click an instance of the entity STEP RESULT The model is repositioned using the selected entity as the central reference point 4 Close the Re Center dialog The Model Tree displays the model s hierarchy inter relation of different parts assemblies bodies and missing XRef notifications With the tree you can select different parts and modify their attributes such as color visibility render mode or transformation ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 143 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MODEL TREE Expanding Collapsing the Model Tree You can expand the Model Tree to display child entities of a selected node or nodes You can also configure the level you want to expand the Model Tree TASK 1 Click the Models tab 2 From the Model Tree select the node or nodes that you want to expand then right click and select Expand All Children ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one node press the Shift or Control key while selecting STEP RESULT The selected entities are highlighted The Model Tree expands displaying the child entities of the selected nodes 3 Tocollapsea node select the node then right click and select Collapse All Children STEP RESU
10. TASK 1 From the Collaborate menu select Join Collaboration Session STEP RESULT The Join Session dialog appears 2 From the Session ID list select the active session you want to join Enter the Password if the Host has set one 4 Ifyou just want to be an Observer select the check box 350 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL REAL TIME COLLABORATION COLLABORATION SESSION If you want to select a layer color click Layer Color select a color from the list in the Layer Color dialog and click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Layer Color is disabled if the Host did not select Let user choose when initiating the Collaboration Session or when you are invited to join the session STEP RESULT The Layer Color dialog appears Click OK in the Join Session dialog RESULT You have joined the session Inviting Users During a Session TASK 1 From the Collaborate menu select Invite STEP RESULT The Invite dialog appears From the Online list select the user or users that you want to invite Click Add ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can add users that are going to join the session at a later time by clicking Add New and entering the Username STEP RESULT The user or users you selected appears in the Invited list Click OK RESULT The users receive a tooltip notification that he or she has been invited to join the session Removing Users from a Session When initiating a Collaboration Session if you a
11. The tree displays a hierarchy of markups or comments created by users You can navigate through the markups A set of properties is generated for each markup You can sort the markups in the tree according to each property by clicking the column headers These properties are Property Description Markup Entity Type of markup entity created Author The name of the user who created the markup entity Last Modified The date and time the markup entity was last modified Page Page number of the original document on which the markup entity is created Layer Markup layer on which the markup entity is created When a markup entity is created it appears in the tree and the information is recorded and saved in the Markup file NOTE Hover your mouse over an entity to display its author and date properties When in View mode or Markup mode the status bar is located at the bottom of the main window The fields displayed from left to right on the status bar are marker current active filename file type zoom factor current page and total 26 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL AUTOVUE BASICS AUTOVUE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE number of pages current active file size file creation date and cursor s coordi nate position The following image shows the status bar gt x acadi2 dwg Quick Menus Moving Objects AutoCAD Version 12 65 Pg2 2 B844Sbytes Jun 14 2004 1 313 6 216 There are three mark
12. 2 Click and drag to highlight the entities for which you want to view entity information ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If there are no entities within the selected area a message appears informing you that no entities were found and prompts you to select again To exit right click the mouse anywhere in the workspace STEP RESULT The List Entities dialog appears displaying the information of all the selected entities 3 Click OK to close the List Entities dialog Working with PDF Files This section lists AutoVue features that are specific to Adobe PDF files Navigating Through PDF Files When navigating through a PDF file you can use the mouse wheel to zoom and to scroll For a single page PDF the mouse wheel is used to zoom in and out of a document For a multi page PDF the mouse wheel is used to scroll from page to page Navigating Through Markups When navigating through markups AutoVue preserves the current zoom level For example when the Go To feature is selected from the Markup Navigation tree AutoVue highlights the markup entity in the workspace AutoVue navi gates to markup entity if on a different page and maintains the current zoom level Measuring in PDF Files When measuring vector based PDFs AutoVue allows you to snap to certain entities to take measurements You can snap to the end points or mid points of an entity AutoVue also allows you to snap to shapes closed entities for area measurements Thi
13. Option Description Sub Format The Sub Formatlist appears when you select HP Laserjet Print or TIFF from the Convert to Format list Select a sub format from the list Convert Region The area of the file to be converted The available options are Display The area displayed in the workspace For example if you zoomed in on a particular region of the file the zoomed portion of the file is converted Extent Refers to the entire extents of the file Selected The selected entity is converted Convert Pages The pages to be converted The available options are All convert all pages Current convert the current page Range convert the pages indicated in the range Size You can set the size and units pixels inches and millimeters of the output file With raster files the units are preset as pixels X indicates the number of horizontal pixels Y is the number of vertical pixels for the current active file contents At times AutoVue will preset X and Y to match the specifications of the selected conversion file format Other times X and Y will be available and may be changed according to your preferences Your selection here will not affect the current display but will affect the conversion file s resolution Scale Set the scale percentage of the converted page DPI You may set the dots per inch DPI for the converted page Converting a 3D Model TASK 1 From the File menu select
14. you can also click Q ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 53 WORKING WITH 2D FILES 2D VIEWING OPTIONS Menu Fit NOTE Resizing the AutoVue window when an image in the workspace has been zoom fitted Horizontal Vertical or Both results in the proportional resizing of the image Sub Menu Horizontal Description Fit the image horizontally in the active window The vertical dimensions of the image are zoomed proportionally but may be too large or small for the window You can also right click the workspace and select Zoom Page Width Vertical Fit the image vertically in the active window The horizontal dimensions of the image are zoomed proportionally but may be too large or small for the window Both AutoVue finds the best fit for the current file with respect to both its vertical and horizontal dimensions From the Auto Vue toolbar you can also click Ibl You can also right click the workspace and select Zoom Fit Pan and Zoom Window Display a close up view of a particular area of a file while maintaining a view of the entire file From the Auto Vue toolbar you can also click a The Pan and Zoom Window option is disabled for text based documents and spreadsheets See Using the Pan and Zoom Window for more information Pan Click and drag to move the drawing To exit right click From the Auto Vue toolbar you can also click C
15. 9 00001 J1 MOL 541 30 0001 51 Sw _ SNA 11 0001 52 Sw SNA 49 0001 J2 USBAF 23 0001 DISPLAY1 7SEGSMD 29 0001 gm gt Component Pins Name Location with A U5 1 47 1500 false U5 2 47 1500 false U5 3 47 1500 false U5 4 47 1500 false U5 5 47 1500 false U5 6 47 1500 false Customizing Columns You can also use the Navigation Panel to select highlight single or multiple components or entities zoom to a component or entity and query entity infor In the Navigation Panel you can sort a column change column order or hide show a column To sort a column click the column heading TASK To change the column order or to show hide a column click Customize STEP RESULT The Customize Columns dialog appears 84 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES COMPONENTS TAB 2 Select the check box beside the column or columns you want to display Deselect the check box beside the column or columns you want to hide ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To show all columns click Show All To hide all columns click Hide All 3 Tochange the column order select the column you want to move then click Move Up to move the column up in the list or click Move Down to move the column down in the list 4 To save the changes you made to the columns select Save column settings STEP RESULT The new column settings will be retained the next time the file is open
16. ADDITIONALINFORMATION Alternatively to adjust the transparency level you can enter in the Value field a value from 0 to 1 Where 0 renders the model opaque default state and 1 renders it transparent 5 Click Close to apply the changes and close the Set Transparency dialog Light Settings The default light setting consists of a white light at the 10 o clock position with respect to the model In the Lighting dialog it appears as a grey ball of white light at the 10 o clock position along the circumference of the larger sphere Ambient lighting is the overall lighting that surrounds an object It provides constant illumination to every surface of the model This type of lighting is particularly effective as a fill light for surfaces not directly illuminated by a directional light source You can set the intensity or source position too high a setting tends to saturate the image and reduce its clarity Using the Directional lighting option you can adjust the position of the light source on an object You can make the following modifications via the Lighting dialog e Set the intensity and source position of the ambient light e Set the direction of light e Add and remove a light source e Change light color brightness and specularity Setting Ambient Lighting TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visual Effects and then select Lighting STEP RESULT The Lighting dialog appears 152 ORACLE AUTOV
17. Distance Measure the distance between two points Minimum Distance Measure the minimum distance between two nets NOTE This option is only available for PCB files EDA Snapping Modes The snapping modes allow you to click to precise geometrical or electrical points For example when you select Snap to Pin move the cursor over the pin you want to select until the pin is highlighted then click Highlight and click a second pin to measure the distance between them ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 127 WORKING WITH EDA FILES MEASURING IN EDA FILES The snapping modes allow you to snap to the middle center and end points of an entity as well as a pin via and symbol The following table outlines the avail able snapping modes Button Snap To Description S End point Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when moving the cursor near the entity s end point Koy Mid point Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when moving the cursor near the halfway point of a linear entity Center point Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when moving the cursor near the center of an entity l Pin Electrical snap mode where a snap box appears when the cursor touches a pin Via Electrical snap mode where a snap box appears when the cursor touches a via Leo Symbol origin Electrical snap mode where a snap box appears when the cursor touches a component
18. Specify the maximum via count allowed for a net 120 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES DESIGN VERIFICATION Type 11 Design Rule Check Minimum Route Width Description Specify the minimum route trace width allowed in the design 12 Maximum Route Width Specify the maximum route trace width allowed in the design 13 Minimum Route Length Specify the minimum route trace length allowed in the design 14 Maximum Route Length Specify the maximum route trace length allowed in the design 15 Empty Nets Select this check box if you want to check for any nets that are not connected to any pin via trace and power ground plane 16 Un routed Traces Select this check box if you want to check for any trace segment that is not connected to another trace segment pin via on either end 17 Single Connection Select this check box if you want to check for a net connected to only one pin Power and ground nets are the exception ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 121 WORKING WITH EDA FILES DESIGN VERIFICATION Type Design Rule Check Description 18 Short Circuit Select this check box if you want to check for intersections on the same layer of traces that belong to different nets NOTE Trace enti ties will be divided into n sets where n is the number of nets in the
19. TASK 1 Measure distance between two points or measure cumulative distance 2 From the Distance tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Distance Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance 3 From the Units list select the unit to which you want to calibrate the distance 4 Select Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance to a value 5 Select Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance by a factor 6 Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration result appears in the Measurement dialog 7 Click Close to close the Distance tab ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 285 MARKUPS CREATING EDA MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES Measuring Area Use the Area option to measure the area and perimeter of a region TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Area ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Area 2 STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 2 Select Between Points if you want to measure the area between points on a drawing Snapping modes are displayed 3 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select all snapping modes click All On To deselect all snapping modes click All Off 4 Select Shape if you want to measure the area of a predefined shape on the drawing 5 From the Measured Area Units list selec
20. 8 To resize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles 9 You can click and drag the text box anywhere on the drawing ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To make another measurement click Reset 10 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Calibrating an Arc TASK 1 Measure an arc in the drawing 2 From the Arc tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Radius Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance 3 From the Units list select a unit of measurement to which you want to calibrate the distance 4 Click Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate to a value Click Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate by a factor 6 Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration results appear in the Arc tab 7 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 269 MARKUPS 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Creating a Stamp NOTE In previous releases of AutoVue Stamp markup entities were called Intel listamp The Stamp markup entity lets you create a stamp that includes document and user information metadata pulled directly from the backend DMS ERP PLM UCM system NOTE The Stamp is only available if a system administrator has defined and configured the Stamp A Stamp can retrieve a document s attributes directly from the backend system They can also update attributes from the Stamp to the document in the backend system Ba
21. Fit To Window Analysis Colors Rendering Display Options Enable Look Ahead Gaphis Desktop Office Resources V Resolve Local Resources OK Cancel 2 From the Configuration tree select General RESULT The CAD Raster and System Options appear Configuring Options for CAD Files Configure how you want to display text dimensions line styles and so on for CAD files Option Description Text Select to display text entities Clear to hide text entities 204 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL CONFIGURING AUTOVUE GENERAL OPTIONS Raster Files Rendering Resources Option Description Dimensions Select to display all dimensional entities Clear to hide all dimension entities Line Weights Select to display varying line thicknesses Clear to make all lines appear equal with a width of 1 pixel No line weights display for any line Force to Black Select to force all colors of a drawing to black Clear to display the file in color Line Style Select to display dotted and dashed lines Clear to display all lines as solid Filling Select to display filled entities as filled rather than just an outline Clear to hide filling for filled entities Load External Select to display external references XRefs automatically References Clear to keep external references from displaying automatically Choose how you want the raster file to display
22. ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES SECTIONING Option Description Don t Cut Display the object without a cut Cut Object displayed is cut along the section plane Invert Reverse the selection display the other part of the object Show Both Restore the cut part of the object Edges Only Display only the edges of the object along the section plane Defining the Section Plane and Cut through TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Section and then select Define ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Sectioning if STEP RESULT The Define Section dialog appears 2 From the Section Plane list select the orientation for the section plane From the Cut Options list select the cut option that you want 4 To define the plane position click and drag the Plane Position slider to the position you want 5 Select Dynamic if you want the plane to move simultaneously with the slider 6 Select Show Plane if you want the section plane visible 7 Select Fill if you want the section plane filled ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The fill color can also be set from the Configuration dialog STEP RESULT The section plane is displayed as filled and the Section Area is calculated 8 From the Measured Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the section surface 9 Click Close to close the Define Section dialog ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Onc
23. While this technique for viewing structured CAD files in DocuBOMs is still supported it has been superseded by Design structures as the preferred way for storing and viewing data CAD data can be stored in Agile PLM using document object BOM structures This is accomplished automatically when Agile PLM and Engineering Collabo ration EC are integrated using EC CAD connectors A CAD assembly file is attached to an Agile document object and the subordinate CAD part files are also attached to Agile document objects The part file document objects appear on the BOM tab of the CAD assembly document object thus creating a hierar chical file structure for the attached files NOTE File types that are used in structured file hierarchy are specified in Agile Administrator Viewer amp Files node with the CAD Structure file association When you open a CAD Structure assembly attachment Agile PLM automati cally opens the subordinate part files in AutoVue allowing you to view the entire CAD design This process is seamless and requires no action by the user other than initiating the view function for the assembly file The follow list provides details on how Agile PLM extracts CAD Structure files from the document BOM structure for CAD design viewing e Agile PLM extracts only file types specified as CAD Structure file types If an attached file type is not specified as a CAD Structure file type Agile PLM does not traverse the document structure
24. 3 Inthe Link Name field enter a name for the attachment Optionally you can also provide a brief description of the attachment in the Description box 4 Inthe URL field enter the path to the file or click Browse The File Open dialog appears 5 Select the file or click Browse and click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can attach any local file or any DMS file 6 From the Open In list select one the following e A new applet window Opens the attachment in a new AutoVue window Current applet window Opens the attachment in the current AutoVue window Associated application Opens the attachment in its associated appli cation 7 Click OK to close the Attach File dialog STEP RESULT The attachment appears on the markup workspace and in the Markup Navigation Tree 8 Right click in the workspace to complete the attachment Opening an Attachment To open an attachment do one of the following Double click or the attachment icon in the workspace or Markup Naviga tion Tree 250 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES If A new applet window was selected while attaching the file it will open the attachment in a new AutoVue window If Current applet window was selected while attaching the file it will open in the current AutoVue window If Associated application was selected while attaching the file it will open in its associated application In the tree right click
25. 306 note 292 305 rotating selected markups 307 selecting markups 307 signoff 254 history 256 re approve 255 rescind 255 stamp 257 stamp library 258 delete 259 text 290 text box visibility 291 transforming markups 307 ungrouping 310 working with markup entities 306 mass properties 160 161 Measure Distance 2D non vector 74 75 measurement units and symbols 316 Missing Resource icon 59 missing resources 59 missing XRef notification icon 144 Model tab 24 138 Model Tree 24 138 143 144 145 hiding 145 XRefs 144 Models tab 24 138 N native print settings 329 Navigation Panel 20 83 89 Bookmarks tab 22 88 140 Components tab 22 85 customizing 84 Models tab and Model 24 138 Models tab and Model Tree 24 138 Nets tab 23 86 Views tab 25 139 net connectivity 93 Nets tab 23 86 374 O open file 28 Markup file 240 Oracle AutoVue 15 P pan and zoom window 55 partial print preview 333 pen settings 332 PMI entities 163 aligning 164 configuring 165 captures 165 reference frames 166 views 165 filtering 164 go to 164 hyperlinks 166 PMI filtering 213 PMI initial visibility 213 print 323 file 335 header footer 328 329 margins 326 set 327 options 323 configure 326 partial preview 326 333 pen settings 332 create 333 delete 333 preview a file 334 watermarks 330 add 331 Q Quick Menus 27 R real time collaboration 343 chat window 356 send message to selected users 357 Collaboration Sessi
26. 9 Right click to complete the measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To make another measurement click Reset STEP RESULT The measured line path measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The area and perimeter measurements appear in the Measurement Entities dialog 10 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 267 MARKUPS 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Measuring an Angle Use the Angle option to measure the angle between points on a drawing TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Angle ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Angle STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 2 From the Measured Angle Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the angle 3 Click points on the drawing to define the angle you want to measure The first click defines the starting point of the angle measurement The second click defines the vertex of the angle measurement The third click defines the endpoint of the angle measurement The points are joined by angle arms with an arc connecting them 4 Move the cursor to increase or decrease the radial and arc length Click again to complete the measurement STEP RESULT The measured line path angle measurement and unit appear ina value box entity on the current active markup layer Th
27. CONVERSION CHANGING THE PEN SETTINGS 342 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL Real Time Collaboration The real time collaborationoption enables multiple users to review files interac tively and simultaneously thereby shortening the review process for docu ments Participants in a Collaboration Session assume different roles Each Collabora tion Session has a Host a Controller and one or more users These participants have varying privileges during the Collaboration Session Collaboration User Tree When you are in a Collaboration Session the panel on the left displays the Users tab in addition to the tabs displayed when you are normally viewing a file The Users tab displays the Username the Layer Color representing the user the In Session value and the user Status File Edit View Manipulate Analysis Markup Collaborate Afb ee TT d S p mae test v B I X Username Layer Color In Session Status Mary kal Gerard Administrator cp le Models Views Users ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 343 REAL TIME COLLABORATION THE Host The Host The person who initiates the Collaboration Session is the Host by default The Host is also automatically the Controller of the Collaboration Session The Host can assign another user to be the Host by selecting Assign Host from the Collaborate menu When initiating a Collaboration Session the Host can specify the Marku
28. Color Density Display_Mode Filepath Layer_ID Name Translucency Visibility NOTE The attributes vary depending on the file being viewed See Performing an Attribute based Search Any Value When selected Auto Vue searches for any value of the selected attribute The attribute value options are disabled If cleared specify the values for the selected attribute you want to search The attribute value options correspond to the selected attribute ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 183 WORKING WITH 3D FILES ENTITY SEARCH Where Option Description Advanced Volume Specify the size of an entity the minimum and maximum 3D Search dimensions The dimensions of an entity boundary box tab must be between the specified dimensions to meet the search criteria Location Specify an axes aligned boundary box The boundary box of an entity must be inside it to meet the search criteria Performing a Search TASK 1 From the Edit menu select Entity Search ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Entity Search STEP RESULT The Entity Search dialog appears Click the 3D Search tab From the Selection list specify what parts of the model that you want to search e To search the entire model select All To search specific parts of a model select Selected and then select the parts on the model To search the model parts that are not
29. For each AutoVue session all search results are saved and can be referenced from the File Open dialog as Search Results 1 Search Results 2 and so on 4 Select a file and then click Open RESULT The file opens in the AutoVue workspace AutoVue generates streaming files for most supported file formats When a file is accessed by AutoVue for the first time a streaming file is generated The streaming file contains file data and provides the benefit that AutoVue can access the streaming file much faster than it can the native file As a result rendering time is significantly faster when loading from the streaming file If the native file changes or its external resource files change or if an INI option changes the streaming file is invalidated In this case AutoVue opens the display from the native file and generates a new streaming file The full archive file directory displays in the Auto Vue window It is not neces sary to decompress the file Double click a file to display it within AutoVue If you would like to markup an archived file the file must be made accessible to AutoVue in a decompressed form 30 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL AUTOVUE BASICS OPENING FILES File Properties From the File menu select Properties to open the Properties dialog The Prop erties dialog provides information specific to the current active file such as file name file size date of creation and file type The file properties t
30. From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Minimum Distance 2 STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears Click laud First Setto select the entities that you want to measure from Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you select Net you cannot select any other type of entity ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 289 Markups ADDING TEXT 10 11 12 Click the first set of entities on the drawing ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To clear the last set of entities you selected click Clear Set STEP RESULT The entities are highlighted Click kad Second Set to select the entities that you want to measure to Click the second set of entities on the drawing STEP RESULT The entities are highlighted in a different color From the Measured Min Distance list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance Select Zoom to Result if you want to zoom in on the measured value on the drawing Click Compute STEP RESULT The minimum distance from the first set of entities to the second set is highlighted by a line The measured line path measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measure ment Delta X Delta Y and the Manhattan Distance appear in the Measure ment Entities dialog To move the value box click and drag it to anywhere on the drawing To resize the value box select it and then click and
31. From theMarkup menu select New ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click New Markup RESULT AutoVue enters Markup mode and a new Markup file appears in the Markup Navigation Tree See also Creating a Markup Layer Entering Markup Information When creating a markup you can provide user information that you can save with the markup From the Markup menu select Properties The Markup Information dialog appears Enter a user name department company name company location and tele phone number Click OK to save your markup information and to close the dialog ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 239 MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP FILES Saving a New Markup File To save a new Markup file TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Save ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click Save Markup fd STEP RESULT The Save Markup File As dialog appears displaying the Markup Information that you entered when creating the markup Save Markup File As Markup ID aao Markup Information Cancel User Export Department Company Location Telephone 2 Inthe Markup ID field enter an ID consisting of any combination of characters or numbers 3 Click OK RESULT The Markup file is saved The markups and the Markup file remain displayed in the workspace and in the Markup Navigation tree Opening Markup
32. Pring dialog to the lower left corner of the AutoVue status bar To restore the Batch Print dialog click the Batch Print icon on the AutoVue status bar 336 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL Conversion Sometimes you need to convert a file to be able to use it with an application it was not created from Auto Vue provides several conversion file formats for you Conversion Options From the File menu select Convert to open the Convert dialog Depending on the conversion type being performed the available options in the Convert dialog may vary These options are Option Description Color Depth Select an option from the list 1 Black and white 4 16 colors 8 256 colors 24 True color auto AutoVue selects the color depth that best matches the original file Convert to Format A list of all the possible types of output file formats currently available for conversion The available formats are PDF TIFF Windows Bitmap NOTE Conversion to PDF is not supported when the Auto Vue server is running on Linux platforms Output Specify the name and path of the file in which the conversion is to be stored This file is also known as the output file You can use Browse to provide AutoVue with the file s path If writing onto an existing file a warning message appears asking if you want to overwrite the existing file ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 337 CONVERSION CONVERTING A 3D MODEL
33. RESULT ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 171 WORKING WITH 3D FILES SECTIONING To restore the default state of a part of the model from the Manipulate menu selectTransform and then select Reset Selected To restore the default state for the whole model select Reset All Sectioning With the Sectioning feature you can view the cross section and cut through of 3D models In the Define Section dialog you can define the section plane posi tion section plane orientation and the cut through Section Plane Options In the Define Section dialog you can use the following options to define the orientation of the section plane Option XY Plane Description Section plane is oriented along the XY plane YZ Plane Section plane is oriented along the YZ plane XZ Plane Section plane is oriented along the XZ plane From 3 Vertices Select three vertices on the object to define the orientation of the section plane From Face Normal Select a face on the object to define the orientation of the section plane perpendicular to the face From Edge Tangent Select an edge on the object to define the orientation of the section plane perpendicular to the edge s tangent Define a Plane Define X Y and Z coordinates to orient the section plane Cut Options In the Define Section dialog you can use the following cut options to define the cut through of an object 172
34. Reposition the entire model back to the center of the AutoVue workspace See Re Centering Selected Only available when one or more model parts are selected The selected part or parts are considered as the central reference point by which the model is repositioned See Re Centering Entity Select a model part or entity as a central reference point to reposition a model See Re Centering Default View Displays view of the model when it is initially loaded You can also right click in the workspace and then select from the menu See 3D Views Camera Views Displays different views of 3D models Isometric Top Bottom Front Back Left Right and View Points You can also right click in the workspace and then select from the menu See 3D Views Views Access native views of the model or access and create your own views You can also right click in the workspace and then select from the menu See 3D Views 148 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES DISPLAY ATTRIBUTES Menu Sub Menu Description Page Next Page Go to the next page of a multi page file From the Autovue toolbar you can also click Lp Previous Page Go to the previous page of a multi page file From the Autovue toolbar you can also click RLI Page Number Go to the specified page of a multi page file From the Autovue toolbar you can also click E
35. Select Full Resolution to display raster files at full resolution Select Fit to Window to display raster files to fit the current window When Enable Look Ahead is selected and you zoom into a part of a file AutoVue renders adjacent tiles The advantage to this is improvement in perfor mance when zooming in on parts of a file The disadvantage is that if the client machine is idle for at least one second Enable Look Ahead is triggered which could slow down current operations However once all tiles are rendered all zoom operations speed up again If Enable Look Ahead is deselected AutoVue renders the tiles when requested that is only when you zoom in on parts of the file If Resolve Local Resources is selected and AutoVue tries to locate XREFs on the client side using client path settings If not found on the client side ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 205 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE GENERAL OPTIONS AutoVue will attempt to retrieve the XREFs on the server If Resolve Local Resources is unchecked AutoVue attempts to resolve the XRefs on the server side only Configuring Paths Configure the paths for XRefs and fonts These path settings are read only if Resolve Local Resources is checked When working with files that need external resources such as fonts or XRefs you may need to specify the path to these external resources if they do not exist in the same location as the base file Path Description XRefs The di
36. The overlay s size is scaled to accommodate the origin and destination points you defined Click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To modify other overlays repeat steps 2 to 4 STEP RESULT The changes are applied to the selected overlay Removing an Overlay Selecting Views TASK 1 From the File menu select Import File as Overlay STEP RESULT The Overlays dialog appears 2 Select the overlay that you want to remove 3 Click Remove STEP RESULT The overlay is removed from the list 4 Click OK RESULT The overlay is removed from the display The Views option allows you to access different named views of a file TASK 1 From the View menu select Views STEP RESULT The Select a Named View dialog appears 2 From the list select the view that you want to display 3 Click OK RESULT The selected view is displayed NOTE To return to the default view select Default View ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 65 WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES Specifying a View Point The View Point option allows you to render a drawing from a selected view point TASK 1 From the View menu select View Points STEP RESULT The View Point dialog appears 2 Enter the X Y and Z coordinates for the view point with which you want to render the drawing 3 Click OK RESULT The drawing is displayed from the selected view point Analyzing 2D Vector Files With t
37. Under the Mouse Hover heading select or deselect the Show Entity Information Tooltip option 3 Click OK Modifying 3D View You can configure the board thickness and component height for the 3D PCB view of EDA files Note that these Board Thickness and Component Height values are used only if the underlying EDA file does not contain board thickness and component height information TASK 1 From the Configuration tree select EDA 218 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR EDA FILES 2 Enter a value in the Default Board Thickness field to change the board s thickness ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Default Board Thickness option only affects boards that have no board thickness defined in the design If a board has a defined thickness this option does not affect that board 3 Enter a value in the Default Component Height field to change the component height ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Default Component Height option affects components that do not have height defined in the design If a component has a defined height this option does not affect that component 4 Towork with a different unit of measurement select another unit from the Default Units list This is the unit of measurement used for values set in the Default Board Thickness and Default Component Height fields 5 Reload the file to see your changes Synchronizing Layers when Comparing Files When you compare fil
38. entity on the model TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure ie STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears 2 Click the Surface tab 3 Select Face Surface if you want to measure the surface area of a face on an entity 4 Select Entity Surfaces if you want to measure the surface area of an entire entity 5 From the Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the surface ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you want to cumulate the measurement of more than one surface click Cumulative 6 Ifyou selected Face Surface move the cursor on the model to high light a face surface then click the face surface that you want to measure STEP RESULT The face surface is highlighted The measured surface appears in the Measurement dialog 7 Ifyou selected Entity Surface click the entity that you want to measure STEP RESULT The entity as well as all the faces belonging to the body are high lighted The measured surface of the body appears in the Measurement dialog 8 To measure the face surface of the entity click on the highlighted body STEP RESULT A list appears displaying the entity and its parents ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 197 WORKING WITH 3D FILES WALKTHROUGH 9 Select the entity or a parent from the list ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To measure the face surface of a parent select the parent from the list S
39. press the Shift or Control key while selecting If no part is selected transformation is applied to the entire model Use the rotate or translate buttons to transform the model To set the translate rotate and scale increments click Options ADDITIONAL INFORMATION When you click a rotation translation or scale button the model transforms in increments of the values entered in the Options dialog STEP RESULT The Options dialog appears Enter the Translate Increment value in inches Enter the Rotate Increment value in degrees Enter the Scale Increment value Click OK to close the Options dialog Click Reset to set the model to its original transformation Click Close to close the Transformation dialog STEP RESULT The transformation state remains displayed To restore the default state of a part of the model from the Manipulate menu select Transform and then select Reset Selected To restore the default state for the whole model select Reset All Resetting the Transformation of a 3D Model You can reset a model or selected parts to their original transformation TASK 1 2 View the transformed 3D Model To reset the entire model to its original transformation from the Manipulate menu select Transform and then select Reset All 170 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES TRANSFORMING A 3D MODEL To reset selected model parts to their original transformation from the Manipulate
40. select an owner from the Owner Filter list 5 Ifyou want to search by value select a value from the Value Filter list ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also enter an Owner Filter or Value Filter in the text box 6 Click Apply Filter s ADDITIONALINFORMATION Select an item in the result list and right click to access options like Zoom Selected and Show Entity Properties STEPRESULT Alist of entities matching the search criteria appear displaying the Owner Type and Value columns 7 To save the results click Export Result STEP RESULT The Save As dialog appears 126 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES MEASURING IN EDA FILES 8 Specify the file name and the directory where you want to store the file then click Save ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AutoVue saves the results in a csv Comma Separated Values file 9 Click Close to close the Entity Search dialog Measuring in EDA Files In EDA files you can take measurements of distances areas arcs and angles When measuring you have the option to snap to geometrical or electrical points on the drawing From the Analysis menu select Measure to access the Measurement options NOTE From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure The following table outlines the available measuring options Name Description Angle Measure the angle between selected points Arc Measure an arc entity Area Measure a selected area
41. 337 PDF 339 pen settings 341 size 339 create markup layer 244 cross probing 106 113 net connectivity 114 two or more EDA files 112 zoom behavior 219 zooming 114 custom color 320 custom line color 317 custom line thickness 318 D delete 371 markup layer 247 markups 310 design verification 118 122 design rule checks 118 exporting results 123 Do Not Disturb 350 drawing information 69 set of entities 70 single entity 70 tag attributes 70 dynamic load mesh resolution 212 E EDA 83 3D views 106 ascend hierarchy 96 BOM 116 comparing PCB 115 cross probing 106 design hierarchy 95 design verification 118 entitiy properties 93 entity properties 91 entity search 124 125 126 filtering entity types 91 layer sets 102 layers 97 manipulating views 105 measuring 127 angle 132 arc 133 calibrating arc 81 134 195 269 281 289 301 calibrating distance 76 129 192 266 277 285 298 distance 129 minimum distance 130 snapping modes 128 282 net connectivity 93 net instances 94 net properties 94 selecting entities 88 89 entity seach dialog 90 terms and definitions 359 zooming to an entity 90 enable look ahead 205 371 entity properties 159 attributes 159 160 extents 162 mass properites 161 mass properties 160 entity properties dialog box 91 entity reference 142 entity search dialog 90 export Markup file 242 F file convert 340 file properties 31 open 28 print 335 file properties 31 163 file
42. Add Entity and then select Hyperlink ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Hyperlink 2 Click a point on the document where you want to place the hyperlink STEP RESULT The Establish Hyperlink dialog appears Establish HyperLink Link Name Description URL Open in anew applet window Enter a Link Name 4 Optionally enter a Description Type the URL or click Browse to locate the file that you want to link to ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Make sure to include the http protocol in the URL If the protocol is not included or if no value is entered in the URL field then an error message is thrown when the Hyperlink markup entity is opened 6 From the Open In list select where you want the hyperlink to open 252 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES Opening a Hyperlink Open in Description A new applet window Opens the file in another Auto Vue window Current applet window Opens the file in the current Auto Vue window A new browser window Opens the file in the default browser window A current browser window Opens the file in the current browser window ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you are creating a hyperlink to a Web page URL then you must select A new browser window 7 Click OK 8 Right click to exit hyperlink creation mode RESULT The hyperlink appears on the Markup To open a hyperlin
43. Design eran chy snusen T T A a a s 95 Navigating using Ascend Hierarchy ssessssscsscssecssccssecssecssccsseeseccscesssessecssccsseeseecssesseesuecescenseeseees 95 Navigating using Descend Hierarchy sscsssscsscsesssscssecseecssccsseessccnccssecssecssceseecseccsscessesneceseesseeseees 96 EEE EEE A E E EE E E ETE AL E ETENE EET toes 96 Physical and Logical Layers S ctions ssssssssssesesssccssecssecssesssessscenccessessecencessessscessesseessscesceeseessees 97 C anging th Order Of LayefSinseseienninennn n eis Wales R NEES 98 Modifying Visibility for Physical Layers ssssscssecsccssecssecseccssessecsssccnccssecsscesseesecessesseesuecssceeseessees 99 Modifying Visibility for Logical Layers ssssssssscssececsscsscccecscesseeseecssecsscsssesueccsseesecsncesseeseeeses 100 Modifying Polarity ae ciecsic ss ccinctlens uscd sensed acest eens atcpdetctaleuasane ezdatalinpctscbacaiihaan ited cancceundlectacedeenandoedacucess 101 Changing Layer Colon scsscscscsssscss cies ceasecascascsonstcadesducensdnsntuseqsbensdscuseludsascpubcbesctscatvconsnedscnuslostinteanntannoas 101 Sorting Logical kayeli Sienen nian cred noel nia ADIAR S 102 EDL SOS E E E E EOS N EAE E E E E 102 Viewing Layer SOUS siiseiscsssstssceisnsossaenanaszsnasusciassansonsonsansshsoneonsaoadnaaniedansieasoateonennyan covaousad aacovasnioennanontsens 103 Creating User Defined Layer Sets sssssssssecssscssecsscssccsssssesssccssesssecsscessesuecessesscsssecsscesseessee
44. EEVT KNEE aE SE E N E O cece ees eeence 355 Chat WiNdOW sssdscetcscsen Basscetdcte arses enaieh ieaddiia n a a AEA AA a oan 356 Sending a Message to Selected USers sscsssssssssssessecsssssscsssssessecsscessssseesssssesuseacsssceasessssscsnsesesees 357 Sending a Message to All USEfS sssssssssssssseessssssssseeseeeseessnssesscecseessssssssseestessssssssssesstesrrssnssseseeesses 357 Appendix A EDA Terms and Definitions ccecsessesssssessncsscssssssssssssesssssaccssssscssscsecsuscsscsnceacesscsscsnseseensess 359 Feedback eme ai a e a warhead a E AOE S TEETE EE EE R EE ae 367 GER SrAUIN QUIRES acscrayetvcwiunracaaieetae E A AN E ae eS 367 C stomer SUFI ON sca sas coset ceszeetycccex sess sceteexeecsccet eanta aaa asali luocaudscevteluauastundeses EE cncusdeeeveatens 367 My Oracle Support AutoVue COMMUNItY cescsscseecsscccsecssecssccssesseccsccesecsueccscceseesuccssceseecseecssesseesseess 368 Sales IMGUIISS sanaa aa r a oro cgra ha pada wralonh deanale ender e Arii 368 Audience Preface The Oracle AutoVue User Manual explores AutoVue s key capabilities and is designed to help you get the most out of AutoVue s extensive functionality For the most up to date version of this document go to the AutoVue Docu mentation Web site on the Oracle Technology Network at http www oracle com technetwork documentation autovue 091442 html This manual is intended for Oracle AutoVue end users Related Documents For more informat
45. Entity Filter dialog will be highlighted Entity Properties The Entity Properties dialog displays detailed information about any selected entity in the current schematic drawing or PCB design To view the Entity Prop erties dialog first select an entity from the workspace and then from the Anal ysis menu select Show Entity Properties ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 91 WORKING WITH EDA FILES ENTITY PROPERTIES NOTE You can also double click an entity in the workspace or right click an entity in the workspace Navigation Panel or Entity Search dialog and then select Show Entity Properties Entity Properties Associations Entity Info E lt Component Instance gt Pin H RefDes U5 Part Type SSOP50P620 200 40M Location 50 000000 20 000000 0 000000 Rotation 0 000000 Component Definition SSOP50P620 200 40M Glued false Layer Top Number of Connections 0 On the left side of the Entity Properties dialog a tree displays all the entities associated with the entity you selected The entity you selected is the root of the tree and all the associated entities grouped by their type are shown as its chil dren The attributes of the entity display to the right of the tree under Entity Info In the tree select any associated entity to display its attributes under Entity Info You can also view entity attributes in the workspace When you hover the mouse over an entity in the workspac
46. However when measuring Distance the infinite edge is selected Edge Middle Highlightsedgesonthe The edge is highlighted and a tooltip appears Q model indicating the middle edge coordinate when you hover the mouse pointer Are OY Highlights arcs on the The arc is highlighted when you hover the model mouse pointer Arc Center Highlights arcs and The arc is highlighted and a tooltip appears circles on the model indicating the arc center coordinate of the arc when you hover the mouse pointer NOTE When measuring Minimum Distance the arc center is selected However when measuring Distance the infinite arc axis is selected Face Plane Highlights faces when The face is highlighted when you hover the a you move the cursor mouse pointer over a face Measuring Distance Use the Distance option to measure the distance between two vertices edges arc axes faces or any combination of these entity types NOTE To revert to the Point to Point distance measurement set the SHOW_POINTOPOINT_PAGE INI option Refer to theInstallation and Config uration Guide for more information The following table details how the distance between two entities are measured using snapping modes 296 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS 3D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Snapping Vertex Line Arc Center Plane Mode Entities Vertex Distance The shortest The shortest The shortest between two segmen
47. Line Style list select the required line style 3 Click OK to close the Markup Entity Properties dialog ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Any new markup entities that you create will have the new line style RESULT The line style changes for the selected markup entity or entities Line Thickness Change the line thickness for a selected markup entity or entities TASK 1 Select the markup entity for which you want to change the line thick ness To select multiple markup entities press the Shift or Control key while selecting 2 From the Line Thickness list select the required line thickness STEP RESULT The line thickness changes for the selected markup entity or enti ties Defining a Custom Line Thickness To define a custom line thickness take the following steps TASK 1 From the Line Thickness list select Customize 2 In the Width Pixels field enter the desired width 3 Click OK to close the Markup Entity Properties dialog RESULT The line thickness changes for the selected markup entity or entities 318 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES NOTE Any new markup entities that you create will have the new line thickness Width Pixels Customize the line thickness when Customize is selected in the Line Thickness list When other line thicknesses are selected this field displays its value in pixels but cannot be edited Arrow Style Add an arrow h
48. Modes for more information STEP RESULT All entities of the selected snapping modes are highlighted on the model 4 From the Units list select a measurement unit ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 191 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MEASURING IN 3D FILES 5 On the model select an entity as the starting point for the measure ment ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you want to take more than one measurement from the same starting point select Fix Position 6 Select the snapping modes that you want to select as the end point for the measurement STEP RESULT All entities of the selected entity types are highlighted on the model 7 On the model select the entity you want to measure to RESULT The distance from the first set of entities to the second set is highlighted by a line The measured distance Delta X Delta Y and Delta Z appear in the Measurement dialog Additionally the coordinates for the center point of each entity displays in the FromEJ and To I fields To take another measurement click Reset Calibrating Distance Calibrate the distance measurement TASK 1 Measure distance between two points or measure cumulative distance 2 From the Distance tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Distance Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance 3 From the Units list select the unit to which you want to calibrate the distance 4 Select Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to ca
49. Purge Version action allows you to remove unwanted Design versions and help optimize file storage To begin the process the Design object needs to be in the checked in state Purging starts at the orig inal version and continues down the Structure tab and goes through all the versions including the child objects The process stops if you cannot purge a child object Accessing Different File Versions from the Business Object Attachments Tab You can get open view and print any version of an attachment file from the Attachments tab of the business object You can easily access history without clicking through to the File Folder object This is useful when a single file is being modified and accessed by multiple people different functions For instance user can easily trace and identify in which versions another user made their edits this is identified from version create date and checkout user The Versions dialog displays for each version the Version Creation Date date the version was created whether that version has redlines indicated by the Has Been Redlined icon and the Checkout User user who created that version This allows you to easily see the history of an attachment from the Attachments tab including who modified the file and when it was modified Switching Between File Folders Version in Web Client To switch between versions of file folders from an object s Attachments tab in Web Client TASK 1 From
50. Save commands Working with Markup Files Saved States Markups can be saved as separate Markup files while working with the same document You have the option to add user information to the Markup file save and create separate Markup files with different markup IDs import and export Markup files or change the active Markup file When you create and save a Markup file with the exception of PDF files the view state of the file is also saved View states include zoom level extents rota 238 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP FILES tion settings transformation section plane and visibility When creating markups for 3D files containing imported models the imported design becomes part of the view state For EDA files you can save user defined layers sets with markups See Creating a User Defined View State information is also saved with each markup entity For instance if you were at a certain zoom level when you created a markup entity AutoVue saves the information with the markup entity To Go To the state you were at when you created or modified the markup entity from the Markup tree right click the markup entity and then select Go To NOTE When selecting Go To feature when viewing PDF files Auto Vue highlights the markup entity and preserves the current zoom level Creating a Markup File To create a Markup file TASK 1 View a file that you want to markup 2
51. Search ssssssssssesssscscccscsccsseessecsscesscsssesuscesccesccsscesscessccsscessesseecscesees 46 Initiate Compare In AUtoVUCuunnsossnriinnnnn a ae Ri EER el aa anes 47 Initiating COMPAS iN AUTOV UG es esivercccascslesccevcassstencoduscceccauscusteasan scent escesaneses ccecosesodeevenstbaseaesadtneantites 48 Selecting a File From Local Directory lt ssss esci pects ov cierto hae Gunetinancteneeadaosacwes 48 Selecting a File from Agile BOOKMALKS csssssssscssesesssessessncsssssscsessnsssssncessesscseecusssecanceacesseaseeneess 49 Selecting a File with Agile Search ccssssssssssssssssssesesssessessscsssssscsessnsssecsnccecssscsscsssesessnseasenseseesseess 49 Working With 2D Fil Susena a EAER N RE EA RREAN e 51 AEn E A EAE EAE A T E EEE AE 51 2D Viewing OPtiON Sicesticeicastessshecesiseiiesteea ntl cecaceonchun A AE E a a R 52 Using the Pan and Zoom Window sssesssssssssseseeessessnsssesseeseessnsssssseecseeosossssssesseessessnsssesseeesressnsssss 55 Working with 2D Vector Files mnre E E A A AV 56 Manipulating 2D Vector Files s ssssssssssssseeoseesssssssssoeseeesssssnssssseresesensossssseeeeeesssssssssesreessessssssesseeesesss 56 Selecting WIC WS eenn nA E RAE E A EAR AA E nde AATE 65 Specifyiig a VIEW PoiNtississssssenion e a AE eaten catia ameluaaes 66 Analyzing 2D Vegt r Filesi asien ansk intesoiainas iesse 66 Comparing 2D Files fo 5 55 seas sacsras ts R aataao edo laa eae 67 Drawing INformation nevcasddlsacac
52. Select Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance to a value 298 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS 3D SPECIFIC MARKUPS 5 Select Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance by a factor 6 Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration result appears in the Measurement dialog 7 Click Close to close the Distance tab Measuring an Angle Use the Angle option to measure the precise angle between points on a drawing TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Angle ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Angle a STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 2 Click the Angle tab 3 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring STEP RESULT Entities of the selected types are highlighted on the model 4 To measure the angle between an entity type and a plane select the With Plane check box and then select the plane from the list 5 From the Measured Angle Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the angle 6 Click two points on the model to define the angle If you selected a Plane click the vertex edge or face whose angle you want to measure between the plane ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To take another measurement click Reset STEP RESULT Angle arms appears indicating the angle The measurement appears in theMeasurement dialog 8 Cl
53. To define more layer sets repeat steps 2 to 6 8 Click Close to close the Layers dialog RESULT The new layer set appears in the Layers list beside the Layers Control button amp on the AutoVue toolbar Deleting User Defined Layer Sets To delete a user defined layer set perform the following steps TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Layers ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Layers STEP RESULT The Layers dialog opens 2 From the Layer Sets list select the user defined layer set you want to delete ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can only delete user defined layer sets 3 Click Delete ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The layer settings of the deleted layer set remain displayed on the screen until you select another layer set 4 Click Apply to save the changes Click Close to close the Layers dialog 104 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES MANIPULATING EDA VIEWS Saving User Defined Layers Sets with Markups You can save user defined layer sets using Markup files TASK 1 Create custom layer sets 2 From the Markup menu select New ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Markup A Create any markup entities that you need 4 From the Markup menu select Save As STEP RESULT The Save Markup File As dialog appears 5 Enter the markup information and click OK to close th
54. URL p 3 Inthe File name field enter the URL of the file to open ADDITIONAL INFORMATION For example http AutoVueServer files abc dwg or ftp ftpserver1 com files abc doc 4 Click Open RESULT The file opens in the AutoVue workspace Opening a File from Agile PLM With AutoVue for Agile you can open a file located in Agile PLM from the File Open dialog TASK 1 From the File menu select Open STEP RESULT The File Open dialog appears 2 To open a file from the backend DMS system from the left panel click Agiler STEP RESULT The bookmarked Agile Objects appear in the File Open dialog 3 Select a file and then click Open RESULT The file opens in the AutoVue workspace ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 29 AUTOVUE BASICS OPENING FILES Searching for Files in Agile PLM Streaming Files Archive Files With AutoVue for Agile you can search for files in the system by entering specific search criteria in the File Open dialog TASK 1 From the File menu select Open STEP RESULT The File Open dialog appears 2 K search for a file in Agile PLM from the left panel click Search Agile Fa STEP RESULT The search criteria options load in the File Open dialog 3 Enter the search criteria and then click Search ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Alternately to view all files in Agile PLM leave the search criteria fields empty and click Search STEP RESULT The file results appear in the dialog
55. Unselected Highlight Entity Activate this option to highlight all entities that you select This option is enabled by default NOTE The default highlight color is yellow See also Modifying Colors ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 217 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR EDA FILES Dim Unselected Activate this option to dim all the entities that are not selected Selected entities retain their original entity color From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Dim Unselected amp When you select Dim Unselected you can set the dimness level for entities that are not selected Drag the slider to the right to increase the dimness level and to the left to decrease the dimness level The icon to the right of the dimness settings in theConfiguration dialog lets you preview the dimness level Additionally with Dim Unselected you can select the Thicken Highlighted Entity check box This option makes the selected entity appear more pronounced Deselect the check box to return the entity to its default thickness Displaying Tooltips When you hover the mouse over an entity a tooltip appears to show you infor mation about the entity You can disable or enable these tooltips When the option is selected AutoVue automatically retrieves the entity information from the server Clear this option if you do not want this behavior every time your mouse hovers over an entity TASK 1 From the tree select EDA 2
56. View mode See 2D Specific Markups NOTE When you are creating a markup entity you can press the Escape key to cancel When measuring in Markup mode the specified measurement lines and values are displayed on the current active markup layer as entities These entities can be moved resized or deleted You can also modify the font of a measure entity align a free snap measure entity to the horizontal or vertical axis as well as add ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 281 MARKUPS CREATING EDA MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES units of measure and symbols to a measurement and have them appear on the drawing AutoVue provides the option to snap to geometrical or electrical points on the drawing In Markup mode you can choose from several measure options to create markup measure entities From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Measurement to access the following measure options Option Description Angle Measure the angle between selected points From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Angle 2 Arc Measure an arc entity From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Arc a Area Measure a selected area From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Area 2 Distance Measure the distance between two points From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance Minimum Distance Measure the minimum distance between entities From the Markup Ent
57. When you are creating a markup entity you can press the Escape key to cancel ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 259 MARKUPS 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS 2D Markup Entities You can create many different types of 2D markup entities To access the markup entities from the Markup menu select Add Entity The available 2D markup entities are listed in the following table Markup Entity Arc Entity Information Click and drag the mouse to draw an Arc From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Arc N Box Click and drag to draw a rectangle From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Box c To draw a square instead of a rectangle press and hold the Shiftkey while you click and drag Cloud Click and drag to draw a Cloud From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Cloud O Circle Click and drag to draw a circle From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Circle g To draw a circle instead of an ellipse press and hold the Shiftkey while you click and drag Freestyle Create freestyle entities From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Freestyle rre See Adding a Freestyle Entity Highlight Click and drag to highlight a boxed area From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Highlight P The highlighted box will be filled with a transparent color Leader Create leader entities From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Leade
58. a Distance Measure the precise distance between any two Vertex Edge Midedge Arc Center or Face From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance Minimum Distance Measure minimum distance between any two Vertex Edge Midedge Arc Center or Face From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Minimum Distance 2 You cannot create a markup measure entity when measuring minimum distance Vertex Coordinates Provide the coordinates of each vertex From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Vertex Coordinates 22 3D Snapping Modes Snapping modes allow you to select or snap to different entity types on a model For example if you select Vertex all vertices are highlighted and a snap box appears when you move the cursor over a vertex Snapping modes allow you to snap to the following entities NOTE The behavior of snapping modes change in regards to the selected measurement option For example the behavior of arc center is not the same for distance and minimum distance ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 295 MARKUPS 3D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Button Description Behavior Vase is Highlights verticeson A snap box appears when you hover the mouse the model pointer over a vertex Edge Line Highlights edgeson the The edge is highlighted when you hover the Fs model mouse pointer NOTE When measuring Minimum Distance the finite edge is selected
59. a E nin auenicuaane N anaes 20 Markup Navigation Tir Essenis ni ES 26 Status Bal scssecssasenyssussassanccasscvessbuasosossgheosegnsenyaduseabvoneytisun usd RE EE E E R ie 26 Quick MENUS scars sas cneceesccpanznecs cbcasocneteasstseanteneacadeaceattacnne db desasnecsdiqulanieaatatarasppselaunabsleeatebasaustsnusbincceles 27 MOVING ODIOCUS noens nan nn EAA i aaron AARE ETES 27 Accessing Commands with Shortcut MenUS sssessssssseeessesssssssssecsseessssnssssoeseeessesnsssessteesessnssssss 28 Canceling an Operation in Progress ssssssssssssssescsscsessssssessncsssssscsescssssessuceasesscsscssscsecsnceaceascssceseess 28 CETTE E mi ESE E E E A EEEE 28 Opening dikotak File rsss aeea Eeo Seanet n eee Eas osdcadyesne onteatu Seenioetant 28 Openinga URE esnia aiia oye ii a week E E AE aE oaia aE A a i aiia 29 Opening a File from Agile PLM ssssssssssseeesssssssssesseeeseessssssssceeseenssossssseeseeessossnsssesseeesseonsssesseeeseronssssss 29 Streaming File Si sevssrsesessnd asaesatnatootuntcsnnsedl piano Aane AN ARE AARE AARRE REON AR ante 30 AENA E E E EE T AEE E E EA 30 File Propere Sa eer a Aa Sites N EA a e a a E RE 31 Navigating a Document with Multiple Pages esssssssssesesssssssssecseeesssssssssesscessessnsssssseeeseesssssssseeesee 32 Opening Agile Attachment Files sssssssessssssssncssssssccsssssssusssesssssscssssscsuscascsuceaccassescsuscascsnseaceaseescesseas 32 Viewing Files from Web Client Attachments Tab ssssssssssee
60. center and diameter TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Arc ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Arc Q ai STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 2 Select From 3 Points if you want to measure the arc between three points Snapping modes are displayed 3 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select all snapping modes click All On To deselect all snapping modes click All Off 4 Select Arc Entity if you want to measure a predefined arc From the Arc Info list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance of the arc 6 From the Measured Angle Units list select the unitin which you want to measure the angle Select Add Radius if you want measure the radius Select Add Diameter if you want to measure the diameter If you selected From 3 Points click three points to define the arc STEP RESULT The points are joined by an arc 10 If you selected an Arc Entity click an edge of the arc STEP RESULT The arc is highlighted 11 Click to complete the measurement STEP RESULT The measured line path measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measurements for center point coordinates radius diameter arc length start and end of angle and sweep appear in the Measurement Entities dialog 12 To move the v
61. deselect the check box beside the filter or filters that you want to disable 11 To enable an Attribute Filter select the check box beside the filter or filters 12 Toremovean Attribute Filter in the Entity Search dialog select the filter and click Remove STEP RESULT The Attribute Filter disappears from the list 186 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES PERFORMING AN ADVANCED 3D SEARCH 13 Inthe Entity Search dialog click Search STEPRESULT A list of entities matching the search criteria appear in the Results list displaying the name and type of the entities 14 Click Close to close the Entity Search dialog Performing an Advanced 3D Search From the Entity Search dialog you can search for entities using volume or loca tion filters Volume specifies the size of the entity you can specify the minimum and maximum dimensions an entity must be between Location specifies an axes aligned boundary box you can specify the dimensions for an axes aligned boundary box that an entity must be inside TASK 1 From the Entity Search dialog click the Advanced 3D Search tab Entity Search 3D Search Advanced 3D Search Volume C Enabled Minimum Dimensions Maximum Dimensions Location Enabled Point 1 Point 2 2 Tosearch for entities by Volume select the Enabled check box ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you want to search for entities that match all three dimensions select the Completely con
62. design 19 Unconnected Pin Select this check box if you want to check for any pin pad that is not graphically intersected with any traces on the same physical layer Verifying a Design The following steps describe how to verify a design TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Verify Design STEP RESULT The Verify Design dialog appears To enable a design rule select the associated check box in the Design Rules section of the dialog To disable a design rule deselect the check box ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can sort the design rules by clicking the column headings for Enabled Description or Value To add a value to the selected design rule double click the corre sponding row of the Value column and enter a value ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The selected design rule must be enabled to be able to add a value In the Maximum Violations field enter the maximum number of results you want to display in the Results list From the Distance Units list select the unit you want to use as the unit of measure 122 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES DESIGN VERIFICATION 7 Click Verify ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Verify button changes to Stop To stop the Design Verification process at any point click Stop When the process is complete the total number of errors found during the Design Verification process up to the maximum number specified in the Maximum Violati
63. dialog ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 59 WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES Overlaying Files in Web Client and Java Client You can overlay files from the Attachments Files tabs by selecting View gt Overlay or View File s gt Overlay from the Web Client and Java Client respectively Alternately from the Java Client you can initiate overlaying files with the By Search feature T ASK 1 2 Display the Attachments tab or the Files tab Select a file row you want to work with and choose 9 2 2 x or 9 2 1 x Web Client View gt By Search gt Overlay The View Files by Search dialog appears with three Search tabs 9 3 x Web Client View The file opens in AutoVue then choose File gt Import File as Overlay Java Client View File s gt By Search gt Overlay The Select Files dialog appears with three Search tabs The search dialog allows you to search for any business object for example items or manufacturer parts and select the attachments of those objects to use to overlay Use any of the following search methods Tab Description Search Create a simple search or an advanced search You can also check to search attachment contents Saved Opens to your navigation pane where you can browse in search folders Searches select a search and run it Again returned results may be moved to the Selected Items table and click OK Shortcuts Opens to your n
64. dialog Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Calibrating an Arc TASK 1 2 Measure an arc in the drawing From the Arc tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Radius Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance From the Units list select a unit of measurement to which you want to calibrate the distance Click Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate to a value Click Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate by a factor Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration results appear in the Arc tab Click Close to close the Measurement dialog 134 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL Working with 3D Files From AutoVue s 3D mode you have many ways in which to manipulate the model For example you can select model parts to transform independently from the rest of the model as well as modify the selected model part s visibility and attributes 3D mode also gives you the ability to perform an entity search and compute mass properties and it allows you to import 3D models into the current window and export files to other formats Additionally the Global Axes inform you of where the X Y and Z axes are positioned throughout all the oper ations you perform in AutoVue The Perspective option shows objects in three dimension with distances planes and curved surfaces adjusted to give a sense of depth You have lighting options where you can adjust the overall lighting
65. displays in the other ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 113 WORKING WITH EDA FILES CROSS PROBING window In this case take the following steps to see the 2D and 3D views of the PCB a In the window s dialog deselect the Automatic option b Select a different view from the TYPE list For example you can switch between Schematic and PCB 3D View 7 Select an entity in the 3D view RESULT The same entity is highlighted in the 2D view of this file NOTE You can select entities in the 2D view or 3D view of the file The selected entities are highlighted in both open views of this file Showing the Net Connectivity when Cross Probing To display the net connectivity of the design when cross probing perform the following steps TASK 1 Select an entity or entities in any open file 2 Right click and select Show Net Connectivity RESULT The net connectivity for the entity or entities that you selected are highlighted in all the files Zooming when Cross Probing When you are cross probing files you can zoom in on the entities you select Zoom in on a selected entity or entities e When cross probing between a schematic drawing and a PCB design e When cross probing between the 2D and 3D views of the same file TASK 1 Select an entity or entities in either one of the open files or views ADDITIONALINFORMATION If you are cross probing between a schematic drawing or a PCB design you can s
66. displays the printable area on top of the page area so that users can have a clear idea of what will be printed NOTE Option is only enabled when Current is selected from Document Pages TASK 1 Configure the print properties ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 333 PRINTING PREVIEWING A FILE BEFORE PRINTING 2 Click Partial Preview in the Print Properties dialog STEP RESULT The Partial Print Preview dialog appears and highlights the area that will be printed The Paper size Printable Area and Drawing Area are displayed 3 Click OK to close the Partial Print Preview dialog Previewing a File Before Printing You can preview a print copy of the current active file on screen according to your printer s capabilities and the print property settings TASK 1 View the file in AutoVue 2 From the File menu select Print ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Print STEP RESULT The Print Properties dialog appears Configure the print properties 4 Click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can print the file from the Print Preview window by clicking Print You can also zoom in and out of a file as well as navigate from one page to another of a multi page file STEP RESULT The file appears in Print Preview Mode in the Print Preview window 5 Click Close to close the Print Preview window 334 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL PRINTING PRINTING A FILE Printing a Fi
67. drag the frame handles ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Adding Text With AutoVue you can add a text box entity to a markup TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Text ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Text Al Click and drag on the drawing to define the dimensions of the text box Click in the text box and enter the text you want to add ADDITIONALINFORMATION The height of the text box will adjust to accommodate the text 290 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS ADDING TEXT 4 To change text box font properties from the Markup menu select Format and then select Font ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the respective font property lists on the Markup Properties toolbar you can also modify the font type style and size STEP RESULT The Font dialog appears allowing you to change the font type style and size Click OKto implement the font changes and to close the Font dialog 6 To change the line properties or fill color of the text box select the text box then from the Markup menu select Format and then select the property or properties you want to change ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the respective line property lists on the Markup Properties toolbar you can also modify the line style line thickness fill types and fill colors 7 Ri
68. drawing and the tree ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 255 Markups MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES Viewing the History of a Signoff TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Signoff ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Signoff 2 Click History STEP RESULT The Signoff History dialog appears displaying the author date and time the signoff was created 3 Click Cancel to close the Signoff dialog Adding a Symbol A Symbollis a graphical entity such as a company logo Before a graphic entity can be used as a Symbol it must be added to a Symbol Library You can create a Symbol Library and add Symbols to it You can also add or remove Symbols from existing libraries NOTE When a Symbol is created the graphic entity is converted to a Windows Metafile Format WMF As a result the resulting graphic in the Symbol may differ from the original image as it has been converted to another format In order to avoid these discrepancies in the output it is recommended to use AutoCAD formats as the graphical entity However you may still use any 2D raster image 1 In previous releases of AutoVue a Symbol markup entity was called a Stamp 256 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES as the graphical entity but differences between the Sybmol and native file should be expected TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Ent
69. drawing to define the arc ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To take another measurement click Reset STEP RESULT The points are joined by an arc The measurements for center point coordinates radius diameter arc length start and end of angle and sweep appear in the Arc tab 6 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Arcin Vector Files Use the Arc option to define an arc in the drawing and measure its radius center arc length start and end of angle sweep and diameter TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure oat INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure im STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears 2 Click the Arc tab 3 Select From 3 Points if you want to measure the arc between three points Snapping modes are displayed 80 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 2D FILES MEASURING IN 2D FILES 10 Click the snapping modes that you want to select as the points for the measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select all snapping modes click All On To clear all snapping modes click All Off See 2D Vector Snapping Modes for more infor mation Select Arc Entity if you want to measure a predefined arc From the Arc Info Unit list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance From the Measure Angle Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the angle If you selected From 3 Points click three points on the drawing to define the
70. drawings that do not contain layers the Layers menu option and button are disabled The Layers dialog has a Physical Layers section and a Logical Layers section You can display and hide these sections by clicking Expand and Collapse respectively Physical and Logical Layers Sections The Logical Layers section displays the layers in the order they display in the workspace The Physical Layers section displays the layers in the order they appear in the layer stackup when manufactured The Physical Layers section displays a matrix with a mapping of physical layer names to entity types Each row in the matrix corresponds to a physical layer in the board Each column in the matrix lets you control the visibility of an entity type such as pin via or trace The entity types that display depend on the enti ties available in the open file Select a physical layer to change its visibility layer order and color Select or deselect the entity type of a physical layer to affect its visibility separately from the other entities of the layer When you select a physical layer from the Physical Layers section the associated logical layers are also selected in the Logical Layers section You can also select individual logical layers from the Logical Layers section or press the Shift or Control key to select multiple logical layers NOTE One physical layer can be selected at a time The Logical Layers section displays a list of logical laye
71. fabrication to escape Vertex A logical point at which a track is ended and restarted A vertex is located at each change of direction on the track Via feed through hole A hole connecting layers of a PCB A through hole via connects the surface layers of a board On multilayer boards a via not reaching a surface layer on one side is called a blind via and a via not reaching a surface layer on either side thus being externally invisible is called a buried via Viastack A numbered list of via descriptions Each description contains a via definition including layer style drill diameter size offset and solder mask guard width ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL APPENDIX A EDA TERMS AND DEFINITIONS EDA Term Via string Definition The copper etch that exists between a SMT pad and a corresponding fanout via Zero length connection An unrouted connection between layers where the end points in the connection have the same X and Y coordinates Zone An area on a PCB layer designated as copper or anti copper Copper zones may have net names while anti copper zones may not ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 365 APPENDIX A EDA TERMS AND DEFINITIONS 366 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL Feedback If you have any questions or require support for AutoVue please contact your system administrator Some customization and maintenance must be done on the
72. footprint library containing all the footprints used in that project Ground plane A large area on the PCB usually an entire layer that provides a common ground connection for all component ground pins and other ground connections Heatsink A mechanical device made of a high thermal conductivity material that dissipates heat generated by a component or assembly Heuristics A method of routing that consists of repeated attempts to apply very simple routing patterns to unrouted connections in order to complete the routing quickly and cleanly Typically heuristics are used for memory and short point to point routing Hole The area where board material must be removed by drilling or milling Isolation The clearance around a pad track zone or via that defines the nearest approach allowed by conductors of another signal set Jumper wire A discrete electrical component or wire used to make electrical connections between points that have no copper etch due to board density or some other factor Keepout An area fill within which no routing is allowed ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 361 APPENDIX A EDA TERMS AND DEFINITIONS EDA Term Definition Land The copper pad needed for a surface mount pin Layer The copper pad needed for a surface mount pin Manual routing Individual connections in the form of traces vertices arcs and so on which are ent
73. for entities by the size of an entity and location or select entities from the results list and have them appear highlighted in the workspace and in the Model Tree The search options are 182 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES ENTITY SEARCH Where 3D Search tab Option Selection Description Specify if you want to search the entire model or selected parts or parts that are not selected Type Specify the type of entity you want to search For example part body assembly or PMI Show PMI parent entity in results When selected displays only the parent entity of a PMI entity that matches search criteria If cleared displays PMI entities that match search criteria in the Results dialog Option is enabled if Type is set to PMI or All and file has PMI entities PMI Filter Filters the entities that have PMI information Option is enabled if Type is set to PMI or All PMI Type Specify the specific PMI attribute you want to search Option is disabled if PMI Filter is set to All Containing Text Specify a text string that you want to search AutoVue searches for a specified string in attribute names and attribute values Attribute Filters Specify attributes to search for in 3D model See Performing an Attribute based Search Attribute Filter dialog Name Specify the specific attribute you want to search Some of the available attributes
74. for measuring To select all snapping modes click All On To deselect all snapping modes click All Off See 2D Vector Snapping Modes for more informa tion 6 Select Between 2 lines if you want to measure the angle between two lines 7 From the Measured Angle Units list select the unit 8 Ifyou selected From 3 Points click three points on the drawing to define the angle 9 Ifyou selected Between 2 Lines click two lines on the drawing to define the angle ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement STEP RESULT Angle arms appear with an arc connecting them The angle measurement appears in the Measurement dialog 10 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 79 WORKING WITH 2D FILES MEASURING IN 2D FILES Arcin non Vector Files Use the Arc option to define an arc in the drawing and calculate its arc center radius diameter and arc length TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure Ke STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears displaying the measurement options 2 Click the Arc tab 3 Inthe Arc Info section select a unit of measurement from the Length Units list in which to measure the length of the arc 4 Inthe Measured Angle section select a unit of measurement from the Sweep Units list in which to measure the angle of the arc 5 Click points on the
75. gt Component Specify the minimum component to component clearance on the same physical layer component top side or component bottom side Only the logical layer that defines the actual outline of the component is considered A component entity is usually made up of geometries on different logical layers silkscreen keepout and so on but only the logical layer that defines the actual outline of the component is consid ered ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 119 WORKING WITH EDA FILES DESIGN VERIFICATION Type Manufacturing Design Rule Check Minimum Annular Ring Description Specify the minimum distance between the pad outline and the outline of its drill hole on all physical layers The two outlines geometries are part of the pin pad entity but on different logical layers Minimum Pad Diameter Specify the minimum diameter of a pad Only applicable to rounded pads Acute Angle in degrees Specify the minimum acute angle between connected traces on the same physical layer Only two traces belonging to the same net are considered Minimum Drill Hole Size Specify the minimum diameter of the drill hole size allowed Only applicable to rounded pads 10 Maximum Drill Hole Size Specify the maximum diameter of the drill hole size allowed Only applicable to rounded pads Electrical Maximum Via Count
76. item 333 File Folder 087 Version 3 2 ECO_045 creates pending Revision C of Item 333 arches bmp item 333 C 3 Markups are created through ECO_045 ECO _012 associated with pending Revision C of Item 333 which references File Folder 087 File Folder 087 Version 3 These markups can be viewed Version 3 only through the Affected Items tab of ECO_045 or through the Attachment tab of arches brnp Item 333 pending Revision C 4 ECO_045 is reviewed approved and released File arches bmp in File Folder 087 is not yet updated and remains at Version 3 with markups Released Item 333 Revision C includes attachment markups viewable from the released item s Attachments tab 5 arches bmp is checked out modified and checked in File Folder 087 is updated to Version 4 Now released Item 333 Revision C does not include attachment markups hem 333 C ECO_045 File Folder 087 Version 4 arches _bmp G To view the redlined version 3 of arches bmp use the Show Versions feature on the Attachments tab of Released Item 333 Revision C or on the Redline Attachments tab of ECO_045 Click Web Client or double click Java Client the Has Been Redlined icon in the version history dialog table to view arches bmp Version 3 and its markups ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 235 MARKUPS MARKUP PROMOTION Markup Promotion Markup promotion is the ability to bring forward or promote Change markup promotion between versions within the
77. make active Click OK to make the selected Markup file active ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 243 MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP LAYERS Working with Markup Layers Markup files can be divided into layers with each layer having its own unique name You can create name and color layers to organize your work For example different colors can indicate time priorities and each layer can contain markups with a common purpose When working with markup layers you can view layers individually or in combination add rename or delete layers You can also specify a different color for each layer NOTE The default layer color is red See also Moving a Markup Entity to Another Layer Creating a Markup Layer From the Markup Layers dialog you can create a markup layer TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Markup Layers STEP RESULT The Markup Layers dialog appears Markup Layers Markup Layers Markup N LayerName COLOR jacad2006 002 o Red acad2006 001 0 Red Untitled4 lo Red UntitledS lo Red HAKE Currently Active Layer 0 2 Click New STEP RESULT The New Markup Layer dialog appears 244 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP LAYERS Enter a name for the markup layer 4 Click OK STEP RESULT The new markup layer is added to the list in the Markup Layers dialog 5 To change the color of the new layer click Color STEP RESULT The
78. menu select Transform and then select Reset Selected ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also reset selected model parts To do so from the Model Tree deselect the check box beside the parts in the Transfor mation column w RESULT The model or selected parts are reverted back to their original transformation Transforming a Model by Setting Values TASK 1 10 11 From the Manipulate menu select Transform and then select Define ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also select Trans form STEP RESULT The Transformation dialog appears Select the model part or parts that you want to rotate translate or scale ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one model part press the Shift or Control key while selecting To rotate the model by set values enter the X Y and Z value To translate the model by set values enter the X Y and Z value To view a mirror image in the Mirror section of the dialog select a check box To scale the model by a factor enter a scale factor in the Factor field Click Apply To apply absolute transformation instead of incremental select the Absolute check box Click Apply To repeat a transformation deselect Absolute then continue clicking Apply ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To set the model to its original transformation click Reset Click Close to close the Transformation dialog STEP RESULT The transformation state remains displayed
79. metal zone Cross hatching The breaking up of large conductive areas by the use of a pattern of lines and spaces in the conductive material Datum A specific location a point that serves as a reference to locate a PCB pattern or layer for manufacture Density On a PCB the degree to which components are packed on the board Generally the density is given as the number of square inches per equivalent i e a lower number indicates a more dense board Discrete components Components with three or fewer electrical connections for example resistors or capacitors Electrical check The process of checking the PCB to ensure that the connections they are on match those specified in the net list 360 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL APPENDIX A EDA TERMS AND DEFINITIONS EDA Term Definition Fill zone A zone that defines an area to be filled with copper Fine pitch A class of surface mount components that is characterized by pins measuring 0 025 inches or less from pad center to pad center Footprint The physical description of a component It consists of three elements padstacks representing the pads of the component obstacles representing among other things the physical outline of the component silkscreens keepouts keepins and assembly drawing data and text documenting the footprint information for example the component name You may want each project to have its own
80. name board side component class and device type ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 159 WORKING WITH 3D FILES ENTITY PROPERTIES Ifa 3D file has Product and Manufacturing Information PMI anda PMI entity is selected the PMI attributes are displayed along with the above general attri butes Some of the viewable PMIattributes are X Axis Y Axis font color text font name and tolerance type Viewing Attributes TASK 1 To view the attributes of specific model parts select the parts from the model To view the attributes of the entire 3D model make sure that no parts are selected From the Analysis menu select Show Entity Properties ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also right click in the workspace and select Show Entity Properties or in the Model Tree select the model part or parts then right click and select Show Entity Properties STEP RESULT The Entity Properties dialog appears Click the Attributes tab STEP RESULT The attributes of the selected model parts are displayed in a hier archical tree Click Close to close the Entity Properties dialog Viewing Mass Properties The Mass Properties tab displays the precise measurements for mass volume area center of gravity moments of inertia and inertia tensor for any model or selection TASK 1 Select the part or parts for which you want to calculate the mass prop erties To select multiple parts press the Shift or Control key while selecti
81. or redlining A markup is an object or entity that you attach to a file All markups are saved in a separate file called a Markup or a Markup file When you display a file with its markups the markups are overlaid as a layer on top of the drawing AutoVue provides a variety of flexible user friendly entities To name a few there are circles clouds polygons and leaders You can also attach text to entities insert a note for longer comments add attachments or add a stamp such as a company logo In addition you can create measurement markup entities and hyperlinks that link between the current file and other associated files or applications 16 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL AutoVue Basics This section introduces the basics of working in AutoVue such as starting and exiting Auto Vue the help menu changing the locale of Auto Vue displaying file versions information and the AutoVue graphical user interface GUI The section on the AutoVue GUI discusses the included menu bars tool bars navi gation panel and navigation tree AutoVue Version Information The About dialog displays AutoVue version and build information You can also view the version build number and build date of components that are shipped with AutoVue You can also export this information into a text file Viewing Version and Build Information To view product version information TASK 1 From the Help menu select About STEP RESULT The About dialo
82. or versions of a file Compare Multiple Revisions of a File To compare multiple item revisions of an attached file TASK 1 From the item Attachments tab select the file you want to compare 36 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL AUTOVUE BASICS OPENING AGILE ATTACHMENT FILES 2 From the tab menu select View STEP RESULT AutoVue opens and displays the selected file 3 From the viewer menu select Analysis and then Compare STEP RESULT The File Open dialog appears 4 Select the Document Version checkbox From the drop down menu select another revision of the file to compare ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Only released item revisions appear in the drop down list To compare the attachment of a pending revisions view the pending revi sion and then use the Compare feature to select released revisions for comparison 6 Click OK STEP RESULT AutoVue opens the selected version in a second window and displays the differences between the two files in a third window 7 To compare another revision from the viewer menu select File and then Exit Compare 8 Repeat steps 3 through 6 to select another item revision Compare Multiple Versions of a File To compare multiple file folder versions of a file TASK 1 From the file folders File tab select the file you want to compare 2 From the tab menu select View STEP RESULT AutoVue opens and displays the selected file 3 From the viewer menu select Analysis and t
83. required by 2D 3D EDA or PDF files TASK 1 From the Category tree expand General and then select Font Paths 2 Click Add STEP RESULT The Add Path dialog appears 3 Enter the directory path or scroll to locate the directory where the external font files are located ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To browse all subdirectories below the current path type two asterisks at the end of the file path For example C samples will result in browsing all subdirectories below samples To browse one subdirectory below the current path type one asterisk at the end of the file path For example C samples will result in browsing one subdirectory below samples 4 Click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To add more than one path to the list repeat steps 3 to 5 STEP RESULT The directory path appears 5 To change the order select the path you want to move then click Up or Down to move the path to where you want it in the list 6 Toremovea path select the path and click Remove STEP RESULT The selected path disappears from the list 7 Click OK to close the Configuration dialog The Measurement options let you define the default measurement units and the number of decimal places ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 207 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR 2D FILES From the Configuration tree expand General and then select Measurement to display the options you need The available options are as follow
84. ring DISTANCE ori ccasce sacs sercis osani aceia iaa ee aiae a aaa Taa NaS aas Tanai Eate 283 Measuring Cumulative Distance sessssssessseessssssssseseeessessnsssssseeserssnsssssseosreesssssnsssesstessrssnsssssseeeses 284 Calibrating Distante nnise n neeese irera e e e aieo eA eres aTe aS 285 Measuring Aled ster cstisdcirn Gets titucn easadehaeeiiaiee rE d Eara S e ied AnNa EP E EASAN a iE ai 286 M s ringan ANGIO ai diecaseicinex scar mates ERER R RRi 287 Measuring ANAC oases ae tea eats leche bcde caste cdecdatascactan scantala duly seasisladoenaciees cs eaceetanndeansacisieisn 288 Calibrating aN Af ager renter re ten commer serie tn E E ITO AraC ATI nS 289 Measuring Minimum DistanCe sessessssesssssesssseessseeessseeessseessseesosessessseeseseessserosseeosseeessseerssseresssees 289 Adding T t snno anen e a a E oar as enim ae es 290 Hiding the box surrounding the t Xt ssssssssssseeesssssssssssscecseesssssssseeseeessessnssossereseeosnsssssseeereesrssss 291 Addinga Noten esnsissccdasinnsacardawnncdieoudisad a a A R RO GTR 292 Printing a NOt os cine 5 a ase aaa ae Saat a ae os oad 292 INES ELC Mark p Entities 2 cessccucreseessecsovs pdsouecsencussvsSssolyuesestennvaseesusevucvisaca codeoupisvveseatovneuneonuscseacaevseonraniton 293 3D Specific Mark OS nseni nan ae avts cacao naw abies mas eS 293 BL sete UMS VUE E E A EE A Mactan toned cantik 294 Creating 3D Markup Measure Entities ccccssssssscssesssssessncsssssscses
85. same pending revision of the change order Ad Hoc markups from older file folder versions to the newer versions This allows you to re validate older markups against a new design Markup Promotion for Change Based Markups TASK e To promote change based markups in Web Client a Open the change order and display the Affected Items tab b On the Affected Items tab select the row of the item you want to redline The redline tabs for the selected item appear in the lower section of the Affected Items tab c On the redline Attachments tab select one or more rows and click Redline This button is active only when markups are allowed d When AutoVue opens create a new markup From the AutoVue Markup menu select New e From the AutoVue menu select Open STEP RESULT The Markup Files dialog appears f Click the All Revisions check mark STEP RESULT AutoVue displays all valid markups The available markups are associated to files that have the same file extension as the file you are viewing g Select the markup files you want to promote to the current markup h Click OK STEP RESULT The promoted markups display in the file you are currently viewing i To save the promoted markups with the change order revision save the markups before exiting the viewer From the AutoVue Markup menu choose one of the Save commands 236 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS MARKUP PROMOTION To promote change based markups in
86. selected select Not selected From the Type list select the type of entity that you want to search ADDITIONAL INFORMATION For 3D Models that have PMI information the PMI search features are enabled Select the Show PMI parent entity in results check box if you only want the parent entity of the selected PMI entity or entities to appear in the Results list Deselect the check box if you want all PMI entities to appear in the Results list ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The option is enabled if PMI or All are selected from the Type list and the file has PMI entities 184 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES ENTITY SEARCH From the PMI Filter list select the type of entities that you want to search e To search all entities select All e To search entities with PMI select With PMI To search entities without PMI select Without PMI From the PMI Type list select the type of entity that you want to search ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The PMI Type list is disabled if All is selected from the PMI Filter list Click Search to perform the entity search RESULT The search results appear in the Results list Performing a 3D Text Search From the Containing Text field of the Entity Search dialog you can search for a text string in the 3D model By default AutoVue searches the attribute name and attribute value for the entered text Enter the text you want to search for in the Containing Text field
87. surrounding a model or just its source light You can also customize operations to suit your needs For example you can create and save your own views Define cross sections and cut throughs of 3D models There are also features like Bill of Material BOM and Product and Manufac turing Information PMI Filtering Understanding 3D Basics 3D CAD assemblies are made up of many files dependent one upon another The 3D files are used primarily in manufacturing departments for drawing the blueprint of the new instrument 3D files may be added to the Files tab in one or several file folder objects e One File Folder All files in one CAD assembly are added to the Files tab of one file folder When you view the assembly Agile prompts you to identify the top file in the assembly and the complete assembly is displayed in AutoVue ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 135 WORKING WITH 3D FILES UNDERSTANDING 3D Basics One Design Assembly Files are added to the Files tab and parts files can be referenced from the Design added to the Structure tab Multiple File Folders The assembly file is added to the Files tab in one file folder object and parts files can be referenced by adding other file folder objects containing the files as relationships with no rules to the Relationships tab of the assembly s file folder object 3D files can be redlined both through a change order Redline Attachments and on the Files tab of the file
88. tao rtucdbusobvaatonnietiaeedba Hannes 135 Understanding SW BasiCss asus sinus alae a on earn UIs 135 Viewing 3D CAD Assemblies in a Multiple file File Folder from the 9 2 2 x or 9 2 1 x Web ANE EEE ESE E aie eters T leon tates Mamta seater 136 Viewing 3D CAD Assemblies in Multiple file File Folder from the 9 3x Web Client 137 Viewing 3D CAD Assemblies in a Multiple file File Folder from Java Client 138 Models Tab and Model Tree vassistectescetssarcrcscacu ates cseeatacemuniinadieauace men cddenae 138 WiGWS Tacit cetera ecen io vanes E E aoe nanan ec omeanas 139 Bookmarks Ta a n Me E a a Rca bite cle taal AOA telah We aA 140 Nea PACS E E A EE EE AET 140 Selecting Model Parts orena e a a aura nase a aneeoeasaos 141 Select Model Parts from the Workspace ssssssssssseeessssssssssscecseessssssssseoseeessssssssesseeessessnssesseresres 141 Selecting All Identical Parts Of a Model ou sesssssesssessessscsssssessusssessussscesssscsssssessnceacesscesceseesseses 141 RE Genter siscascuscsesecetcussstenictaass atten eea a a ARa N E R E A A 142 Re Centering a Model to a Selected Model Part sssssssssseseessssssssssesseessesssssseseeeseessnsssssseeeeessessss 142 Re CANE A a E Aes a AS 142 Entity Referent smssonni aiandi a aa aa ehai sis 142 Re Centering a Model to an Entity sssssssesssssssssssssssesossesseeseeseeseeseoseeeoseeeeesereeeeereereereereeeeererreeeereersees 143 IVIL STS ARAE AEEA EN 143 Expanding Collapsing the Model Tr e
89. the X Y and Z coordinates of the reoriented model or selection 6 Click Close to close the Entity Properties dialog The File Properties tab provides file related properties of the selected entity such as author date of creation keywords title and so on To view the file properties select a part or the whole model and then select Analysis and then Show Entity Properties From the Entity Properties dialog appears click the File Properties tab PMI Entities A 3D file s Product and Manufacturing Information PMI is composed of annotations that are included in design files These annotations indicate the limits and constraints that must be observed during the production of the object displayed in the 3D model At the highest level PMI provides information about dimensions feature control frames weld specifications and surface finishes This information is based upon key design features which are specified through datum targets measurement points reference geometry for example construction lines surfaces and objects or the geometry inherent in the object The following terms can be used interchangeably with the term PMI Datums Cosmetics Dimensioning Cosmetics Geometric Tolerances GTOLs Geometric Dimensioning and Tolerance GDT or GD amp T Functional Tolerance Annotation FTA or FTA amp A ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 163 WORKING WITH 3D FILES PMI ENTITIES PMI Filtering Use
90. the attachments table If the attachemment row refers to a file folder with only one file AutoVue opens and displays that file If the attachment row refers to a multiple file folder each file is listed in the File Name column Click the file link to open a the file with AutoVue Viewing Files from Web Client Files Tab To view a file from Web Client Files tab TASK 1 Goto the Files tab of a file folder object containing the files to be reviewed 2 Click the filename link in the file table STEP RESULT AutoVue opens and displays the file Viewing Files from Java Client Attachments Tab To view a file from Java Client Attachments tab TASK 1 Goto the Attachments tab of a business object that references the file 2 Double click the attachment row If the attachment row refers to a file folder with only one file AutoVue opens and displays the file If the attachment row refers to a multiple file folder the Select Files window appears Select one or more files to view and then click OK AutoVue opens and displays the files you selected Viewing Files from Java Client Files Tab To View a file from Java Client Files tab TASK 1 Goto the Files tab of a file folder object containing the files you want to view ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 33 AUTOVUE BASICS OPENING AGILE ATTACHMENT FILES 2 Double click the filename in the file table STEP RESULT AutoVue opens and displays
91. the background color for all views except the PCB 3D view and file types Selection Set the color when selecting an entity PCB Option Description Min Distance Set 1 Set color for the first minimum distance set Min Distance Set 2 Set color for the second minimum distance set Plated Drill Hole Set color for plated drill holes The default color is black To override the native color select Override Native Color NOTE Applicable to Cadence Allegro format only 220 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR EDA FILES 3D View Option Non plated Drill Hole Description Set color for non plated drill holes The default color is black To override the native color select Override Native Color NOTE Applicable to Cadence Allegro format only Option Default Board Color Description Configure the color of the board in 3D view Default Component Color Configure the component color in 3D view Enhanced Display Options You can configure the following enhanced display options for EDA files ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 221 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING BACKGROUND COLORS FOR GRAPHIC FILES Main Menu Display Options Option Plated Hole Visibility Description Select whether to use the native settings or turn on off the plated hole visibility NOTE Applicable to Cadence Allegro format only Non plat
92. the bottom of board modules A silkscreen is used for component and identification placement on a PCB and usually includes component outlines reference designators polarity indicators pin one markings part numbers the company name and copyright info ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 363 APPENDIX A EDA TERMS AND DEFINITIONS EDA Term SMT Surface Mount Technology Definition PCB technology whereby the leads on the chips and components are soldered onto the surface of the board rather than inserted into it The use of SMT results in smaller and faster printed circuit boards Solder mask A negative plot of pads with a guard band around the pads Also a lacquer applied to prevent solder from adhering to unwanted areas on the PCB Solder paste A pattern that serves as a template for solder paste application when the board is manufactured Solder side The PCB surface opposite the one on which most components are mounted component side Also the bottom layer of the board Test point A special point of access to an electrical circuit that is used for electrical testing purposes Through hole via A via that connects the surface layers on a PCB Trace Track The copper trails electrical connection between two or more points on the PCB and the onscreen representation of that copper Venting patterns Patterns etched in the board that allow gases formed during
93. to find other files e Ifthe file type is specified as a CAD Structure file type then Agile PLM will traverse all levels of the document hierarchy It starts with the selected file and then extracts other files necessary to build the complete model In order to avoid pulling out unnecessary files the viewing logic makes use of the Attachment Type attribute on the document s Attachments tab If there is a value in this attribute such as SOURCE for the originally selected file attachment then only files whose Attachment Type attribute matches this value will be extracted If there is no value in the Attachment Type attribute then all files within the structure hierarchy will be extracted e Ifthere are multiple file attachments with the matching value of Attach ment Type on the same document they will be extracted and sent to AutoVue This includes the document from which the view operation was initiated ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 39 AUTOVUE BASICS OPENING AGILE ATTACHMENT FILES e Ifany given document in the hierarchy does not have any file attachments or any with the correct value of Attachment Type then the extraction process continues down the tree e The Agile administrator may have configured Agile PLM to use the CAD Revision BOM attribute This is used by standard Agile EC CAD connec tors to provide an As Saved fixed BOM resolution for CAD designs If enabled when viewing a past revision of a design objec
94. to the selected PMI item 164 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES PMI ENTITIES PMI Configuration Entities The Views Captures Reference Grouping entities refer to specific configura tions of the model These PMI configuration entities are listed in the Model Tree and are activated by right clicking the entity and then selecting Activate Views The View configuration entity displays predefined views and highlights associ ated PMI entities TASK 1 Expand the Views tree to display the defined views 2 Right click the selected view and then select Activate RESULT The model and PMI entities display in the workspace as defined in the selected view The PMI entities are also highlighted in the Model Tree Captures The Captures configuration entity displays predefined views TASK 1 Expand the Captures tree to display the defined captures 2 Right click the selected captures and then select Activate RESULT The model and PMI entities display in the workspace as defined in the selected capture ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 165 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MANIPULATING A 3D MODEL Reference Frames PMI Hyperlinks The Reference Frames configuration entity highlights the grouped PMI entities TASK 1 Expand the Reference Frames tree to display the predefined reference frames 2 Right click the selected reference frame and then select Activate RESULT The gr
95. to the selected view You can also click the Views tab then click the view from the Standard Views tree or right click in the workspace and select Camera Views Setting Native Views AutoVue displays views for a 3D file as saved in its native application Native views are present only if the file contains saved views From the Viewmenu select Views and then select Native Views The model re orients to the selected view The view options vary depending on the file Examples of the view options are Last Saved View Presentation Front Back Left Right Top Bottom Isometric Trimetric and Dimetric You can also click the Views tab and then click the view from the Native Views tree or right click in the workspace and select Views and then select Native Views Creating a User Defined View You may want to create and save your own views AutoVue allows you to define a view and add it to the User Defined Views You can define a customized view in View or Markup mode Any views you apply to displayed models during Markup mode are saved as part of the Markup file TASK 1 Apply your own views or transformation to the displayed model ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The view states that you can apply and save for your defined view are Extents Rotation Model Transformation Explosion Render Modes Color Transparency Visibility Sectioning Camera Settings and views involving Mockups 2 From the View menu select Views select User Def
96. undo the hide option from the Markup menu deselect Hide Markups 308 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP ENTITIES Hiding Markup Files To hide selected a Markup file do the following TASK 1 In the Markup Navigation Tree right click the Markup file then select Hide To undo the hide option right click the file name again and select Show Grouping and Ungrouping Markup Entities When you group markup entities you can move delete copy and paste trans form or perform any modification on the group of entities that you would on a single markup entity NOTE You can only group markup entities created on the same page Grouping Markup Entities TASK 1 In the Markup Navigation Tree or from the workspace select the markup entities that you want to group ADDITIONAL INFORMATION When selecting markup entities in Markup mode press Ctrl and drag the box to select all the markup entities within the area From the Markupmenu select Object and then select Group ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also right click the selected markup entities and then select Group STEP RESULT The group of entities appear in the tree under Group Perform any modifications RESULT The modifications are applied to all the entities in the group ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 309 Markups FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES Ungrouping Markup Entities TASK 1 I
97. users of the Collaboration Session Sending a Message to All Users TASK 1 From the Collaborate menu select Show Chat Window ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Collaborate status bar you can also click Show Chat Window STEP RESULT The Chat dialog appears Select All Users In the Send Message to field enter your message Click Send RESULT The message is sent to all users in the Collaboration Session ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 357 REAL TIME COLLABORATION CHAT WINDOW 358 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL Appendix A EDA Terms and Definitions The following table presents commonly used EDA terms and their corre sponding definitions EDA Term Annular ring Definition A circular strip of conductive material that remains after a hole has been drilled through the pad ofa printed circuit board Anti copper An area within a fill zone in which copper cannot be placed Aperture An opening similar to the aperture of a camera that is used for photo plotting Apertures are available in various sizes and shapes Aperture list A text file containing the dimensions for each of the apertures used to photo plot PCB artwork Clusters Components that are grouped according to their interrelationships and placed in close proximity on the board This keeps the connections on the PCB short so that the board is easier to work with Component An element o
98. value read during Stamp creation It does not reflect the current value in the DMS ADDITIONAL INFORMATION After a change is made to a value cell you must press Tab or Enter to finalize the changes 3 To commit changes to values for backend system attributes click Commit Changes 4 To reset changes and revert to backend system values click Reset When you are done modifying the attributes click OK to finalize your changes and to close the DMS Attributes dialog RESULT The Stamp is updated to reflect any changes you made Creating 2D Vector Markup Measure Entities When marking up 2D vector files in addition to all the markup options avail able for 2D files you can create markup measure entities The measure options in Markup mode work slightly different than in View mode Measure options vary between vector and non vector files For vector files AutoVue provides the option to snap to fixed points on the drawing For non vector files you can only free snap When measuring in Markup mode the specified measurement lines and values are displayed on the current active markup layer as entities These entities can be moved resized hidden or deleted You can also modify the font of a measure entity align a free snap measure entity to the horizontal or vertical axis as well as add units of measure and symbols to a measurement and have them appear on the drawing NOTE When you are creating a markup en
99. with Agile PLM Guide The following sections provide information on how to markup files from an ECO in Web and Java clients ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 229 Markups GUIDELINES FOR MARKING UP OR REDLINING ATTACHMENTS Web Client ECO Markups for Agile PLM 9 2 2 x or 9 2 1 x NOTE If the item or file has already been redlined then the Has been redlined icon will be displayed in the place of the Do Redlining icon TASK e To mark up or redline an attachment file from an ECO in the Web Client a If you have not already done so add an item with an attachment to the Affected Items tab of an unreleased ECO The item now has a pending revision associated with the unreleased ECO ADDITIONAL INFORMATION When redlining an attachment through an ECO the pending revision attachment Folder Version must be set to a specific version number if the Folder Version is set to LATEST x you will not be able to create redline markups However you can edit the Folder Version on the Attachments tab of the pending revision so that it refers to a specific Folder Version For example if the pending revision of the item refers to Folder Version LATEST 7 of the file folder select that row on the Attachments tab click Edit and use the Folder Version drop down list to select 7 Click Save to complete the edit process You will now be able to create redline markups for that attachment On the Affected Items tab click the Do Redlining icon for
100. 0 Changing the Pen SSCS sessase ceszcxsstensastasdeccsavabanscsveid a oa ota lee ed sens ne 341 Real Time Collaboration a sace ces Soe scone ssc vcccen dont coalt ew eavecdasgecade veers aa eetansenr un beccueael dean dows dd coiacedceesae 343 Collaboration WSC TRC ac tacteiceiase cts ch catesatoaseuss cdsieg coe a a Sa Slel aia des T ha ee naan 343 The Hostar eaa AAAA Naan es T cas SAET E R ase ences ate 344 The COO ET a a n ths Soto n E ias 344 MIDS SPE E cc seuss crates S A E TEE seaport A vans sera T 345 Opening a Files issccsissievansiniaaeaeia eengduense an naan naan ani ion ad amas E 345 PROUT COT ots s ta E EE E E sen ess tot EE bandas A oe toslara rade eibiats 346 Sessionilnformati Ns iaiaaeaia essa bs a esta chadbnsctusnenDasvasduastecssbsoassnscvedtons 346 Session WATKUD etal saosin sian a aearane NS ata a 346 Show Presenter WV UNO WY Saeccsersss0scts coves chezocestensecunn aabaceedancuznsacesssctstnsuod each ast aestuencstvededusep anencetcaatetenateaeenrae 346 Gollaboration SOSSiOncscarcsossessa A ov ciate coe anid uae NR 347 Initiating a Collaboration SESSION ccsssssssssssseesessesscsncscssssssesssssucsuccscesscescssscscssscacsssesscessesseess 347 Changing a User s Layer Color Of a S SSION ssssssssssssscscsscssecseecsscensceseccsccsscssccenccsseeseeseersees 348 Adding New Users to a Session essesssssessscsecsssssscsncsnsssscescssscssssnccascescescssscsucsuceaseasceecesseasesuseascanees 348 Opening a Markup Whil
101. 10 Specify the file name and the directory where you want to store the file then click Save STEP RESULT AutoVue saves the results in a csv Comma Separated Values file 11 To view the properties of an entity select the entity from the Entity Types list or the Attributes list then right click and select Show Entity Properties STEP RESULT The Entities Properties dialog appears and displays the properties for the selected entity ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 125 WORKING WITH EDA FILES SEARCHING USING ENTITY SEARCH 12 To show the net connectivity click the Attributes tab select the entity from the list then right click and select Show Net Connectivity STEP RESULT The net connectivity for the selected entity is highlighted in the workspace 13 Click Close to close the Entity Search dialog Performing an Attribute based Search The following steps describe how to perform an attribute based search TASK 1 From the Edit menu select Entity Search ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Entity Search amp STEP RESULT The Entity Search dialog appears 2 Click the Attributes tab 3 From the Attributes list select an attribute ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To sort the list by Owner Type or Value click the column heading that you want to sort by STEP RESULT The Owner Type and Value of the selected attribute appear in the list 4 Ifyou want to search by owner
102. 23 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING BACKGROUND COLORS FOR DESKTOP OFFICE 224 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL Markups AutoVue has the ability to view many file formats and to create markups for all its readable file formats without the document s authoring application Marking up refers to drawing and writing on an electronic document When you create a markup for a file the markup is created on top of the original file Markups entities are saved in Markup files Ifa document has existing Markup files the Markup Indicator icon appears in the status bar at the bottom of the AutoVue workspace Clicking the Markup Indicator opens the Markup Filesdialog and allows you to select the Markup files to display Markup Files Select Markup File s Name _ acad2006 002 J jacad2006 001 When you open a Markup file AutoVue layers the markup over the original file In Markup mode you can Create entities such as text arcs boxes circles clouds lines arrows and polygons Note that AutoVue exits markup creation mode after you create a markup entity In previous releases of AutoVue you were able to continue adding markups until you right click the workspace e Adda stamp or information to an entity by adding a text or a note e Create name and color layers to organize your work ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 225 Markups MARKUP NAVIGATION TREE Create a new Markup file that combines cop
103. ARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES Measuring an Arc 10 To resize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement 11 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Use the Arc option to measure the precise radius length and angles of any arc on the model It also calculates the center point location TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity Measurement and then Arc ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Arc a STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 2 Select Arc Entity if you want to measure a predefined arc STEP RESULT All arc and circles are highlighted on the model Snapping modes are disabled 3 Select From 3 Points if you want to measure the arc between three points Snapping modes are displayed 4 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring STEP RESULT All entities of the selected entity types are highlighted on the model 5 From the Dist Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the arc distance 6 From the Angles Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the angle 7 Ifyou selected From 3 Points click three points to define the arc STEP RESULT The points are joined by an arc 8 Ifyou selected Arc Entity click the edge of an arc STEP RESULT The arc is highlighted 9 Click to complete the measuremen
104. AT_GUIDE PRT 2 Tosort the list numerically click the Count column header 3 To sort the list alphabetically click the Part Name column header 180 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES GENERATING A BILL OF MATERIAL To view a part or parts on the model select the parts from the Part Name column ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one part press the Shift or Control key while selecting STEP RESULT The parts are highlighted on the model and in the Model Tree To save the Bill of Material click Export STEP RESULT The Save As dialog appears Enter a file name or browse to locate the directory where you want to store the file then click Save STEP RESULT AutoVue saves the results in a csv Comma Separated Values or xml file Click Close to close the Bill of Material dialog ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 181 WORKING WITH 3D FILES ENTITY SEARCH Entity Search AutoVue allows you to search for entities in a 3D model using the Entity Search dialog Entity Search e E 3D Search Advanced 3D Search Containing Text Selection All Type ll Attribute Filters Definition PMI Filter PMI Type Results Type You can search the whole model or selected entities on the model perform a 3D text search apply attributes entity type or PMI filters as search criteria to filter entities You can also search
105. AutoVue for Agile PLM User s Manual January 2015 E60389 01 ORACLE January 2015 Copyright 1999 2015 Oracle and or its affiliates All rights reserved Portions of this software Copyright 1996 2007 Glyph amp Cog LLC Portions of this software Copyright Unisearch Ltd Australia Portions of this software are owned by Siemens PLM 1986 2012 All rights reserved This software uses ACIS software by Spatial Technology Inc ACIS Copyright 1994 2008 Spatial Technology Inc All rights reserved Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation and or its affiliates Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners This software and related documentation are provided under a license agreement containing restrictions on use and disclosure and are protected by intellectual property laws Except as expressly permitted in your license agreement or allowed by law you may not use copy reproduce translate broadcast modify license transmit distribute exhibit perform publish or display any part in any form or by any means Reverse engineering disassembly or decompilation of this software unless required by law for interoperability is prohibited The information contained herein is subject to change without notice and is not warranted to be error free If you find any errors please report them to us in writing If this software or related documentation is delivered to the U S Government or anyone licensin
106. AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure ia STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears 2 Click the Area tab 3 Select Between Points if you want to measure the area between points on a drawing The snapping modes are displayed 4 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring Select Shape if you want to measure the area of a predefined shape on the drawing the snapping modes are disabled 6 From the Measured Area Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the area 7 From the Perimeter Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the perimeter 8 Inthe Net Area Result section of the dialog select Add to cumulate a net area result of different areas 9 To subtract an area from the Net Area Result select Subtract ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 131 WORKING WITH EDA FILES MEASURING IN EDA FILES 10 Select Clear to clear the Net Area Result 11 If you selected Between Points click points on the drawing to define the area STEP RESULT Each point is joined by a line The area and perimeter measure ments appear in the Measurement dialog 12 If you selected Shape click the edge of the predefined shape that you want to measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement STEP RESULT The shape is highlighted The area and perimeter measurements appear in the Measurement dialog 13 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Mea
107. CLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 19 AUTOVUE BASICS AUTOVUE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE Markup Entity Toolbar Navigation Panel The Markup Entity toolbar displays by default on the left side of the AutoVue window when you enter Markup mode It includes all the available markup entities for the opened file Depending on the file that is opened the toolbar buttons will change For example the following image shows the Markup Entity toolbar when a 3D file is open X te te AAAA N PELAN A NOTE The AutoVue GUI can be customized by the system administrator The GUI that is displayed is dependent upon whether it is customized and on the type of customization The Navigation Panel displays by default on the left hand side of the Auto Vue workspace when you view a drawing For example when viewing an EDA drawing it allows you to navigate through a list of component instances nets and the associated pins and net nodes pins connected to a net present in the current schematic drawing or Printed Circuit Board PCB design NOTE To hide or display the Navigation Panel click ig The columns displayed in the Navigation Panel are determined by the profile of the entity types in the current schematic drawing or PCB design Lists can be sorted in order to group similar component instances 20 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL AUTOVUE Basics AUTOVUE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE You can also use the Navigation Panel to select highlight singl
108. Convert STEP RESULT The Convert dialog appears 2 Inthe Save As field enter the path and filename or click Browse to locate the directory where you want to convert the file to then enter a file name 338 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL CONVERSION PDF PDF X and Y 3 From the Convert to Format list select the format you want to convert the file to ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Output and Convert area options change according to the type of formatyou choose 4 Select the output and convert options that you want to set for the file Click OK RESULT The Conversion in Progress dialog appears The dialog disappears when the file is converted successfully With AutoVue it is possible to convert Office 2D and EDA formats to PDF When converted from Markup Mode markups are added to the contents of the base PDF file When you open the PDF you will see the base file along with all markups Three factors affect the resolution of an image the type of image you are scan ning the output device and the acceptable file size High resolution scans often require large files causing longer processing and print time Note that a high resolution may not produce a better quality printed image if your output device does not recognize the higher resolution information stored in the file To keep file sizes manageable select the lowest resolution that provides accept able quality on your output device With some file types th
109. E USER MANUAL 157 WORKING WITH 3D FILES 3D VIEWS Viewing a Model from a Particular View Point To view a model from a particular point you can specify a view point TASK 1 From the View menu select Camera Views and then select View Points ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also right click in the workspace and select Camera Views and then select View Points STEP RESULT The View Point dialog appears Enter the coordinates for X Y and Z a In the Camera Position fields enter the coordinates to determine the position of the camera lens b In the Target Position fields enter the coordinates to determine the position of the 3D model viewed through the camera lens c In the Up Direction fields change the coordinates to values between 0 and 1 to determine the upward orientation Click OK to close the View Point dialog RESULT The entity moves to the defined view point The Global axes and the User Coordinates System change position to reflect the view point Configuring Layers Use this option to configure which layers to display from the current active file TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Layers STEP RESULT The Select the Layers to Display dialog appears and lists the layers and layer visibility for the current active file To sort the list of layers in the dialog click the Name column header to sort alphabetically or numerically or click the Statu
110. EP RESULT The net is highlighted in the Navigation Panel and in the work space 94 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES NAVIGATING DESIGN HIERARCHY 2 From the View menu select Go to Net Instances or right click the highlighted net from the Navigation Panel or workspace and select Go to Net Instances STEP RESULT AutoVue highlights the instance or instances of the selected net If the selected net appears on multiple pages the Go to Net Instances dialog appears Go to Net Instances Please select a page Cancel 3 Select the page on which you want to view the net instance then click OK RESULT The selected page is displayed and the instance of the selected net is highlighted Navigating Design Hierarchy AutoVue supports navigation through the hierarchical structure of a schematic drawing A hierarchical block in a schematic is a symbol that refers to a child schematic Navigating using Ascend Hierarchy With the Ascend Hierarchy option you can navigate from the child schematic to the parent page ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 95 WORKING WITH EDA FILES LAYERS On the child page of your schematic s design hierarchy select an entity in the workspace or in the Navigation panel and then from the View menu select Ascend Hierarchy AutoVue returns to the parent page NOTE You can also right click an entity in the workspace or in the Navigation panel and select Ascend Hiera
111. ESULT The Symbol Library dialog appears Symbol Library 4 Selected Files Name Description Keywords Author Enter the library name description author and keywords in their respective fields 258 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS To add a symbol to the library click Add STEP RESULT The Open dialog appears Browse to locate the symbol you want to add and then click Open ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To add more symbol repeat steps 4 to 6 To remove a symbol select the symbol and click Remove STEP RESULT The file appears in the Symbol Files list Close the Symbol dialog Deleting a Symbol Library TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Symbol The Symbols dialog appears ADDITIONA INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Symbol Click the Libraries tab From the Symbol Libraries list select the library that you want to delete Click Delete STEP RESULT The library disappears from the list and from the Symbol Library list under the Symbols tab Close the Symbols dialog 2D Specific Markups AutoVue provides a variety of user friendly markup options that you can use when marking up 2D files You can create entities such as arcs boxes circles clouds lines and polygons You can draw a leader with multi line segments and add text to it NOTE
112. Files To open a Markup file TASK 1 View a file that has existing markups 240 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP FILES From the Markup menu select Open ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Open Markup s A or from the bottom left corner of the status bar you can click Markup Indicator ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If the Markup Indicator icon does not display then the file you opened has no existing markups associated to it STEP RESULT The Markup Files dialog appears From the Markup list select the check box next to Markup file you want to open ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you select more than one Markup file the Active Markup menu lets you select which one of them is initially active See Setting the Active Markup File for more information Click OK RESULT The selected markup or markups appear in the workspace on top of the original file NOTE When you select more than one Markup file the markups display simul taneously Saving an Existing Markup File To save a modified existing Markup file from the Markup menu select Save NOTE From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click Save Markup id If you have multiple markups open that you have modified and want to save them all from the Markup menu select Save All To save an existing markup as a new markup from the Markup menu select Save As Importing a Markup Fil
113. Free snap Allows snapping at any point on the drawing Dx Net Allows snapping to a net FA Trace Allows snapping to a trace S 128 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES MEASURING IN EDA FILES Measuring Distance Use the Distance option to measure the distance between two specific points TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure at INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure ame Fi STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears Click the Distance tab Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring To select all snapping modes click All On To deselect all snapping modes click All Off See EDA Snapping Modes From the Measured Distance Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you want to measure the distance along a path select Cumulative Click a point on the drawing to define the starting point Click another point on the drawing to define the end point ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you selected Cumulative continue clicking points along the path that you want to measure Right click to complete the measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To make another measurement click Reset STEP RESULT The points are joined by a line The measured distance Delta X Delta Y and the Manhattan Distance appear in the Measurement dialog Click Close to close the Mea
114. From the Analysis menu select Measure ee moNAt INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure mam STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears 2 Click the Area tab 3 Select Between Points if you want to measure the area between points on a drawing The snapping modes are displayed 4 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring Select Shape if you want to measure the area of a predefined shape on the drawing the snapping modes are disabled 6 From the Measured Area Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the area 7 From the Perimeter Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the perimeter 8 Inthe Net Area Result section of the dialog select Add to cumulate a net area result of different areas 9 To subtract an area from the Net Area Result select Subtract 10 Select Clear to clear the Net Area Result 11 If you selected Between Points click points on the drawing to define the area STEP RESULT Each point is joined by a line The area and perimeter measure ments appear in the Measurement dialog 278 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS CREATING 2D VECTOR MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES 12 Ifyou selected Shape click the edge of the predefined shape that you want to measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement STEP RESULT The shape is highlighted The area and perimeter measurements appear in the Measu
115. G BILL OF MATERIAL BOM Generating 7 To exit Compare mode from the File menu select Exit Compare ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Exit Compare E RESULT The original file appears in the AutoVue workspace Bill of Material BOM For EDA files you can obtain a list of the components and parts required for manufacturing the item featured in the schematic drawing or PCB design The Bill of Material BOM report produces a count of the unique components or parts needed for manufacturing It lists the quantity required component name reference designators value for resistors and capacitors size and descriptions When determining the uniqueness of a component the count considers only the attributes chosen for inclusion in the report output It includes only those attributes that provide the most accurate and unique component quantities TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Generate Bill of Material STEP RESULT If you are generating a BOM for a schematic with multiple pages a dialog appears prompting you to select the BOM scope Current page or Entire design Generate BOM BOM Scope Entire design 116 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES GENERATING BILL OF MATERIAL BOM 2 Click OK after making your selection STEP RESULT The Generating BOM dialog appears listing the attributes of the file Generate BOM Please sel
116. INFORMATION A multiple file attachment row is indicated by a file folder icon in the Filename field followed by the filenames of all the files in the file folder STEP RESULT The Select Files window appears c Alternately from the Attachment tab View File s button On the business object Attachments tab click to select the multiple file attachment row Click the View File s button s drop down arrow and then select View d In the Select Files window click the radio button to select the option View all files as an assembly starting from the selected file e Click to select the file row of the assembly file that indicates the top or starting file of the assembly f Click OK To view a CAD assembly from Java Client Files tab a Go to the Files tab of a file folder object containing the CAD files for the assembly that you want to view b Click to select the row for the top or starting file of the assembly c Click the View File s button s drop down arrow and then select View Models Tab and Model Tree The Models tab displays the Model Tree The tree displays the model s hierarchy inter relation of different parts assemblies and bodies The tree also indicates if a required external reference XRef is missing With the tree you can select different parts and modify their attributes such as color visibility render mode or transformation See Displaying XRefs for more information on XRefs 138 ORAC
117. Inelassed lt 124 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES SEARCHING USING ENTITY SEARCH Performing an Entity Type based Search The following steps describe how to perform an entity type based search TASK 1 From the Edit menu select Entity Search ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Entity Search amp STEP RESULT The Entity Search dialog appears 2 Click the Entity Types tab 3 From the Entity Types list select an entity type ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To sort the list by attribute click the attribute column heading that you want to sort by STEP RESULT A list of attributes for the selected entity type appear 4 Ifyou want to search by attribute select an attribute from the Attribute list If you want to search by value select a value from the Value list 6 Click Add Filter STEP RESULT The selected attribute and its corresponding value appear in the list 7 Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you have all the filters you want 8 Click Apply Filter s ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To remove a filter select the line in the list containing the attribute and value you do not want to use as a filter then click Remove Filter STEP RESULT A list of entities matching the search criteria appear showing the column headers for the entity s available attributes 9 To save the results click Export Result STEP RESULT The Save dialog appears
118. Java Client a b Open the change order and display the Affected Items tab On the Redline Attachments tab click the Do Redlining icon in the row containing the file you want to redline When AutoVue opens create a new markup In the AutoVue Markup menu choose the New command In the AutoVue Markup menu choose the Open command STEP RESULT The Markup Files dialog appears Click the All Revisions check mark STEP RESULT AutoVue displays all valid markups The available markups are associated to files that have the same file extension as the file you are viewing Select the markup files you want to promote to the current markup Click OK STEP RESULT The promoted markups display in the file you are currently viewing To save the promoted markups with the change order revision save the markups before exiting the viewer From the AutoVue menu choose one of the Save commands Markup Promotion for Ad Hoc Markups TASK To promote file folder ad hoc mark ups in Web Client a b Open the file folder object and display the Files tab To initiate redlining select the Files table row you want to redline and then click the Redline When AutoVue opens create a new markup In the viewer Markup menu select New In the AutoVue Markup menu select Open STEP RESULT The Markup Files dialog appears Click the All Revisions check mark STEP RESULT AutoVue displays all valid markups The available markups are ass
119. LE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES Views TAB Views Tab NOTE The Models tab displays only for 3D drawings Models e M Page 1 M SolidEdge_ilearn se lt C a eer top a a oso boa cal gi J e 7 3D5oiidEdge stor Bh V 3DSolidEdge_go_ C H B 3DSolidEdge_arre C H B Y 3DSolidEdge_scre C DOoOoOoOWoOoooo OOoOoOoWgoOoooo w Models Vi The Views tab lists the defaults standard native and user defined views You can switch to a standard native or user defined view as well as add or delete user defined views NOTE The Views tab displays only for 3D drawings Views pe FP Default view n i camera views i Isometric Top Bottom Front Back Left S MB Right e 5 GDNative Views H Default b BR Isometric g User Defined Views Models Views Bookmarks ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 139 WORKING WITH 3D FILES BOOKMARKS TAB Bookmarks Tab The Bookmarks tab lists links to specific views Draft views 2D plans 3D Views of an EDA design or pages or bookmarks structure that is saved in files such as PDF Bookmarks A Design 7 3D Model Components Nets Bookmarks Navigate between the pages or files or views by clicking the appropriate link Bookmarks lead to various views of CAD files such as AutoCAD file Model Space the 3D model of a file and associated 2D engineer
120. LT The Model Tree collapses the selected node RESULT The Model Tree collapses the selected node You can also expand a node by clicking To collapse a node click amp Viewing Missing XRef Notification Icon If the loaded drawing is missing XRefs the Missing XRef Notification icon appears in the Model Tree to the left of the missing XRef To view XRefs are missing do the following See also Displaying Details About Resources TASK 1 From the status bar click the Missing Resource icon X STEP RESULT The Properties dialog appears You can also view the missing XRef from the File menu and then selectingProperties 2 Click the Resource Information tab STEP RESULT Any missing XRefs appear in the External Reference File Reference File Resources section of the dialog and are preceded by a amp 3 Click OK to close the dialog 144 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES CREATING 3D Mockups Selecting Model Parts from the Model Tree TASK 1 Click the Models tab 2 Select the part or parts from the Model tree ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one model part press the Shift or Control key while selecting RESULT The selected part or parts appear highlighted on the model and in the Model Tree Hiding Model Parts You can hide specific parts of a model or display specific parts and hide the rest of the model TASK 1 Select the part or parts on the mode
121. Layer Color dialog appears The default layer color is red 6 Select a color andclick OK Click OK to close the Markup Layers dialog Setting the Active Markup Layer A markup can have several layers and you can set a layer as the active markup layer When a markup layer is active all modifications you make are applied to that markup layer There are two ways in which to set a layer as active TASK 1 From the Markupmenu select Markup Layers STEP RESULT The Markup Layers dialog appears 2 You can perform one of the following From the Markup Layers list select the layer you want to make active and click Set Active From the Currently Active Layer list select the layer you want to make active 3 Click OK Changing the Color of a Markup Layer After you create a markup layer you have the option to change the color of its markup entities TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Markup Layers The Markup Layers dialog appears 2 From the Markup Layers list select the markup layer whose color you want to change ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 245 MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP LAYERS 3 Click Color STEP RESULT The Layer Color dialog appears 4 Select a Color Click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Only the entities that were created with the BylayerS color defined in the Markup Layers dialog will change color Any entities that were created using the color options from the Markup Properties to
122. Left Center or Right then select a variable from the list To change the Font click Set Font The Font dialog appears From the Font list select the type of font From the Size list select the size of font To set the font Style click Bold or Italic or both then click OK In the Print Properties dialog configure other print properties To view a partial view of the file click Partial Preview STEP RESULT The Partial Preview dialog appears Click OK to print RESULT The Print dialog appears indicating the document is printing You can choose to include predefined headers and footers when printing an Excel file from AutoVue TASK 1 From the Print Properties dialog click the Headers Footers tab ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 329 PRINTING WATERMARKS 2 Under Headers and Footers click inside the Left Center and Right boxes corresponding to the header or footer position in the original file Select F Native Print Settings Excel from the Insert Code list 4 Click OK to print RESULT The Excel file s headers and footers are printed Watermarks From the Watermark tab of the Print Properties dialog you can specify a water mark that will appear on a printed file When printing a watermark it appears transparent on the file contents You can choose a diagonal horizontal or vertical orientation for the watermark In addition to entering text you can e set the type size and st
123. MATION Once open you can position these models in the desired manner using the Transformation tool RESULT The file or files you imported appear in the workspace See Transforming a 3D Model Deleting Models from a Mockup The following steps explain how to delete models from a mockup TASK 1 From the File menu select Import File for Mockup STEP RESULT The Mockup dialog appears 2 Select the file or files that you want to remove 3 Click Remove STEP RESULT The file or files are removed from the list 4 Click OK to close the Mockup dialog RESULT The file or files disappear from the workspace 146 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES MANIPULATING DISPLAY OF A 3D MODEL Manipulating Display of a 3D Model AutoVue provides the flexibility to manipulate the display of a 3D model You can rotate scale or translate a model or any selection of model parts You can also navigate from one page to another page of a multi page file You can access these options from the View menu The options are Menu Zoom Sub Menu Description Zoom In Zoom in by a factor of 2 From the Autovue toolbar you can also click Q Zoom Out Zoom out by a factor of 2 From the Autovue toolbar you can also click Q Previous Return to the previous zoom level From the Autovue toolbar you can also click Q or right click in workspace and then select from the menu Selected Resize the obje
124. Measure Koad STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears displaying the measurement options Click the Distance tab In the Measure Distance Units list select a unit of measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you want to measure the distance along a path select the Cumulative check box 74 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 2D FILES MEASURING IN 2D FILES 4 Click a point on the drawing to define the starting point Click another point on the drawing to define the end point ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you selected Cumulative continue clicking points along the path that you want to measure 6 Right click to complete the measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement STEP RESULT The points are joined by a line The measured distance Delta X and Delta Y appear in their respective fields in Distance tab 7 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Distance in Vector Files Use the Distance option to measure the distance between two specific points TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure er Tonal INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears displaying the measurement options 2 Click the Distance tab Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring 4 To select all snapping modes click All On To clear all snapping modes click All Off 5 From the Measured Distanc
125. NFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Minimum Distance STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears Click A Set 1 From the Snapping Mode section select one of the following Select Entity if you want to measure the distance between model parts Snapping modes are disabled Select Geometry if you want to measure the distance between entity types Snapping modes are displayed ADDITIONAL INFORMATION See 3D Snapping Modes for more information ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 301 MARKUPS 3D SPECIFIC MARKUPS 4 Ifyou selected Entity select a part or parts on the model If you selected Geometry select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To reset a set click Clear To clear items from a set select the items and press the Delete key To deselect a part or entity type on the model press the Control key and left click the part or entity type STEP RESULT The model parts appear in the list under Set 1 and are highlighted on the model and in the Model Tree All entities of the selected entity type are highlighted on the model Click bad Set 2 6 Repeat step 3 and 4 STEP RESULT The model part appears in the list under Set 2 7 From the Measured Min Distance Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance 8 Click Compute STEP RESULT The minimum distance from the first set of entities to the second set is
126. OK in the File Open dialog RESULT The Viewer opens the selected file or if appropriate adds the selected file to the current analysis function Using Agile Bookmarks to Select File You can click Agile Browse to use your Agile Bookmarks to select an attachment file TASK 1 From the File Open dialog click Agile Browse STEP RESULT The DMS File Open dialog displays your Agile Bookmarks in a tree structure NOTE If you have not defined any Bookmarks in Agile PLM Agile Browse does not appear in the File Open dialog 2 Click to expand a bookmark and display its item revisions or its file folder versions Click a revision or version row to highlight the file you want to view 4 Click OK in the DMS File Open dialog STEP RESULT The selected file name appears in the File Name field of the File Open dialog 5 Click OK in the File Open dialog RESULT The Viewer opens the selected file or if appropriate adds the selected file to the current analysis function 108 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES CROSS PROBING Using Agile Search to Select File You can use Agile Search to perform a quick search to select an attachment file TASK 1 From the File Open dialog click Agile Search STEP RESULT The Search dialog appears 2 Define your search using the following options and then click Search Option Description Class Select an object class for example I
127. PMI Filtering to select which types of product and manufacturing informa tion to display TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select PMI Filtering ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click PMI Filtering Px STEP RESULT The PMI Filtering dialog appears and displays all PMI types 2 Inthe Tree column select the check box beside the items that you want to display in the Model Tree 3 Inthe View column select the check box beside the items that you want to display on the 3D model 4 Deselect the check box beside the items that you want to hide ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click All to show all items or click None to hide all items 5 Click OK to close the PMI Filtering dialog RESULT Only items selected in the Tree column are displayed in the Model Tree Only items selected in the View column are visible on the 3D model Visibility settings are saved and will be restored the next time you open the PMI filtering dialog NOTE AutoVue supports default PMI visibility as saved in the file To restore default PMI visibility click Default in the PMI Filtering dialog Aligning to a PMI Entity From the Model Tree right click the PMI item that you want to align to and select Align To AutoVue aligns to the selected PMI item Go to a Displayed PMI Entity From the Model Tree right click the PMI item that you want to go to on the model and select Go To AutoVue zooms
128. Probe dialog repeat steps 3 and 4 When adding multiple files from the same directory press Shift while making your selection Click OK STEP RESULT Eachfile you select appears in anew window A dialog appears for each new window which lets you change the view or page for each file Each dialog has the Automatic option selected by default When the Automatic option is selected for each dialog you see different behavior depending on the files you cross probe If you cross probe a schematic and PCB one window automatically displays a 2D PCB and the other window displays a schematic The same is true if either file contains a PCB and a schematic Whereas if files A and B contain both a schematic and a PCB and they are cross probed one of the files displays the schematic page and the other displays the 2D PCB If you cross probe two PCBs one window automatically displays a 2D PCB and the other window displays a 3D PCB If you cross probe two schematics both are set to schematic To change the view of a file in a window do the following a Deselect the Automatic option in the dialog for the window you want to change b From the Type list select Schematic PCB or PCB 3D View These options are available in the Type list only when the views are present in the file STEP RESULT The view of the file changes in the window 112 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES Cross PROBING 10 To switch between mult
129. S Removing a Light Source 3D Views Default View TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visual Effects and then select Lighting STEP RESULT The Lighting dialog appears 2 Right click directly on the small ball that you want to remove and select Remove Light STEP RESULT The small ball disappears and the light change is reflected 3 You can also select Default to restore the lighting properties to its default setting 4 Click Closeto close the Lighting dialog You can display different views of 3D Models or create your own views The following sections provide information on the default view of the model the available camera views native views and user defined views The Default View is the view of the model when it is initially loaded usually it is the view in which the model was saved In cases where there is no saved view AutoVue loads the isometric view of the model To return to the default view of a 3D model from the View menu select Default View Setting Standard or Camera Views Rather than entering Rotation mode you can view various predefined rotations with the Camera Views option from View and Markup modes To do so from the View menu select Camera Views and then select the pre defined view you want to display ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 155 WORKING WITH 3D FILES 3D Views The view options are Isometric Top Bottom Front Back Left and Right The model changes
130. S WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES 4 To view a different area of the file in the AuttoVue workspace click and drag the frame box to the area that you want to view ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you perform a zoom function in the AutoVue work space the area displayed in the workspace is highlighted by the frame box in the Pan and Zoom Window 5 From the Pan and Zoom menu select Exit to close the window RESULT The last view performed remains in the AutoVue workspace Working with 2D Vector Files In addition to all the features that are available for generic 2D files AutoVue provides the ability to access entity information access views saved in the drawing and the ability to intelligent snap when performing measurements AutoVue references various sources to obtain all data required to completely and accurately display vector files These sources can be internal to the file like layers blocks and overlays or external reference files XRefs that are located outside the file Manipulating 2D Vector Files The Manipulate menu option allows you to manipulate how the current active file is displayed For example you can select which layers blocks and external reference files XRefs to display The Manipulate menu options are 56 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES Menu Sub Menu Description Visibility Control Layers Select and display different layers o
131. STEP RESULT All vertices on the model are highlighted From the Units list select the unit in which you want to measure 4 Move the cursor over the highlighted vertex that you want to measure STEP RESULT The X Y and Z coordinates appear in a tooltip 5 Select the vertex ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To take another measurement click Reset STEP RESULT The X Y an Z coordinates appear in the Measurement dialog 6 Click Close the close the Measurement dialog Measuring the Length of an Edge Use theEdge Length option to measure the length of any edge on the model TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears 2 Click the Edge Length tab STEP RESULT All edges on the model are highlighted 3 From the Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the edge length ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you want to cumulate the measurement of more than one edge select Cumulative 196 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES MEASURING IN 3D FILES 4 Click the edge that you want to measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To take another measurement click Reset STEP RESULT The edge length measurement appears in the Measurement dialog 5 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Measuring Face Surface Use theSurface option to measure the surface area of an entity face or an entire
132. TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Note ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Note 2 2 Click a point on the document where you want to insert the note STEP RESULT Anew markup note entity is created and the Note editor appears Enter the text that you want in the Note editor 4 From the File menu select Note Information STEP RESULT The Note Information dialog appears To change the default font select Font and the type of font 6 Close the Note editor STEP RESULT The note symbol appears on the drawing and in the Markup Navi gation Tree 7 Right click outside the note area to complete the modification ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To edit a note double click on the note You can print a single Markup Note entity TASK 1 From the AutoVue Workspace or Markup tree double click a Markup Note entity ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Note dialog appears 292 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS NESTING MARKUP ENTITIES 2 From the Note dialog select File and then Print ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Print dialog appears 3 Select the a printer and click OK Nesting Markup Entities You can add a Note or Hyperlink markup entity as a nested child to other markup entites TASK 1 Add a markup entity to a file for example a Box entity 2 From the workspace or Markup Tree select the Box entity 3 From the Markup menu select No
133. TE To remove the filters from the Markup menu select Filter and then select Show All Ad Hoc Markups NOTE Ad hoc markups are only available if the file folders are made available to end users 228 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS GUIDELINES FOR MARKING UP OR REDLINING ATTACHMENTS Ad hoc 2D 3D and EDA markups can be done from the Files tab in the file folder object Change order controlled 2D 3D and EDA markups can be done from the Redline Attachments tab in the ECO When you view a markup file the original document also known as the base file opens too NOTE Change order controlled and ad hoc markups are independent from each other To view change order controlled markups open the redlined file from the appropriate revision of the item Attachments tab or from the change order Redline Attachments tab Guidelines for Marking Up or Redlining Attach ments With appropriate privileges you can redline Microsoft Office documents 2D 3D and EDA files on the Files tab of a file folder object and redline 2D 3D and EDA files on the Redline Attachments tab accessible from the Affected Items tab of an ECO NOTE You can create and edit file markups only through the Affected Items tab of an ECO or the Files tab of a file folder object Your Agile administrator must give you privileges that allow you to mark up or redline attachments For more information about ECOs and file folder objects refer to the Getting Started
134. TEP RESULT The selected entity is highlighted and the measured surface appears in the Measurement dialog 10 To take another measurement click Reset 11 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Walkthrough The Walkthrough feature in AutoVue provides an interactive visualization of 3D models File Edit View Manipulate Analysis Markup Collaborate Options Help OLS 223 DEM RS ot BO PT TETU Bookmarks g Model Layoutt Instructions Walk forward backward Left click and drag mouse up down or up down arrow key Turn left right Left click and drag mouse left right or left right arrow key More navigation options Press Ctrl Alt or Shift Move through walls C Restore last view V Show walkthrough dialog at startup fo House dwg AutoCAD 2007 2009 f100000 Pa 3 3 1721664 bytes May 3 2007 Models Views Bookmarks honean aeea In Walkthrough mode you can manipulate the view of a 3D model as if you are walking or flying through the model take measurements of the model and change the camera position and orientation For example when viewing a 3D model of house you can enter the front door and move between rooms and 198 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES WALKTHROUGH floors All the while you have a 360 degree view of your surroundings and the ability to add markups The Walkthrough feature can also be utiliz
135. To manually change the explosion state click and drag the scroll bar 8 Click OK to close the Explode dialog RESULT The explode state remains displayed and the Transformation column Bin the Model Tree is updated indicating the exploded parts See Resetting the Transformation of a 3D Model Saving an Exploded View of a 3D Model From the Explode dialog you can save the exploded view of the 3D model TASK 1 2 Explode a 3D Model Click Save View in the Explode dialog STEP RESULT The Add User Defined View dialog appears ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 175 WORKING WITH 3D FILES COMPARING 3D FILES Enter a view name 4 Click OK STEP RESULT The view is saved and appears in the Views tab under the User Defined Views tree 5 Click OK to close the Explode dialog RESULT The exploded state is saved See Resetting the Transformation of a 3D Model Comparing 3D Files When comparing 3D files in a non integrated environment we recommend that you use Universal Naming Convention UNC file names or the server protocol so as to ensure that all required sub assemblies and parts are retrieved from correct paths For information on UNC file names and the server protocol refer to the Installation and Configuration Guide AutoVue provides the ability to compare two 3D files or two sets of entities from the same file or different files and display color coded comparative data Gener ally when
136. UAL AUTOVUE Basics AUTOVUE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE NOTE The Models tab displays only for 3D drawings Models 3 0 M Page 1 go i6 M SolidEdge_ilearn se C a yl ha top PL oO a a Nee boa idEdge_ boti d i i J e 7 3D5oiidEdge stor C H B 3DSolidEdge_go_ C H B 3DSolidEdge_arre C H B Y 3DSolidEdge_scre C DOoOoOoOWoOoooo OOoOoOoWgoOoooo Models Vi Views Tab The Views tab lists the defaults standard native and user defined views You can switch to a standard native or user defined view as well as add or delete user defined views NOTE The Views tab displays only for 3D drawings Views FH Default view A HP camera views e Isometric S Liat Views i MD Default Isometric L gal User Defined Views ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 25 AUTOVUE BASICS AUTOVUE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE Markup Navigation Tree Status Bar When you are in Markup mode a Markup Navigation Tree appears below the workspace If the tree does not appear from the Options menu select Show Panel and then select Markup Panel Markups wa Markup Entity Author LastModified A Page Layer Y Untitled2 I Text JohnDoe 04 09 2008 11 51 06 4M 1 0 Leader JohnDoe 04 09 2008 11 51 08 AM 1 0 bnb JohnDoe 04 09 2008 11 51 22 4M 1 0 Highlight JohnDoe 04 09 2008 11 51 244M 1 0 O Box JohnDoe 04 09 2008 11 51 29 AM 1 0 F Line JohnDoe 04 09 2008 11 51 31 AM 1 0
137. UE USER MANUAL MARKUPS GUIDELINES FOR MARKING UP OR REDLINING ATTACHMENTS order s Redline Attachments tab or from the pending revision item Attach ments tab NOTE AutoVue 3D features and access to 3D files are available only with AutoVue applications that support 3D files Auto Vue features for schematic and PCB files also referred to as EDA files are available only with AutoVue applica tions that support those files For more information about purchasing or installing AutoVue contact Oracle Consulting Agile Practice Viewing ECO Redlines from the Attachments Tab of the Item Pending Revision You can view the change order markup redlines of the pending revision by displaying the Attachments tab of the item pending revision For example revi sion C ECO000453 In Web Client click the Has been redlined icon for versions 9 2 2 x and 9 2 1 x for version 9 3 x n the row of the file you want to view In Java Client select the redlined file you want to view and click the Has been redlined icon Ifyou have checked out the redlined file and checked in a new version from the Attachments tab the Has been redlined icon does not appear on the Attach ments table TASK To view the redlines of previous versions in Web Client a For 9 2 2 x 9 2 1 x from the Attachments tab of the pending revision click the Show Versions icon in the row you want to view ADDITIONAL INFORMATION For 9 3 x select View Versions from t
138. UE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES LIGHT SETTINGS Click and drag the Ambient Light sliding bar until you achieve the desired lighting STEP RESULT The lighting automatically changes with the movement of the sliding bar The Custom option is selected when you modify the ambient light To set the ambient lighting to its default setting select Default Click Close to close the Lighting dialog Setting Directional Lighting Setting the directional lighting adjusts the position of the light source on the model You can also add a new light source TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visual Effects and then select Lighting STEP RESULT The Lighting dialog appears To change the direction of the light click and drag the small ball until you achieve the desired lighting ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also drag the white ball outside of the large ball STEP RESULT The direction of the light reflected on the 3D model automatically changes with the movement of the white ball The Custom option is selected when you adjust the position of the light To set the light direction to its default setting select Default Click Close to close the Lighting dialog Adding a New Light Source TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visual Effects and then select Lighting STEP RESULT The Lighting dialog appears Select the Two lights option STEP RESULT Anew light source appears as a black ball in th
139. UE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES NETs TAB you can click and drag in the Navigation Panel list to select multiple nets The Nodes on Net panel lists the associated nodes for the selected nets Customize Name Parti User LOGI D14 No proje D13 No proje D12 No proje D11 NO proie D10 NO proie DI NO proie DO NO proje CLRCNT NO l proje Nodes on Net Customize Net Pin Use Pads UNSPEC SMD50 aie a Clk4 OUT__ SMDSO ji Name R5 2 Components Nets Bookmarks ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 87 WORKING WITH EDA FILES BOOKMARKS TAB Bookmarks Tab The Bookmarks tab lists links to specific views Draft views 2D plans 3D Views of an EDA design or pages or bookmarks structure that is saved in files such as PDF Bookmarks Design Z 3D Model Components Nets Bookmarks Navigate between the pages or files or views by clicking the appropriate link Bookmarks lead to various views of CAD files such as AutoCAD file Model Space the 3D model of a file and associated 2D engineering drafts If a plus sign appears to the left of a bookmark click it to expand and view the lower bookmark levels Ifa minus sign appears to the left of the bookmark click it to collapse the lower bookmark levels To go to a destination specified by a bookmark click the bookma
140. Versions palette NOTE The View All Versions action is only available in Web Client Java Client does not support Design objects The Version palette displays the following information about each version 40 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL AUTOVUE BASICS OPENING AGILE ATTACHMENT FILES Version Columns Description Column 1 Displays the approval status of the file folder version The approval status is displayed only if there are approvers on the Routing Slip Version The version number Checkin Date The date the version was checked in and the user who performed the Checking User checking Change Info Indicates how the version was modified before it was checked in Files indicate that the object s files were modified for example files were replaced added or deleted For Design objects Structure indicates that the Design s Structure tab was modified Label Revision These are version specific editable fields used primarily with Design Revision Date data model objects Initiating Actions in the Versions Palette The following are actions you can initiate in the Versions palette e View Click the View drop down menu to choose one of the following options View Select any version row and click View to view the file or files in AutoVue Compare For single file versions select two versions rows and then select Compare form the View drop down list AutoVue compares the selected files In
141. Vue toolbar you can also click Measure ka STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears 2 Click the Area tab 3 Select Between Points if you want to measure the area between points on a drawing ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Snapping modes are displayed 4 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring See 2D Vector Snapping Modes for more information Option Descriptions All On Select all snapping modes All Off Clear all snapping modes 5 Select Shape if you want to measure the area of a predefined shape on the drawing 6 From the Measured Area Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the area 7 From the Perimeter Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the perimeter To cumulate a Net Area Result of different areas click Add To subtract an area from the Net Area Result click Subtract ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Select Clear to clear the Net Area Result ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 77 WORKING WITH 2D FILES MEASURING IN 2D FILES 10 If you selected Between Points click points on the drawing to define the area STEP RESULT Each point is joined by a line The area and perimeter measure ments appear in the Measurement dialog 11 Right click to complete the measurement 12 If you selected Shape click the edge of the predefined shape STEP RESULT The shape is highlighted and the area and perimeter measure ments appear in the Measurement d
142. aiiel seine E A R A AE Se 69 Working with PDF Files Saienisi ae Eea n E aer e i 71 Navigating Through PDF Files s ss sseeesssssssssesscecsessssssssseecsessssssnsssesceessessnsssesseeesressossssseeererssrssssseesree 71 Navigating Through Markups sssssssseeessssssssseseeeseessnsssssseeeeeesssssssseeseeresresnsssesseeesersnsssesseeeseessessssssessee 71 Meas ring iN PDF Files ias csveseeoasessc aauasasoonans len aa auoosa ntact a ate ORE 71 BB ed abe ore el E A E nS iN ORES RTS CERO TRON NC SR OEA DET CAN GENO RE 72 Text Selectlon CODY si sisssccssscterscheasts Anctoetteg taecndateoetigucsdanidacs a aa A 72 Meas tingin2D FILES i nous acaicigeiiiesiscn exnn vio bun dbus A ine NE no AOR 73 QU Vectori Snapping Modes senice lasoesseavis sands aE aSa EEEo SEESE anase 73 Distanc lnnon Vector FILES aunsnene innan E A N E 74 DistanceiN Vector File Ssominencnnunanenine onest iaa i hi aaee 75 Calibrating Dista ic ssndsn etenean anea a E A AAT NA RE TS 76 AEST on Vector Fils icpcscsssccssscassscadsectseassaesnetoasectsecotenasscesctaacasasiasebdegusehiucchiarasesadtantbodslanccnsssushibadions 76 Arean Vector PINGS iis cceccsceceses scat hcsacedsenn aiana e i a aa in a ii an 77 Angle in non Vector FileS ssisaidassiieingeradeinmnedindsnihninniculanneinaadamedinanian 78 Angl in Vector FILS s cses csc sepzasesstucacsue sou teva ova ostonnsa ie vonngnteatvasnovose dire es deesusechig ha o eisit 79 APC IMION VECtOO RINGS an etalk cabinet criti a a a a
143. alue box click and drag it to anywhere on the drawing 13 To resize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement 14 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog 288 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS CREATING EDA MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES Calibrating an Arc TASK 1 2 Measure an arc in the drawing From the Arc tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Radius Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance From the Units list select a unit of measurement to which you want to calibrate the distance Click Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate to a value Click Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate by a factor Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration results appear in the Arc tab Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Measuring Minimum Distance Use theMinimum Distance option to measure the minimum distance between entities The available entities for snapping are nets pins vias and traces To measure the minimum distance between entities on separate layers select Across Layers If a physical layer does not exist this option determines whether or not the minimum distance should be calculated across logical layers TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Minimum Distance ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
144. amp markup entities TASK 1 From the workspace or the Markup Navigation Tree select the markup entity to rotate ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Itis not possible to select multiple markup entities to rotate 2 From the Markup menu select Object and then select Rotate 3 Rotate the markup entity by clicking and dragging its control points Pressing the Shift key while dragging will snap the rotation to 45 degree intervals ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 307 MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP ENTITIES Changing Object Order You can change the order of markup entities in a markup layer To move an entity forward or backward do the following TASK 1 Select an entity from the workspace or Markup Entity tree 2 From the Markup menu select Object then select Order and then select one of the following options Option Description To Back Moves the markup entity behind all the other entities in the markup layer To Front Moves the markup entity in front of all other entities in the markup layer Backward Moves the markup entity backward by one level Forward Moves the markup entity forward by one level Hiding All Markup Entities To hide all markup entities do the following TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Hide Markups ADDITIONAL INFORMATION A check mark appears next to the Hide Markups option and the markup entities are hidden on the Markup file 2 To
145. an one entity is selected TASK 1 Select an entity such as a pin via or trace from the workspace or the Navigation Panel STEP RESULT The corresponding entity is highlighted in the workspace and in the Navigation Panel 2 From the View menu select Show Net Connectivity ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the workspace or Navigation Panel you can also right click the selected entity and then select Show Net Connectivity RESULT The graphical entities belonging to the connected nets are highlighted ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 93 WORKING WITH EDA FILES ENTITY PROPERTIES Displaying the Entity Properties of a Net You can view the properties of a net via the Show Entity Properties option The Show Entity Properties is disabled when more than one net entity is selected TASK 1 Select an entity such as a pin via or trace from the workspace or the Navigation Panel STEP RESULT The corresponding net is highlighted in the workspace and in the Navigation Panel From the workspace or Navigation Panel right click the selected net and then select Show Entity Properties STEP RESULT The Entity Properties dialog appears displaying the properties of the selected net Click OK to close the Entity Properties dialog Show Net Instances You can display the instances of a net in a multi page file TASK 1 From the Navigation Panel click the Nets tab and select the net you want to view ST
146. and select Zoom Selected 2 Ifyou selected an entity from the Entity Search dialog right click and select Zoom Selected RESULT AutoVue zooms to the selected entity in the workspace 90 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES FILTERING ENTITY TYPES Filtering Entity Types With the Entity Filter option you can choose to display certain entity types while hiding others You can also limit the types of entities you can select in the workspace TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Entity Filter STEP RESULT The Entity Filter dialog appears 2 Under the Visibility column perform one of the following Select the check box beside the entity types you want to display in the workspace Deselect the check box to hide the entity types 3 Under the Selection column perform one of the following Select the check box beside the entity types that you want to be able to select in the workspace Deselect the check box beside the entity types that you do not want to select ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select all entity types select the column header check box Deselect the column header check box to deselect all entity types 4 Click Apply to apply the changes Close OK to close the Entity Filter dialog RESULT Only the selected entity types remain displayed in the workspace When you click in the workspace only the entity types checked in the
147. and then click Search Performing an Attribute based Search From the Entity Search dialog you can search for entities by their attributes such as color density shading and so on TASK 1 From the Edit menu select Entity Search ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Entity Search STEP RESULT The Entity Search dialog appears Click the 3D Search tab Select the search criteria that you want to use for your search ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 185 WORKING WITH 3D FILES ENTITY SEARCH 4 Click Add STEP RESULT The Attribute Filter dialog appears Attribute Filter Name COLOUR _ Any value Colour Value Test Equals value 5 From the Name list select the attribute that you want to search STEP RESULT The Value list appears corresponding to the selected attribute 6 Select the Any Value check box if you want to search by any value the associated value options are disabled 7 Deselect the Any Value check box if you want to search by a specific value from the Condition set condition for the search and from the Values list select the values that you want to search 8 Click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To add more than one Attribute Filter repeat steps 4 to 8 9 To edit an Attribute Filter select the filter and click Edit STEP RESULT The Attribute Filter dialog appears allowing you to edit the filter 10 Todisable an Attribute Filter
148. anges to a selected physical layer the logical layers associated with it are also affected Select one or multiple logical layers from the Logical Layers section To select multiple logical layers press the Shift or Control key while selecting 4 Click one of the following buttons Click Bring to Front to move all selected layers to the front in the workspace In the Logical Layers section these layers move to the top of the list Click Up _ to move selected layers up one layer Click Down to move selected layers down one layer ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also drag and drop selected logical layers in the Logical Layers section 5 Click Apply to see the changes in the workspace STEPRESULT The file now displays according to the layer scheme you arranged Also logical layers are renumbered in the Order column of Logical Layers section 6 You can now save your changes as a user defined layer set Click Close to close the Layers dialog 98 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES LAYERS Modifying Visibility for Physical Layers Use the Layers dialog to hide or display specific physical layers in the workspace TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Layers ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Layers STEP RESULT The Layers dialog opens 2 Inthe Physical Layers section you can show or hide t
149. arc STEP RESULT The points are joined by an arc The measurements for center point coordinates radius diameter arc length start and end of angle and sweep appear in the Measurement dialog If you selected Arc Entity click the edge of the arc that you want to measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To take another measurement click Reset STEP RESULT The arc is highlighted The measurements for center point coordi nates radius diameter arc length start and end of angle and sweep appear in the Measurement dialog Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Calibrating an Arc TASK 1 2 Measure an arc in the drawing From the Arc tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Radius Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance From the Units list select a unit of measurement to which you want to calibrate the distance Click Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate to a value Click Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate by a factor ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 81 WORKING WITH 2D FILES MEASURING IN 2D FILES 6 Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration results appear in the Arc tab 7 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog 82 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL Working with EDA Files In addition to all the features that are available for generic 2D files AutoVue also provides intelligent querying for EDA files you can create modify layer se
150. arkup Entity tree but not in the workspace To view the markups double click the Note entities in the Markup Entity tree STEP RESULT The markups open and the Note markup icon 3 appears in the workspace ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 201 WORKING WITH 3D FILES WALKTHROUGH 202 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL Configuring AutoVue Use the configuration options to configure the Auto Vue workspace for different groups of file formats or for all files in general For example you can set different background colors for EDA 2D 3D or Office files You can also set paths to locate external resources such as fonts symbols XRefs or configure measurement options To access the configuration options from the Options menu select Configure The Configuration dialog appears To implement your changes and to close the Configuration dialog click OK ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 203 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE GENERAL OPTIONS General Options To access the General configuration options TASK 1 From the Options menu select Configure STEP RESULT The Configuration dialog appears Configuration x Category General XZT Ref Paths CAD Font Paths V Text W Line Style Measurement Base Font W Dimensions V Filing X 20 ma Cie IV Line Weights V Load External References 3X0 Force to black W Line Caps Joins Model PMI Raster Colors Background C Full Resohition Miscellaneous 5 u X EDA
151. asavectousdenssdyneestsationnsendonspavesseiae 178 Generating a Bill of Matelialaissansnaciiaau sonnei wananueuna oaunun sakes 180 EVEL SCAU EA E E T EE OAE E ceed et E el leds ehateetnebuertans 182 Performing a Searc hamanna a a A a NA R ARNAN 184 Performing a 3D Text Search sssssssssseseeesssssssseeseeeseessssssssseeseesssssssssoeseeessesnssssesseeeseesnsssssseeereesrssss 185 Performing an Attribute based SearCh seesssssseeesessssssssssseseessssssssssesceessessnsssssseeeserssossssssereresresss 185 Performing an Advanced 3D Search ssssssssssseseseessssssssssoseeessesssssseseeeseresssssssseoseeessessnsssoseeesressssssesseesres 187 Saving Search RESUItS isnin eierens iesseses irnad sestese S ostera ts eoira iina sns 188 M as ring in 3D File Sinanin E E a ease 189 3DSpapping MOdES nerina ae E R R E ER R ERR ia 189 Measuring Distante nsession ia atana aae an caaanta iniaa ced 190 Calibrating Distantes E E RE esata ncn ae alae 192 Measuring Minimum DistanCe sessessssssssssesssseessseeessseeessseessseesosessessseeseseessseeosseessseeessseerssseresssees 193 Measuring an ANGIES cvssisssessesssctsrsercsarseswaonasaa ators nin i a RAA E E EA S 194 Me as ring an Al Csend tanhai seie se e lS a ierti oe Paasi doaa aiies cae 194 Calibrating an NTC oss nika e eE E aE asta alana sheds ava SEEE aE AES EE Siei 195 Measuring Vertex Coordinates essesssssesesersssessssseesteeseessnsssssseceserssssssseosseeessssssssesseressrss
152. avigation pane where you can select objects from My Bookmarks or Recently Visited The system displays shortcuts to only those objects that are appropriate to the operation you are performing ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Only business objects with attached files appear in the search results table For example a business object that you viewed recently will not appear on the Recently Visited list of the Shortcuts tab if it has no attachments When the results of your search are returned select a row in the Results table and the related files for that object appear in the Related Files table In the Related Files table select and move attachments to the Selected Files table 60 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES 6 You can continue to run multiple searches or shortcuts until you are finished selecting the attachments you want 7 When you are finished click OK RESULT The files are displayed in a single viewer window one on top of the other Initiate Overlay in AutoVue The following sections describe how to initiate an overlay in AutoVue Initiating Overlay in AutoVue To initiate overlaying files in AutoVue TASK 1 Select and view an appropriate file That is a file type that can be used for overlay analysis 2 Display the Attachments tab or the Files tab 3 Select a file row you want to work with and then choose Web Client View gt Vie
153. ayer The measurements for arc center coordinates radius diameter ratio arc length start and end of angle and sweep appear in the Measurement Entities dialog 10 To move the value box click and drag it to anywhere on the markup 11 To resize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement 12 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog 300 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS 3D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Calibrating an Arc TASK 1 2 Measure an arc in the drawing From the Arc tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Radius Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance From the Units list select a unit of measurement to which you want to calibrate the distance Click Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate to a value Click Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate by a factor Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration results appear in the Arc tab Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Measuring Minimum Distance With theMinimum Distanceoption you can measure the minimum distance between model parts as well as any two points from the selection sets vertices edges mid edges arc axes arc centers faces or any combination of entity types TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity Measurement and then select Minimum Distance ADDITIONAL I
154. b of the Viewer amp Files node in Agile Administrator The structure used to extract files is explicitly set on the Design object Structure tab e Agile PLM identifies which Design object files to extract by the following methods Ifthe value of the File Category attribute from any file row of a child Design matches the File Category value of the starting file the file is extracted Ifthe selected starting Design object file has no value for Category then all files in all child Designs are extracted including the starting Design object If multiple file rows on a Design object structure have the same Category value as the starting file they are all extracted at any level in the tree If the user selects multiple Design object files and then selects View then each selected file is interpreted separately based on Design structure viewing logic When a Design object is from a business object s Attachment tab Agile PLM uses the rules for viewing Designs As a result Design object viewing rules are always applied to Design objects whether the viewing action is initiated from a Design object or from the business object Attachments tab 38 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL AUTOVUE BASICS OPENING AGILE ATTACHMENT FILES Viewing Document Structured File Types NOTE Viewing structured data in a File folder class object relies on the DocuBOM or the Relationships tab to resolve related objects in the structure
155. be 9 3 x Web Client View The file opens in AutoVue then choose Analysis gt Cross Probe Java Client View File s gt Cross Probe STEP RESULT Each file is displayed in a separate viewer window 3 Begin cross probing Cross Probing by Search To run cross probing be search TASK 1 Display the Attachments tab or the Files tab 2 Select a file row you want to work with and choose 9 2 2 x or 9 2 1 x Web Client only View gt By Search gt Cross Probe Java Client View File s gt By Search gt Cross Probe STEP RESULT The Select Files dialog appears with three Search tabs 110 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES CROSS PROBING 3 The dialog allows you to search for any business object for example items or manufacturer parts and select the attachments of those objects to use to Cross Probe Use any of the following search options Option Description Search tab Allows you create a simple search or an advanced search You can also search attachment contents Saved Searches tab Opens to your navigation pane where you can browse in search folders select a search and run it Again returned results may be moved to the Selected Items table and click OK Shortcuts tab Opens to your navigation pane where you can select objects from My Bookmarks or Recently Visited The system displays shortcuts to only those objects that are appropriate t
156. bly The arrow starts from an exploded entity and points to the center point of its parent Scroll Explode Dragging the slider gradually displays the progression of the explosion to show the explosion dynamics Explode pressing brings the explosion level to the n 1 level if current explosion level is between n 1 inclusive and n level exclusive Implode pressing brings the explosion level to the n level if current explosion level is between n 1 exclusive and n level inclusive 174 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES EXPLODING Exploding a 3D Model TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Explode ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also select Explode STEP RESULT The Explode dialog appears 2 Select the parts that you want to explode ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one model part press the Shift or Control key while selecting To explode the entire model ensure that no parts are selected 3 From the Maximum Depth list select the level to which you want the model to explode 4 Select Animated if you want to see an animated view of the explosion ADDITIONAL INFORMATION This option is selected by default 5 Select Show Arrows if you want to display the arrows 6 To explode the model click gt STEP RESULT The whole model or the select model parts explode 7 To implode the model click e ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
157. ccsscsscessssscancesceascsscsacesseees 208 Shap SUMMING Seieren awed scteudesloscueatoc lus cat poe E Eader s oa i San En Aine a SEE EASO AEE ENEE Tines 209 Overlays Extents SettiNgSisrsseesstosisassescirosii sra i e E eei e e T ieis 209 SoTa ire Lda re K Eo 0 EEE EE E E E E EEEE EEEE 209 Configuring AutoVue for 3D Files esessessesssesscsncsssssecsusssessussscsscsscsuscacsuseaccascssceuscascanseaccascsscsaseaseens 210 Rendering ennienni Gude a a a a aa aan 210 Dynamic Renderihg ssissnsisnssannnnnni annia aei hsi seisi 210 Frame Ra E aiena a ETa O ea Eaa RE ase Toeta ashe osu canals aana Aane A ANTEE E eaat 211 Optimized Rendering asn R TRR RES 211 alae at EEEE AE E E E TNA EO 211 Loading a A E N A N eee 212 Dynamic Load Mesh Resolution sssssssesssssssssssssssssessseseeseeseesseseessecoeeeseesersereereereeeeereeeeeeeeeeererrersres 212 Initial Visibility s neaosnannonaminnnnonin an a a a i ai ieS 212 PMiInitial Visibility neniani a a Be iah 213 PARADE MUA STAN e EE AE A E EE A A ea a eeecwdbealnneers 213 C nfigu ring Color sasinan cial sakes E EN Rm a 213 Configuring Background sssini eiea aiee Eea Esi E ienirt 214 MEE aI EAEE E EE E E E S E aawtnt 216 Configuring AutoVue for EDA Files csssesssssssssscsssssesusssscsussncssssssssussascsuscacesscsscssscasssuceacesscsecseseaseees 217 CUSCOMMZING Selections casusscrectsascacasassesiessaesstasveiasdeon ais eens a E i neato 217 Displaying LOGI DS jecasitegeccsecseshecstrcs caecscra crete tee
158. ce on top of the original file Deleting a Markup Layer From the Markup Layers dialog you can choose to delete a selected layer and its associated markup entities TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Markup Layers STEP RESULT The Markup Layers dialog appears 2 From the Markup Layers list select the markup layer you want to delete Click Delete 4 Click OK RESULT The layer or layers are deleted along their associated entities Moving a Markup Entity to Another Layer Once you create a markup entity it is possible to assign it to a pre existing markup layer TASK 1 Select the markup entity or entities that you want to move ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 247 Markups CONSOLIDATING MARKUP FILES 2 From the Markup menu select Format and then select Move to Layer ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also right click the markup entity select Format and then select Move to Layer STEP RESULT The Move to Layer dialog appears From the Layers list select the destination layer 4 Click OK RESULT The selected markup entity or entities are moved to the selected layer Only markup entities using the ByLayer color will change to the new layer s color See also Working with Markup Entities Consolidating Markup Files The Consolidate option allows you to create a new Markup file that combines copies of selected layers of different Markup files During the review cycle consolidation simplifi
159. cecccssdestiscssssdecasvscrcsalisoesecrns er tar RA aaa 232 Redlining Markups for Change OFdelS csscsessssssessscsscssscssesnsssessnsssssssssscssssseesnssscsnceacesseseeeneess 232 Markie Promouonic scsunaieiiainanaiasaiidaletincinmasaliern cuneate aaa cea s 236 Markup Promotion for Change Based Markups ssssssssscssecssssesscsscssscsscssssseesssssessnsseessseseeees 236 Markup Promotion for Ad Hoc MarkupS cccsssssssssssessssecsssssecsusssessucsscessssscesssseesessacesscescsnseaesees 237 Working with ear Up FILES sos sasass sss scssedtossssicsnsdsssvinnsssoseestsean ssunsiodsivsieanitesansvscsaeienciapiesasaranigeiaseienia denies 238 Saved States inis si nccspesczsepencescacscnnchachuaccasecnscgutsvbcacsdcsbuconsdesncupessbend cacusnbapbonchveschuscen auncbadachacluastasacvlbatinustdess 238 Creating a Warp File aivuesticoucesaitciaavitherumeantontenaweru use eat nnn eaten 239 Entering Markup Information csscsssssscsssseesssssessnssscsssssessnsssessnssassssssscssscscsusssscsnceacsasesesnseasensess 239 Saving a New Markup File ssssssssseesssssssssessceessesnsssssseecseessossssssessteessosnsssesseeesreososssesseoceresnsssssseeereeenssss 240 Op ni ng Markup Filesis csc nsaiiainseiorsedacijratnvdin aan AE aR EEs 240 Saving an Existing Markup File ssesssssssseecseessssssssseeseeessessnssssseecseressossnsseesrerssossnsssoseressessnsssesseesees 241 Importing a Marup Files sssscssssssssssesesasesi vei svenss tess tneamnnonnoiviadi
160. ces from third parties Oracle Corporation and its affiliates are not responsible for and expressly disclaim all warranties of any kind with respect to third party content products and services Oracle Corporation and its affiliates will not be responsible for any loss costs or damages incurred due to your access to or use of third party content products or services January 2015 Contents Preface uiine fe cseceepencsesendunsadenspcodvaceseewetauegcudceslstaceshtuedusalichslcupecuasen ba tvecauds a t ii aa aai hE 13 VETO 101E EEEE E E AE 13 Related DOCU S a n AAE 13 EoI aAA O aE E EE ET REAA EE EEEE EE 14 Ntrod ctiom a a a a Ai 15 Or cl amp AUtOV UC sitar onean r A rea eta eat al S es AAAS a 15 Marking Up DO CUS IIES asrina nnie a eera i ESE r riea EErEE ea NA i ES NSS 16 PIE ON UIC BASICS AEE E E EE EEEE 17 AutoVue Version Information s ssssssssssseeseeeeeeteereersersersereeeeereeeeeeerseesereereeererssessessessnsssssssnsessen enseres en ees 17 Viewing Version and Build InformatiOn esssssssssseseeessssssssseseeeseessssssssseecseesssssssseesreesssssssssesseeesress 17 AutoVue Graphical User Interface sesssssssssssssssssssessnssscsssssssssssessnsencssscsscsssesscsnssseeascescsssesecsussascsncenesss 18 PinMe COn yeas Spaces peck neve svg e A E REA AARNE E R E RER 19 AETATEM E T EEEE A EEA OE A E E EAEE EEE 19 Bice 9 9 f c whenmenemirnttsr sense aa a ia aa a NT Retr E AE EAE ESAE EEEE Te aan 19 Navigation Panel a
161. ck and drag the frame handles to enlarge the value box To remove the highlighted vertices on the model click Close in the Measurement Entities dialog With AutoVue you can add a 3D text box entity to a markup TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Text ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click 3D Text H The Attach To dialog appears and provides six snapping options ADDITIONAL INFORMATION None Does not snap to the model Option Description Vertex Snaps to a vertex on the model Edge Snaps to an edge on the model Face Snaps to a face on the model Mid Edge Snaps to the middle of an edge on the model Ar Center Snaps to the center point of an arc on the model 3 4 To insert a text box that snaps to a part of the drawing with a leader line select one of the snapping modes Click and drag on the drawing to define the dimensions of the text box ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 303 MARKUPS 3D SPECIFIC MARKUPS 10 11 Click in the text box and enter the text you want to add ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The height of the text box will change to accommo date the text To change text box font properties from the Markup menu select Format and then select Font ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the respective font property lists on the Markup Properties toolbar you can also modify the font type sty
162. ckend system attributes that the Stamp can read and write to can be simple values or a list of values When lists are constrained you can only select from the pre defined list When lists are non constrained you can enter a value that is not in the drop down list When an attribute is a multi valued attribute AutoVue lets you select multiple values from the drop down list In this case values are separated by a semi colon As of AutoVue 20 2 Stamps are disabled for 3D files Existing stamps that were defined in previous releases of AutoVue can still be viewed but cannot be modi fied Adding a Stamp To add a Stamp markup entity to a document do the following TASK 1 Enter Markup mode 2 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Stamp ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Stamp 2 STEP RESULT The Stamp dialog appears 3 From the Choose Stamp box select the desired Stamp and then click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If the Enable Resizing check box is selected then the Stamp can be resized in the workspace If the check box is grayed out then the Stamp is not resizable and has a set size 270 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS 4 Inthe workspace click and drag a box to the desired Stamp size STEPRESULT The Stamp dialog closes and the Stamp appears in workspace and in the Markup Entity Tree Manipulating a Stamp De
163. comparing two files you should first open the newer version of the document and then compare it with the older version When comparing files AutoVue displays three windows e The right window displays the newer version of the document e The left window displays the older version of the document The bottom window displays the comparison results By default the result windows display added deleted and unchanged entities The Compare Tree displays the model s hierarchy with a State column displaying different icons representing the results of the file comparison The icons indicate if an model part has been added modified moved amp or deleted In the Comparison Result window you can specify whether you want to display only the additions deletions or unchanged or any combination of the three To access these options right click in any window and select an option from the 176 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES COMPARING 3D FILES Comparing 3D Files pop up menu By default the Comparison Result window displays the unchanged deleted and added information NOTE The Compare feature performs a graphical comparison not a geometrical comparison In the Comparison Result window results are displayed in different colors to differentiate the results of the file comparison The comparison options and corresponding colors are View Additions Option Color Description Green Displays pa
164. ct View As Assembly from the menu Viewing 3D CAD Assemblies in Multiple file File Folder from the 9 3x Web Client TASK e To view a CAD assembly from Web Client Attachments tab a Go to the Attachments tab of the business object that references the assembly b Click the multiple file attachment row that references the CAD assembly ADDITIONAL INFORMATION A multiple file attachment row is indicated by a file folder icon in the Filename field followed by the filenames of all the files in the file folder C Alternately from the Attachments tab do the following On the business object Attachments tab click to select the multiple file attachment row Click the View button s drop down arrow and then select View To view a CAD assembly from Web Client Files tab a Go to the Files tab of a file folder object containing the CAD files for the assembly that you want to view b Click to select the row for the top or starting file of the assembly c Click the View button s drop down arrow and then select View ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 137 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MODELS TAB AND MODEL TREE Viewing 3D CAD Assemblies in a Multiple file File Folder from Java Client TASK To view a CAD assembly from Java Client Attachments tab a Go to the Attachment tab of the business object that references the assembly b Double click the multiple file attachment row that references the CAD assembly ADDITIONAL
165. ct so that the objects selected fill the window Dynamic Zoom Click and drag the cursor up to zoom in or down to zoom out From the Autovue toolbar you can also click at Zoom Box Click and drag to draw a box around an object that you want to enlarge to fill the window From the Autovue toolbar you can also click Sor right click in workspace and then select from the menu Zoom Fit Resize object to fit window From the Autovue toolbar you can also click IB or right click in workspace and then select from the menu Pan Click and drag to reposition the model then release the mouse button From the Autovue toolbar you can also click C or right click in the workspace and then select from the menu ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 147 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MANIPULATING DISPLAY OF A 3D MODEL Menu Rotate Sub Menu Description Click and drag to rotate the model on all three axes then release the mouse button From the Autovue toolbar you can also click amp or right click in workspace and then select from the menu Spin Click and drag the object in the direction you want the object to spin continuously then release mouse button To stop the object from spinning click once anywhere in the workspace The spin velocity is determined by the speed at which you drag the mouse From the Autovue toolbar you can also click S Re Center All
166. d files for the selected file folder NOTE For item objects introductory revisions and unreleased pending revisions do not appear in the related files list Initiating a File Compare by Search To initiate a file compare by search TASK 1 2 Display the Attachments tab or Files tab Select a file row you want to work with and choose 9 2 1 x or 9 2 2 x Web Client View gt By Search gt Compare 9 3 x Web Client View gt Compare By Search A search dialog allows you to search for the object Java Client View File s gt By Search gt Compare STEP RESULT The Compare Files By Search dialog appears with three search tabs The search dialog allows you to search for any business object for example items or manufacturer parts and select the attachments of those objects to compare User any of the following search methods Search tab lets you create a simple search or an advanced search You can check to search attachment contents too Saved Searches tab opens to your navigation pane where you can browse in search folders select a search and run it Again returned results may be moved to the Selected Items table and click OK Shortcuts tab opens to your navigation pane where you can select objects from My Bookmarks or Recently Visited The system displays 46 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL COMPARING FILES INITIATE COMPARE IN AUTOVUE shortcuts to only those objects that are appropriate t
167. dded a user by mistake and would like to remove a user that has been added to the Invited list you can do so You cannot remove Invited users once the Collaboration Session is in prog ress TASK 1 2 In the Invite dialog locate the Invited list STEP RESULT The Invite dialog appears From the Invited list select the user or users that you want to remove ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 351 REAL TIME COLLABORATION COLLABORATION SESSION 3 Click Remove STEP RESULT The user or users you selected appear in the Online list 4 Click OK RESULT The users receive a tooltip notification that he or she is no longer invited to the session Assigning a Host During a Session TASK 1 From the Collaborate menu select Assign Host STEP RESULT The Assign Host dialog appears 2 From the Users list select the user that you want to assign as host 3 Click OK RESULT The user you selected is now the host of the Collaboration Session Passing Control of a Session to Another User When you initiate a Collaboration Session you are the default Controller of the session until you relinquish control to another user You may grant control to another user any time during the session Once you grant control to another user all other users will automatically lock their views to the new Controller TASK 1 From the Collaborate menu select Pass Control STEP RESULT The Grant Control dialog appears 2 F
168. des allow you to snap to the following entities NOTE The behavior of snapping modes change in regards to the selected measurement option For example the behavior of arc center is not the same for distance and minimum distance ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 189 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MEASURING IN 3D FILES Button Description Behavior Vase is Highlights verticeson A snap box appears when you hover the mouse the model pointer over a vertex Edge Line Highlights edgeson the The edge is highlighted when you hover the Fs model mouse pointer NOTE When measuring Minimum Distance the finite edge is selected However when measuring Distance the infinite edge is selected Edge Middle Highlightsedgesonthe The edge is highlighted and a tooltip appears Q model indicating the middle edge coordinate when you hover the mouse pointer Are OY Highlights arcs onthe The arc is highlighted when you hover the model mouse pointer Arc Center Highlights arcs and The arc is highlighted and a tooltip appears circles on the model indicating the arc center coordinate of the arc when you hover the mouse pointer NOTE When measuring Minimum Distance the arc center is selected However when measuring Distance the infinite arc axis is selected Face Plane Highlights faces when The face is highlighted when you hover the a you move the cursor mouse pointer over a face Measuring Dis
169. dsalicscandisauutsteoautajornminainduneinnnieeaadanianisncaimannaiens 248 Marking up 2D ari BD Fil SS ssascecssevsnd cosas cassuaccssvsvsuscodvoegucastevssovsascufen eombncvosssoupevavecodgvuecenupus tveredevseetionecani 249 Addi g an Attachment astiiohadetaciaieniuaathauacnaaun N a 250 STAC AY Attachment serena a i e a e T E EE ee 250 Editingian Attachment sinsa an EA A E n Rr ce 251 Addig a FAY STINK issssississiiissisisnnssniereseisiitsiiiarii isisisi tsiki tsss 251 Creating a HyperliNK isinsin ainidi ei En i E a aS 252 Openinga HyperliNkesseissssiisisisiisisieriorsisinsininan isi 253 Editing a HYPetliN Kissiin a ee eieae tea oeisio louse dnscooeh teen ad cae iante nee 253 Deleting a AY DOUIINK Ss sccssser iced cebu n a aaa tan a aa i 254 Adding Sign ff Entities siennes eiria aa a E iesin 254 R scinding THE Signo fessis E a a E E E EE RES 255 R Approving a Signoff sustenance tannin AAE NARR S 255 Viewing the History of a Signoff sesssssseeeeseeeeseeeereereeereeseeeeeseeeeeseeeresreerseersersreseesessessnssssssssssss 256 Addi ga Symbol cscsscscsscsescansscsschasccasscasessespusnssacsdvosscansdenscasbend gcustlassascbcacendensdatavethctousctuetestioitnundes 256 Creating a New Symbol Library ssssesesseeseeseesssesssssessessrssessessessnssnssssssssssssssssssssesssssenseneenesseeseeseeseee 258 Deleting a Symbol Library ssssssssssssessssssssssssssssssssesseeseuseuseeseneoseoseeeseeseeeeeeesereereereereereeereerereerereersee
170. e To import a Markup file on top of the original file TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Open ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Open Markup s STEP RESULT The Markup Files dialog appears ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 241 MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP FILES Click Import STEP RESULT The Select Markup File to Import dialog appears Navigate to the markup file that you want to import and select it Click Open RESULT The imported Markup file appears in the workspace on top of the orig inal file Exporting a Markup File To export a Markup file TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Save As ADDITIONAL INFORMATION For a new Markup file you can also click Save Markup TE STEP RESULT The Save Markup File As dialog appears 2 Click Export STEP RESULT The Save As dialog appears Navigate to the location where you want to export the Markup file 4 Enter file name Click Save RESULT The Markup file is exported to the selected directory The default format saved is Markup Files but you can select another one In the Save as Type list there are six formats to choose from Markup Files DXF Output dfx AutoCAD DWG dwg Microstation DGN Output dgn 242 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP FILES Setting the Active Markup File A file can have several Markup files When you open se
171. e a tooltip with commonly used entity information appears You can turn these tooltips off or on from the Configura tion dialog See Configuring AutoVue for more information on the Configuration dialog 92 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES ENTITY PROPERTIES Viewing the Properties of an Entity The Entity Properties dialog displays detailed information about any selected entity in the current schematic drawing or PCB design TASK 1 Select the entity in the workspace or from the Navigation Panel or Entity Search dialog Right click and select Show Entity Properties ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also double click the entity in the workspace to view its entity information STEP RESULT The Entity Properties dialog displays the selected entity and its associated entity Select any associated entity in the tree to display its attributes To view all associated entities for any given entity in the tree select the entity and click Expand ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To view the entity properties for the previous entity click the back arrow _ lt _ To return to the entity properties displayed before you clicked the back arrow click the forward arrow 2 Click OK to close the Entity Properties dialog Showing Net Connectivity You can view the net connectivity of an entity such as a pin via or trace with the Show Net Connectivity option Show Net Connectivity is disabled when more th
172. e 301 vertex coordinates 302 attachment 250 293 306 edit 251 open 250 change arrow style 313 change fill color 314 change fill type 313 change font 315 change line color 311 change line style 311 change line thickness 312 color 315 consolidate Markup files 248 delete 310 EDA measure angle 287 arc 288 area 286 cumulative distance 277 284 distance 283 EDA markup measure entities 281 minimum distance 289 Entity Types 227 filtering 227 formatting markup properties 310 freestyle 261 contiguous 261 non contiguous 262 373 go to 306 grouping 309 hiding all markups 308 hiding selected markups 309 hyperlink 251 create 252 delete 254 edit 253 open 253 intellistamp 270 add 270 layers 244 change color 245 create 244 delete 247 moving a markup entity 248 rename 246 set active 245 toggle 246 leader 263 marking up 2D files 249 marking up 3D files 249 Markup Entity Properties dialog 316 arrow style 319 custom color 320 custom line color 317 custom line thickness 318 fill color 320 fill type 319 leader alignment 321 line color 317 line style 318 line thickness 318 319 markup layers 321 text box visibility 321 Markup file 16 create 239 export 242 import 241 open 240 save 240 241 save view 238 set active 243 view 243 Markup files 238 Markup Filter 227 373 markup information 239 Markup Navigation Tree 26 226 Markup Panel 26 226 measurement units and symbols 316 moving markups 307 nesting entities 293
173. e 5 o clock position ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 153 WORKING WITH 3D FILES LIGHT SETTINGS 3 Toadd more light sources right click inside the square surrounding the ball and select Create New Light Source from the pop up menu STEP RESULT The Custom option is selected and the new light source appears as a white ball 4 Click and drag the small ball until you achieve the desired lighting To restore the light source to its default setting select Default 6 Click Close to close the Lighting dialog RESULT You can have a total of eight light sources at a time Changing the Light Properties TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visual Effects and then select Lighting STEP RESULT The Lighting dialog appears 2 To change the properties of the light such as color or brightness right click directly on the small ball and select Light Properties STEP RESULT The Light Property dialog appears 3 Select a color from the Color menu ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can drag the Brightness and Specularity slide bars to modify the brightness of the source and the brightness of the model s reflection to light respectively 4 Click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To set the light properties to its default setting select Default STEP RESULT The light properties modifications are applied 5 Click Close to close the Lighting dialog 154 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES 3D VIEW
174. e Browse does not appear in the File Open dialog 2 Click to expand a bookmark and display its item revisions or its file folder versions Click a revision or version row to highlight the file you want to view 4 Click OK in the DMS File Open dialog STEP RESULT The selected file name appears in the File Name field of the File Open dialog 5 Click OK in the File Open dialog RESULT The Viewer opens the selected file or if appropriate adds the selected file to the current analysis function 62 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES Using Agile Search to Select File You can use Agile Search to perform a quick search to select an attachment file TASK 1 From the File Open dialog click Agile Search STEP RESULT The Search dialog appears 2 Define your search using the following options and then click Search Option Description Class Select an object class for example Items Search Parameter Enter a text string or a number Agile PLM searches the object ID number attribute and the object Name or Description attribute A Quick search behaves like a Contains search for text strings The search criteria is treated as a single string and Agile PLM searches for names or descriptions that contain the search parameter string In the case of ID numbers Agile PLM searches for an exact match however you may use wildcard characters to spec
175. e Initiating a Session ou csessssssessssssesseeseessecsessecsscssecseessssseesncesceseesees 349 Opening a Markup During a Session sesssessesssssssssesssssessessncsssssecsescnscsscsncescesscssecsscscanceacenscssesass 350 Breia tiae b est sss a A E Want reise NNN EEA arn gr ter ree 350 Inviting Users During a Session cecasescetaccesaczesstaccsnsedsca svete couse lacdssessstecaststdcdecdiecs calssacsecetnsdecntecoesanonees 351 REMOVING Users from a Session esssesssssesssssseesssssessncsncssscsecsssssessnceacssnceacsuscsuesuscaseascsscsssesscsnsesseanees 351 Assigning a Host During a SESSION cssessssssssssscscsscsssscsscscseesessesccucsecsesseseescscescacencsucassneseeseecencesees 352 Passing Control of a Session to Another USef ssssssssssseesseesssssssseeseeesssssssssesseeesessnsssssseeseessnssss 352 Savinga Session IV LAL ILAPO s ccccer eyes vas ossatinsessuenc esas eee aE ee t EE err e SE ESE S 353 Closing a SSSI My Siaheoer shay see tacos n R E E R RR N 353 Requesting Control of a Session ecsesssssssssessnsssessecsscsssssscsssssessuscacssscsscsssssesuscsscsnceacessesesnscseeanees 354 Tracking CAA GOS a e E Ea EE N ene ea AEE Sina S Ena teen eae oteier 354 Unl cki ga VIEW isisisi isernia r KKE S EEE is 354 MCHA cel Vie Wesmar ctu ens tuese iosancrntonnteatteontinenreaom nets 355 Viewing Session InformatiOn ssssssseseseesssssssseesseessssssssseeseresessssssossereserssnssssseesererssessssseeseressesssssesse 355
176. e Logical Layers section ADDITIONALINFORMATION Select the layer or layers for which you want to change the color You can select a physical layer from the Physical Layers section logical layers associated with the selected physical layer are also selected You can also select individual logical layers from the Logical Layers section or press the Shift or Control key while selecting to select multiple layers After you select a layer you can do one of the following to modify its color Click Modify Color o and then select a color from the palette Use this button if you want to change the color of all logical layers associated with a selected physical layer or to change the color of many selected logical layers at the same time Double click a square in the Color column o of the Logical Layers section and then select a color from the palette Use this option to change the color of individual logical layers STEP RESULT The color of all selected layers changes in the Color column ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 101 WORKING WITH EDA FILES LAYER SETS 4 Click Apply to save the changes STEP RESULT The display updates in the workspace based on the changes you made to the layer color You can now save your changes as a user defined layer set 6 Click Close to close the Layers dialog Sorting Logical Layers Layer Sets You can sort the list of logical layers in the Logical Layers section by name visi bi
177. e Save Markup File As dialog RESULT The Layer sets you created are saved with the Markup file When you reopen the file during a different session you can view the Layer sets when you open the Markup file See Markups Manipulating EDA Views As with any 2D file with the View options you can instantly manipulate how the current active file is displayed For example you can rotate a file s orienta tion clockwise or counter clockwise by 90 degrees See 2D Viewing Options for more information on View options AutoVue provides several ways to change the view size of a selected area of a file display different views layers and blocks of the current active file You can also navigate from one page to another page of a multi page file ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 105 WORKING WITH EDA FILES 3D VIEW 3D View For some ECAD formats AutoVue supports 3D views of PCB boards TASK 1 Inthe Navigation Panel click the Bookmarks tab 2 Select3D Model from the navigation tree RESULT The 3D view of the PCB board is displayed in the workspace 3D view can also be accessed from the View menu selecting Page and then selecting Next or from the AutoVue toolbar and then clicking Next Page _ Cross Probing Cross probing is the ability to select elements in the schematic and have them mapped to the corresponding components in the layout drawings and vice versa The following sections provide i
178. e Size option appears giving you a choice between milli meters and inches Page sizes can be selected from the Size list or you can customize page sizes by configuring the Initialization file For more informa tion refer to the Installation and Configuration Guide ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 339 CONVERSION CONVERTING A FILE Technical Drawing Page Sizes ISO Paper Format A8 5 X 11 0 216 mm X 279 mm A4 285 mm X 198 mm B11 0 X 17 0 279 mm X 432 mm A3 396 mm X 273 mm C17 0 X 22 0 432 mm X 559 mm A2 570 mm X 396 mm D22 0 X 34 0 559 mm X 864 mm Al 817 mm X 570 mm E34 0 X 44 0 864 mm X 1118 mm A0 1165 mm X 817 mm Converting a File TASK From the File menu select Convert ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Input area varies according to the type of file For example a word processing file displays the file and format a raster file displays the file path name format and size and vector and database files display the size file type and dimensions STEP RESULT The Convert dialog appears In the Save As field enter the path and filename or click Browse to locate the directory where you want to save the converted file ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If writing on to an existing file the contents of the output file will be overwritten Specify the conversion options Click OK The file is converted and appears in the specified directory ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can convert several s
179. e Units list select the units of measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you want to measure the distance along a path select Cumulative 6 Click a point on the drawing to define the starting point Click another point on the drawing to define the end point ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you selected Cumulative continue clicking points along the path that you want to measure 8 Right click to complete the measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement STEP RESULT The points are joined by a line The Measured Distance Delta X and Delta Y appear in the Measurement dialog 9 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 75 WORKING WITH 2D FILES MEASURING IN 2D FILES Calibrating Distance Calibrate the distance measurement TASK 1 Measure distance between two points or measure cumulative distance 2 From the Distance tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Distance Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance 3 From the Units list select the unit to which you want to calibrate the distance 4 Select Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance to a value 5 Select Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance by a factor 6 Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration result appears in the Measurement dialog 7 Click Close to close the Distance tab Area in non Vector Fil
180. e clicking points along the path that you want to measure STEP RESULT The measured line path appears as an entity on the current active markup 7 Move the cursor and click a location on the drawing to display the measure distance STEP RESULT The measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measured distance Delta X and Delta Y appear in theMeasurement Entities dialog 8 To resize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles 9 Youcan click and drag the text box anywhere on the drawing ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To make another measurement click Reset 10 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog 276 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS CREATING 2D VECTOR MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES Measuring Cumulative Distance Use the Cumulative Distance option to measure the distance along a path of multi faceted adjoining points TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Distance ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 2 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring 3 To select all snapping modes click All On To deselect all snapping modes click All Off 4 Fromthe Measured Distance Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance Select Cumulati
181. e measured angle also appears in the Measurement Entities dialog 6 To resize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles 7 Youcan click and drag the value box anywhere on the drawing ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To make another measurement click Reset 8 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Measuring an Arc Use the Arc option to define an arc in the drawing and measure its radius center and diameter TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Arc ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Arc Q ai STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 268 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS 2 From the Arc Info Length list select the unit in which you want to measure the arc 3 From the Measured Angle Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the angle The options are degrees or radians 4 Select Add Radius if you want to measure the radius of the arc Select Add Diameter if you want to measure the diameter of the arc 6 Click three points on the drawing to define the arc you want to measure STEP RESULT The points are joined by an arc 7 Click again to complete the measurement STEP RESULT The measured line path arc measurement and unit appear ina value box entity on the current active markup layer and in the Measurement Entities dialog
182. e or multiple components or entities zoom to a component or entity and query entity infor mation Components wa Components RefDes Part Type Locatior U4 BOFPC6 29 0001 Ci CAPAE1 51 0001 C2 CAPC321 7 00001 C3 CAPC321 7 00001 C4 CAPC321 7 00001 ut SOP63P 50 0001 U2 SOP6SP 50 0001 0i RESC16 7 00001 RESC16 7 00001 R2 RESC16 7 00001 RI RESC16 7 00001 RNI RESCAX 9 00001 RN2 RESCAX 9 0000 RN3 RESCAX 9 00001 __AIN4 RESCAX 9 00001 J1 MOL 541 30 0001 51 SW_SNA 11 0001 2 5SW_SNA 49 0001 J2 USBAF 23 0001 DISPLAY1 7SEGSMD 23 0001 g gt Component Pins Name With a U5 1 false U5 2 1500 false u5 3 1500 false U5 4 1500 false U5 5 1500 false U5 6 false ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 21 AUTOVUE BASICS AUTOVUE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE Bookmarks Tab The Bookmarks tab lists links to specific views Draft views 2D plans 3D Views of an EDA design or pages or bookmarks structure that is saved in files such as PDF Bookmarks 3D Model Components Nets Bookmarks Navigate between the pages or files or views by clicking the appropriate link Bookmarks lead to various views of CAD files such as AutoCAD file Model Space the 3D model of a file and associated 2D eng
183. e value for the Left Top Right and Bottom margins Minimum Set the acceptable minimum margins for the selected printer Units Specify the unit for the margins Override Select this option to override the predefined minimum print margins Printing Minimum Margins Setting the Margins TASK 1 From the Filemenu selectPrint ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Print 2 STEP RESULT The Print Properties dialog appears 2 Click the Margins tab 3 Enter the margin size that you want for Left Top Right and Bottom or click Minimum if you want to set the margins to the minimum acceptable for the selected printer 4 To define margins that are less the minimum acceptable for the selected printer select Override Printing Minimum Margins 5 Fromthe Units list select the unit to which you want to set the margins 6 Configure other print options 7 To view a partial view of the file click Partial Preview STEP RESULT The Partial Print Previewdialog appears 8 Click OK to print RESULT The Print dialog appears indicating the document is printing ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 327 PRINTING HEADER FOOTER Header Footer From the Headers Footers tab of the Print Properties dialog you can define the headers and footers that you want to print on every page of the document You can enter the text manually or choose from a list of Insert Codes The list of insert codes are f Fu
184. e you have defined the section plane and closed the Define Section dialog among other options you can choose whether to enable remove or invert a defined section from the Section menu ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 173 WORKING WITH 3D FILES EXPLODING Exploding Explode Options You can use the Explode option to better understand the structure of an assembly and to analyze the dismount capability You can also save the exploded view as well as obtain a printed document of the exploded product for further analysis From the Explode dialog you can define how the explosion is to be performed and to visually explode or implode a model The options that you can set are Option Maximum Depth Description Define up to which level you want to explode All entities from the root level to the specified level are exploded All entities on the other levels will not be exploded If you are exploding Whole model the number of available levels depends on how many explodable levels exist in the model For example if there are four levels with level 2 being the first level under the main assembly then level 3 and level 4 are added to the list Selected parts the number of available levels to be added to the list depends on the selected virtual tree Animated When selected animation is shown while exploding or imploding the model Show Arrows When selected arrows are displayed in an explosion assem
185. ead at one or both ends of a markup line entity TASK 1 Select the markup line entity you want to change the arrow style To select multiple markup line entities press the Shift or Control key while selecting 2 From the Arrow Style list select the style of arrow that you want for the markup line entity 3 Click OK to close the Markup Entity Properties dialog RESULT The arrow style changes for the selected markup line entity or entities NOTE Any new markup line entities that you create will have the new arrow style Fill Type Change the transparency for selected markup entity or entities TASK 1 Select the markup entity you want to change the fill type To select multiple markup entities press the Shift or Control key while selecting ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 319 Markups FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES 2 From the Fill Type list select the fill type that you want for the markup entity Select Solid Fill if you want the fill color to be solid Select Transparent Fill if you want the fill color to be transparent Select No Fill if you do not want any fill color 3 Click OK to close the Markup Entity Properties dialog RESULT The fill type changes for the selected markup entity or entities NOTE Any new markup entities that you create will have the new fill type Fill Color Change the line color fill color and fill type for a selected markup entity or enti tie
186. easure from Select the snapping modes that you want to select as the entities for the measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you click Net N you cannot select any other type of entity See EDA Snapping Modes 6 Click the first set of entities on the drawing ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To clear the last set of entities you selected click Clear Set STEP RESULT The entities are highlighted 7 Select Second Set EY to select the entities that you want to measure to 130 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES MEASURING IN EDA FILES Measuring Area 8 Click the second set of entities on the drawing STEP RESULT The entities are highlighted in a different color 9 From the Measured Min Distance Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance 10 Select Zoom to Result if you want to zoom into the measurement on the drawing 11 Click Compute ADDITIONAL INFORMATION AutoVue does not measure the distance between layers z dimension STEP RESULT The minimum distance from the first set of entities to the second set is represented by a line The minimum measured distance Delta X Delta Y and the Manhattan Distance appear in the Measure Min Distance section of the dialog 12 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Use the Area option to measure the area and perimeter of a region TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ATONAL INFORMATION From the
187. ect attribute s that determine the uniqueness of a component part Attribute _ Part Type Location Ratation Component Definition Glued Layer Number of Connections o O O 0O O al O O Geometry Height Select the attributes that you want to appear in the report Click Generate ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To sort a column by alphanumerical or alphabetical order click on the column heading STEP RESULT The Bill of Material dialog appears listing the count for each component or part possessing the attributes you selected There are also columns displaying the values of the attributes you selected To save the BOM click Export STEP RESULT The Save dialog appears Specify the directory where you want to store the file the file name and extension then click Save ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can specify either pdx Product Data Exchange or csv Comma Separated Values for the extension STEP RESULT AutoVue automatically saves the results ina file with the specified extension Click Close to close the Bill of Material dialog ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 117 WORKING WITH EDA FILES DESIGN VERIFICATION Design Verification Design verifications are operations that check the electrical design of a PCB against a set of rules defining physical and electrical design constraints Performing these checks prevent short circuits and process errors The types of d
188. ect this option to print one Note markup per page of the current file NOTE This option is only available when in Markup mode Print Row Headers Select this option to print row headers Option is only enabled for spreadsheets and archive files ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 325 PRINTING CONFIGURING THE PRINT OPTIONS Print Dialog Section Print Column Headers Option Description Select this option to print column headers Option is only enabled for spreadsheets and archive files Partial Preview Display a view of the printer page highlighting the printable area Configuring the Print Options TASK 1 From the Filemenu select Print ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Print 2 STEP RESULT The Print Properties dialog appears we w N Click the Options tab Configure the print options Configure other print options To view a partial view of the file click Partial Preview STEP RESULT The Partial Print Preview dialog appears 6 Click OK to print RESULT The Print dialog appears indicating the document is printing Print Margins From the Margins tab of the Print Properties dialog you can define the top bottom right and left margins for the printed file You can define 326 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL PRINTING PRINT MARGINS Option Description Margins Set th
189. ectedMarkup appears in the Initiate Session dialog ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 349 REAL TIME COLLABORATION COLLABORATION SESSION Opening a Markup During a Session Joining a Session The Host can open Markups during a Collaboration Session These Markups can be session markups created during Collaboration Sessions or any non session Markup files TASK 1 During a Collaboration Session from the Markup menu select Open STEP RESULT A confirmation dialog appears prompting you to save the current Session Markup 2 Click Yes or No or Cancel STEP RESULT The Markup Files dialog appears Select the check box beside the Markup that you want to open 4 To import a Markup file click Import STEP RESULT The Select Markup File to Import dialog appears Locate the file that you want to open 6 Click Open In the Markup Files dialog select Session Markup if you want to open a Session Markup and keep the layer colors and markup entities from the Collaboration Session 8 Click OK RESULT The selected Markup appears in the Collaboration window You can either join a collaboration session that you are invited to or to a session for which you have been provided the session ID and password When you are invited to a collaboration session you get a tooltip notification If you do not want to receive any notifications when you are invited to a Collaboration Sessions select Do Not Disturb from the Collaboratemenu
190. ed 5 Click OK RESULT The changes appear in the Navigation Panel Components Tab NOTE The Components tab displays only for the EDA pages of a drawing The Components tab lists component instances and the associated pins The top portion of the tab lists all the instances of the currently displayed page of the drawing The lower portion of the tab lists the associated pins for selected instances ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 85 WORKING WITH EDA FILES NETS TAB When you select a component it appears highlighted on the drawing To select more than one component press the Shift or Control key while selecting All the selected components and their associated pins are highlighted Components wi Components C345 CAP 0402 2 C344 CAP 0402 1 C343 CAP 0402 1 C342 CA4P 0402 1 C360 CAP 0402 1 CAP 0402 lt Component Pins Name Net Pin U C341 1 3 3VDC UNSF C341 2 GND UNSF ii gt Components Nets Bookmarks Nets Tab NOTE The Nets tab displays only for EDA drawings The Nets tab lists nets and associated net nodes pins connected to a net The top portion of the tab lists all the nets of the drawing s currently displayed page The lower portion of the tab lists the associated net nodes for the selected nets All selected nets are highlighted on the drawing To select more than one net press the Shift or Control key while selecting Alternately in the Nets panel 86 ORACLE AUTOV
191. ed the signoff disappears is rescinded from the workspace but remains in the Markup Navigation tree Double click on the signoff entity in the tree to view the signoff history the person who rescinded the signoff the creation date and the drop date TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Signoff ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Signoff 254 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES 2 Click and drag to create a box on the drawing where you want the signoff STEP RESULT The Signoff dialog appears displaying details of the signoff 3 Click OK RESULT The signoff entity appears on the drawing and in the tree and displays the author creation date and approval date Rescinding the Signoff You can rescind a signoff on a drawing TASK 1 Inthe Markup Navigation tree or in the workspace double click the signoff markup entity ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Signoff STEP RESULT The Signoff dialog appears 2 Click Rescind RESULT The signoff disappears from the drawing but remains in the Markup Navigation Tree Re Approving a Signoff To re approve the signoff that has been rescinded TASK 1 Inthe tree double click the signoff markup entity The Signoff dialog appears 2 Click Approve RESULT The signoff entity re appears on the
192. ed Hole Visibility Select whether to use the native settings or turn on off the non plated hole visibility NOTE Applicable to Cadence Allegro format only Pad Filling Select whether to use the native settings or turn on off pad filling NOTE Applicable to Cadence Allegro format only Line Caps Joins Select whether to use the native settings or turn on off line caps joins NOTE Applicable to Cadence Allegro format only Global Transparency Move slider to select global transparency level Configuring Background Colors for Graphic Files Specify background colors for mono raster files and color raster files TASK 1 From the Options menu select Configure STEP RESULT The Configuration dialog that appears 222 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING BACKGROUND COLORS FOR DESKTOP OFFICE 2 Select Graphics in the tree 3 From their respective Background lists select colors for monochrome raster files and color raster files Configuring Background Colors for Desktop Office Specify background colors for the following types of Desktop Office files Docu ment Spreadsheet Database and Archive TASK 1 From the Optionsmenu selectConfigure STEP RESULT The Configuration dialog appears 2 Select Desktop Office in the tree 3 Select a background color for each Desktop Office file type ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 2
193. ed Values file 188 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES MEASURING IN 3D FILES Measuring in 3D Files AutoVue provides the ability to perform measurements in 3D files When measuring AutoVue provides the option to snap to different entity types on the model From the Analysis menu select Measure to access the Measurement options NOTE From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure Sx The following table outlines the available measuring options Name Description Angle Measure the precise angle between any three vertices or any two edges planes faces or any combination of these entity types Arc Measure the precise radius length and angle of any arc and calculate the center point Distance Measure the precise distance between any two vertices edges mid edges arc centers faces or any combination of these entity types Minimum Distance Measure minimum distance between any two vertices edges mid edges arc centers faces or any combination of these entity types Edge Length Measure the precise length of a edge Face Surface Measure the precise surface area Vertex Coordinates Provide the coordinates of each vertex 3D Snapping Modes Snapping modes allow you to select or snap to different entity types on a model For example if you select Vertex all vertices are highlighted and a snap box appears when you move the cursor over a vertex Snapping mo
194. ed errors and accelerated innovation and time to market are just a few of the business benefits organizations can expect to achieve This manual explores AutoVue s key capabilities and is designed to help you get the most out of AutoVue s extensive functionality Oracle AutoVue Oracle AutoVue is a viewing and markup application that has been developed for both business and technical users AutoVue is capable of displaying hundreds of file formats without the authoring application Supported file types include Text Office Graphics EDA 2D Engineering Drawings and 3D Models Even contents of archive files can viewed in AutoVue NOTE Although not required we recommend that file names include their stan dard file extensions If the file extensions are not included AutoVue may require additional time to load a file Oracle AutoVue is available in various product variations Refer to the Auto Vue Product Variations Feature Matrix document to see what features are available for each variation ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 15 INTRODUCTION MARKING Up DOCUMENTS Marking Up Documents AutoVue has the ability to create markups for all its readable file formats without the document s authoring application AutoVue creates markups for different formats without modifying the original file You can attach comments notes and drawings to any file you display in AutoVue This is called marking up a file commonly known as annotating
195. ed file The options are ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 323 PRINTING PRINT OPTIONS Print Dialog Section Printer Option Modify Description Select a printer and configure print properties such as paper size number of copies and so on Paper size Displays selected paper size This option also allows you to modify the paper size Orientation Portrait Specify if file should be printed portrait Landscape Specify if the file should be printed landscape Auto Specify if orientations should be printed as saved in the file Units From the drop down list set the unit for Scaling and Alignment Offset The available units are pixels inches and millimeters Scaling Fit to Page Scales the image to fit on the output page Factor Specifies the number of drawing units per specified number of inches Scale Scales the image according to a percentage You can select a predefined scaling factor or manually enter a custom scaling factor Decimal places are accepted Alignment Offset Specify where the drawing will appear on the printout You can define custom alignment in inches by entering a X and Y value NOTE This feature is disabled for spreadsheet formats Document Pages Specify the document pages to print All Current or Range 324 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL PRINTING PRINT OPTIONS Print Dialog Section Pa
196. ed when using the Collaborate feature in AutoVue Observers can view the Controller s walkthrough of the 3D model in real time See Real Time Collaboration for more information on the Collaborate feature Walkthrough Dialog To enter Walkthrough mode from the View menu select Walkthrough The Walkthrough dialog appears Walkthrough Instructions Walk forward backward Left click and drag mouse up down or up down arrow key Turn left right Left click and drag mouse left right or left right arrow key More navigation options Press Ctrl Alt or Shift Move through walls C Restore last view Show walkthrough dialog at startup NOTE Closing the Walkthrough dialog does not exit Walkthrough mode To exit you must deselect Walkthrough from the View menu The Instructions panel explains the possible model manipulation options while you perform the walkthrough See Walking Through a 3D Model for more information From the Speed panel of the Walkthrough dialog you can adjust the increment speed of the camera for all walkthrough functions By default the Move through walls option is selected This feature allows you to walk through walls when viewing a model You can deselect the option to enable the collision detection feature ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 199 WORKING WITH 3D FILES WALKTHROUGH The Restore last view option saves the last view of the model before exiting walkthrough mode As a resu
197. ee column let you select which PMI entity types display in the 3D model tree The check boxes in the View column let you select which PMI entity types display in the workspace The following PMI Text Rendering Style options let you define the style for the PMI text Option Description Native Setting PMI text displays with the default setting from file 3D PMI text displays in 3 dimensions It may not always face you Flat to screen PMI text always faces you Configuring Color With the Coloroptions you can configure the color to allow easier viewing of 3D file details From the Configuration tree expand 3D and then select Colors to view the available Color options They are grouped under Common Section Highlight and Geometry Highlight as follows ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 213 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR 3D FILES Common Option Description Background Set the background color for 3D view Selection Set the color when selecting a model or model parts Min Distance Set Set the color of the first set point when measuring minimum distance 1 Min Distance Set Set the color of the second set point when measuring minimum 2 distance Section Highlight Option Description Edges Set the color for the section edges when defining Section Cut Options Fill Set the fill color when defining Section Cut Options Geometry Highl
198. elect entities in either file You can also select enti 114 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES COMPARING A PCB WITH ARTWORK ties in any open view when cross probing the 2D view and 3D view of the same file 2 Right click and select Zoom Selected RESULT AutoVue zooms to the same entities in all the open file or views See also Configuring Zoom Behavior when Cross Probing for more informa tion Comparing a PCB with Artwork You can visually compare PCB designs with artwork In Compare mode for EDA files EDA options such as Select Entity Entity Search dialog and Entity Filter are available NOTE The Compare feature performs a graphical comparison not a geometrical comparison TASK 1 Open the PCB file that you want to compare with the artwork 2 From the Analysis menu select Compare STEP RESULT The Open dialog appears 3 Enter the file name or browse to locate the artwork file you want to compare with the PCB file 4 Click Open STEP RESULT The PCB Artwork Comparison dialog appears 5 From the box select the PCB Physical layer that represents the artwork ADDITIONAL INFORMATION For example TOP or BOTTOM 6 Click OK STEP RESULT AutoVue displays three windows the first displaying the original PCB drawing the second displaying the Artwork drawing and the third the Comparison Result window ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 115 WORKING WITH EDA FILES GENERATIN
199. elected pages of a multi page file to a multi page TIFF 340 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL CONVERSION CHANGING THE PEN SETTINGS Changing the Pen Settings With AutoVue you can specify a thickness for each pen color when doing a conversion This option only applies to vector files TASK 1 From the File menu select Convert STEP RESULT The Convert dialog appears 2 Click Pens STEP RESULT The pen Thickness dialog appears 3 Inthe From To section of the Pen Thickness dialog select the Color Index for which you want to modify the thickness ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one Color Index press the Shift or Control keys while selecting 4 From the Units list select the unit in which you want to set the thick ness 5 Inthe Thickness field enter a thickness value 6 Press the Enter key STEP RESULT The new thickness value appears beside the selected Color Index in the From To section of the Pen Thickness dialog 7 To save the changes that you made click Save As STEP RESULT The Save As dialog appears Enter a file name for the new pen settings Click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To modify an existing pen setting select the pen setting from the Current Pen Settings list make the changes then click Save STEP RESULT The new pen settings are saved and appear in the Current Pen Settings list 10 Click OK to close the Pen Thickness dialog ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 341
200. en right click and select Compare Results STEP RESULT The Compare Results dialog appears To view the attribute differences click Attributes To view the transformation difference click Transformation ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If there are no attribute or transformation differences the buttons are disabled 10 Click OK to close the Compare Results dialog 11 To exit Compare mode from the File menu select Exit Compare ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also select Exit Comparefx RESULT The newer file appears in the workspace Comparing Entity Sets From the file comparison you can compare a set of entities from one file against a set of entities from the another file You can also compare sets of entities from the same file TASK 1 Select the files you want to compare 178 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES COMPARING 3D FILES 2 From the Analysis menu select Compare Sets STEP RESULT The Compare Sets dialog appears Compare Sets S 3DCatiaSFrontDriveAssembly CATFA S 3DCatiaS4CPulley CATPart Page 1 Page 1 Producti 3DCatia54CPulley CAT Par 5 3DCatiaSBalanceShafl Solid 0 3DCatiaSB alanceS Annotation Set 1 Solid 0 Datums 5 3DCatiaSPowerSteerin Simple Datum B 3DCatiaSPowerSte Datum Target Solid vi B Dimensions he a e a BCe Click BY Set 1 4 Select the entities from either the tree o
201. enainienanoaes 311 Changing Li e Style satis ss cscenssctschcascaccscsasdecbansaseatetee daspatssted ccdacdess assespcbddhuaaoantesauablaaaslatacledasdaicoes 311 Changing Wine TAICKMGSS yc iswstaicssnssi ese oiianiaaesion tnd G Rar nia a h 312 Ghangingi Arrow Stylesin onreine n cae ene 313 Changing FiITypennnen ususani a TA 313 Changing Fil COON se reias e r C a EE a AE oni 314 Assigning a Markup Entity the Same Color as the Layer sssssssssesseseeserserserserseesereeesessessesees 315 Changing FON tssssisess is ansie nienie eeisions enose arrose tir iI Nn EEES SEESE iise s aeeti Ei 315 Changing Measurement Units and SyMbOIS sssssscsscsssecsecsecssccssecseecsscessesseccsceesecsuecsseeseecses 316 Using the Markup Entity Properties Dialog s sesssesssssessessseeeeeeeeseeeeesereereereerreeeeeeeeeeeeesreseesees 316 AEAII aLe ces csc esac tes ocd ens head oases AEEA ENE DEEA AEE AEE teste cadena EE 323 PrnCOPTIOA S a a shal dana EEA ea ceased eead band asap eg A A EAE 323 Configuring the Print Options seseiesccassrsccssosscovecssss cos ssosscdeesssbrsdkessadendersebeseaasendondondeey ndsasudentenssayenssasevestetess 326 Print NVA AS pcs ss gos te sates caes ete ate cane pctecececteenuta edeanta edzan i eee ck Aiea cte ates ecasceedeca sted iks eian eies aaae aa 326 Setting THE Marissen esini e E nir ki o Srs s Er snie Ei 327 FICACICE POOL CN irens aea e a cota a E e E eE e dence 328 Adding a Header and FOOt f sssssssssseeseessssss
202. entity for which you want to view information If you did not select an entity a message appears informing you that no entities were found and prompts you to select again The Get Entity Info dialog appears displaying the information for the selected entity The Extended Data XData button appears if additional information exists for that entity Click XData to view the information Click OK to close the Get Entity Info dialog Viewing Tags Attributes The List Tag Attributes option allows you to view information on block attri butes and tags TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Show Drawing Information and then select List Tags Attributes Click in the area of the file for which you want to view information on block attributes and tags ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If there are no entities within the selected box a message appears informing you that no entities were found and prompts you to select again STEPRESULT The Block Attributes dialog appears displaying the attributes tags for the selected entity Click OK to close the Block Attributes dialog Viewing Information for a Set of Entities The Entity Information option allows you to view information of a set of entities contained in a specific area of a drawing TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Show Drawing Information and then select Entity Information 70 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH PDF FILES
203. enu select Format and then select Line Color The Line Color dialog appears NOTE From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click Line Color Alternatively right click the entity in the workspace or Markup Navi gation Tree select Format and then select Line Color From the Line Color list select Bylayer A To assign the fill color From the Markup menu selectFormat and then select Fill Color The Fill Color dialog appears NOTE From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click Fill Color From the Fill Color list select Bylayer Click OK RESULT The selected markup entity or entities change to the color of the layer that the entity belongs to You can change the font of the text box leader and measurement entities TASK 1 2 Create the markup entity that you want From the workspace or the Markup Navigation Tree select the markup entity for which you want to modify the font then do one of the following From Markup menu select Format and then select Font The Font dialog appears From the lists select the font font style and font size You also can select to add a strikeout and underline by selecting their ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 315 MARKUPS FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES check boxes Click OK to the close the dialog and implement the changes From the Markup Entity toolbar select the font font size and font style bold italic and underline f
204. ered manually into the PCB design Mounting hole A hole used for the mechanical support of a PCB or for the mechanical attachment of components to a PCB Multi layer board A PCB that has multiple layers separated by dielectric material with connectivity between layers established by vias or through holes This term usually refers to a board with more than two layers Net A logical construct circuit that originates in a schematic and is transferred to a board to describe required electrical connections The connections may be completed by using vias tracks or zones Net list List of names of symbols or parts and their connection points which are logically connected in each net of a circuit A net list can be extracted electronically on a computer from a properly prepared schematic Obstacle An outline representing an object on the board It must be taken into account during routing placement or copper pour Pad On a PCB a copper shape on one or more layers there may be a hole and an isolation surrounding the copper used for connecting a component pin to the PCB The pad indicates where pins of a component are placed Padstack A numbered list of pad descriptions Each description contains a pad definition including layer style drill diameter size offset and solder mask guard width 362 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL APPENDIX A EDA TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
205. errupt the Freestyle entity as many times as you like by repeating steps 4 and 5 6 Right click to end the Freestyle entity Aligning a Line Segment to the Vertical or Horizontal Axes A line segment drawn with the Free Snap snapping mod can be forced to align with the closer horizontal or vertical axis You can also take an existing line segment and have it align with the closer axis The types of line segments that you can align are lines line segments of leaders and polylines and measure enti ties See 2D Vector Snapping Modes for more information Free Snap TASK 1 To draw and force a line segment press and hold the Shift key while you click and drag for that line segment 262 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Adding a Leader To force an existing line segment click and hold the left mouse button on the line segment then press and hold the Shift key When you see that the line segment is horizontal or vertical release the left mouse button then release the Shift key TASK From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Leader ADDITIONALINFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Leader Click a point on the document where define the Leader anchor point Move the cursor to draw the Leader ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To draw a Leader segment and force it to be aligned to the closest axis vertical or horizontal hold the Shift
206. ers that may be present on the status bar the Markup Indi cator icon indicates associated markups the Missing Resource icon indi substituted resources The Markup Indicator indicates that the current active file has associated markups While in View mode click the Markup Indicator icon to view the Markup Files dialog then select a Markup file or group of Markup files to open The Missing Resource icon indicates that some main resources required to properly display the current active file are not available To identify the missing resources click the Resource icon to display the Properties dialog The Substituted Resource icon indicates that if a required resource is missing AutoVue has replaced it with another resource To identity the substituted resources click the Substituted Resource icon to display the Properties dialog One of the quickest ways to access options is through Quick Menus or context sensitive shortcut menus These are the menus you see when you right click in the workspace Markup Navigation Tree and Model Tree The available Quick Menu options depend on the location where you right click The left mouse button provides different functionality in the View and Markup modes Mode Left Mouse Button Functionality View Mode By default drag to perform an auto zoom of all supported file formats excluding 3D formats Select the area to enlarge Markup Mode If objects are selected drag to modi
207. es Use the Area option to measure the area and perimeter of a region TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure G OPImONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure pam Fl STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears displaying the measurement options 2 Click the Area tab 3 Inthe Area Units list select a unit of measurement in which to measure the area of the region 4 Inthe Perimeter Units list select a unit of measurement in which to measure the perimeter of the region ADDITIONAL INFORMATION In the Net Area Result group select Add to cumulate anet area result of different areas select Subtract to subtract an area from the net area result and select Clear to clear the Net Area Result field 5 Click a point on the drawing to define the starting point 76 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 2D FILES MEASURING IN 2D FILES Continue clicking points on the drawing to define the region you want to measure STEP RESULT Each point is joined by a line The area and perimeter measure ments appear in their respective fields in the Area tab Right click to complete the measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Area in Vector Files Use the Area option to measure the area and perimeter of a region TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Auto
208. es To do so select a file from the Background Images list and then click Up to move an image to the front and Down to send an image to the back 7 To edit the background image select the file from the Background Images list and then click Edit STEP RESULT The Background Image dialog appears Edit as required 8 To remove a background image from the Background Images list select the file and then click Remove 9 Click OK when done RESULT NOTE The selected background image is implemented ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 215 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR 3D FILES Miscellaneous Display Model Tree Manipulator Selection From the Configuration tree expand 3D and then select Miscellaneous to display the Miscellaneous option The Show Global Axes option is active by default Disable this option to remove the axes that display in the bottom right corner of the workspace You can change the size of the global axes by moving the Size of Axes slider Move the slider to the left to minimize the axes and to right to maximize Enter a value in the Expand Level field to define the level at which you want the Model Tree to display when opening a 3D file The default level is 3 Alternately select Expand On Demand to the collapse the whole tree Enable the Align with current UCS option to automatically align the manipu lators with the current User defined Coordinate System The following Selecti
209. es you can synchronize all layer settings When the layer settings are synchronized changing one setting changes the same setting for both files you are comparing NOTE This option is selected by default and is only applicable for PCB drawings TASK 1 From the tree expand EDA and then select Analysis 2 Select the Layer Settings option to synchronize all layer settings when comparing files Configuring Zoom Behavior when Cross Probing You can configure the zoom options when you cross probe files TASK 1 From the tree expand EDA and then select Analysis ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 219 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR EDA FILES 2 Select one of the following Cross Probe Action options a Select Keep Current Zoom Level When this option is active the view of the target files remains the same while you cross probe b Select Zoom Selected to automatically zoom in on selected entities while you cross probe This option is enabled by default c Select Zoom Fit to automatically adjust the contents of a file along the horizontal and vertical axis to fully display within the current window Modifying Colors You can configure the colors for EDA files From the tree expand EDA and then select Colors In the Color Options dialog the options that you can configure are grouped under Common PCB and 3D View as follows Common Option Description Background Set
210. es document revisions by providing the author with one combined Markup file instead of several Markup files Note that the Consoli date option is only active when more than one Markup file is opened TASK 1 Open the Markup files that you want to consolidate 2 From the Markup menu select Consolidate STEP RESULT The Consolidate Markups dialog appears 3 Select the markup layers that you want to consolidate into one file To select multiple layers press the Shift or Control key while selecting ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select all the layers click Select All and to deselect all the layers click UnSelect All 4 Inthe Markup ID field enter an IDfor the new Markup file If you want to open the newly consolidated markup as the active markup select the Open as Active Markup check box 6 Click OK RESULT 248 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES The consolidated Markup file is saved If you selected Open as Active Markup the consolidated markup opens and is set as the active markup Marking up 2D and 3D Files AutoVue provides a number of markup options that display the same behavior when marking up 2D or 3D files You can add markup entities such as attach ments hyperlinks signoffs and stamps See 2D Specific Markups for information on markup entities that are specific to 2D files See 3D Specific Markups for information on markup entities that are specif
211. esign rules are as follows Clearances Design Rule Type Description The minimum spacing air gaps allowed between two sets of entities in the design These sets can belong to the same type of entity or to different types Electrical Targets certain properties of the nets Manufacturing Targets the physical properties of a particular entity Design Rule Checks For design rule checks that have values you can set the global unit of measure ment The available design rule checks are Type Clearance Design Rule Check Description Minimum Specify the Clearance minimum distance Pad gt Pad between the pad outline and the outline of its drill hole on all physical layers The two outlines geometries are part of the pin pad entity but on different logical layers 118 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES DESIGN VERIFICATION Type Design Rule Check Minimum Clearance Pad gt Trace Description Specify the minimum pad to trace clearance and pads on the same physical layer Only the pad outline is considered Does not take into account traces connected to a pin pad on the same net Minimum Clearance Trace gt Trace Specify the minimum trace to trace clearance on the same physical layer Does not take into account directly connected traces Minimum Clearance Component
212. esssssssssssscecseessssssssseoseesssssnssseseeessesss 32 Viewing Files from Web Client Files Tab ssssssssssseeessssssssseseeeseessssssssseocseessossnsseosreesosssssssesseeeseess 33 Viewing Files from Java Client Attachments Tab sssssssseseeessesssssssssceoseessssssssecceeessssssnseoseeeseesss 33 Viewing Files from Java Client Files Tab ssesssssssssseseeessssssssoosceessossnsssosseecsoesnsssesseecseesssssssseceeee 33 Opening Agile Attachment Files form the Viewer WiNndOW ss ssssssssssesssssssscosseesssssssssosseessesss 34 Comparing Revisions or Versions Of a Fil cessesssessssscsssssscsscssessnssncsssssscssceseesssenccsscescesseaesneess 36 Viewing Design Object StructUres csecssscscsscsesssecsessncssssssscesssessessnsessssscsecsuscsscseceaccssesecesseseesssesses 38 Viewing Document Structured File Types essssssssesssecssccsecssscssceseecssccssesseessecescessecssccsncesscesscesees 39 Using the Version BROWSEI 45 sniauavauiie naman diem aeian as ined ee Nea ons ane 40 Accessing Different File Versions from the Business Object Attachments Tab 42 EJ ELE NSS scans exch R E E A E AA A E 45 Comparing Files in Web Client and Java CliEnt ssss sseeessssssssssescessssssssseseeecseesssssssseoceeesssssssssesseessesss 45 Comparing Files by Search ssssssssssssssesessssssessessnssessnssssssssssssssessessensensesnssseessseeseeseeseeeereereeeeereereereerereereereees 46 Initiating a File Compare by
213. ew and an unlocked view on hand at the same time Collaboration Session The Collaborate menu provides you with a means to initiate a Collaboration Session or join an existing session When you initiate a Collaboration Session a session object is created on the server and you are the Host and Controller of the session The Host owns the Session Markup and is the only one who can save it and open an existing Markup The Host can also invite other users during a session Initiating a Collaboration Session When you initiate a Collaboration Session a session object is created on the server and is maintained for the duration of the Collaboration Session When you initiate a session you become the Host and the Controller of the session TASK 1 Open the file that you want to collaborate on 2 From the Collaborate menu select Start Collaboration Session STEP RESULT The Initiate Session dialog appears In the Session Subject field enter a session name 4 Ifyou want to open a Markup for the Collaboration Session click Browse and browse and select the markup you want to open 5 Select Public if you want the Collaboration Session visible to others who may want to join the session 6 Select Private if you want the Collaboration Session only visible to the participants 7 Ifyou want to set a password for the Collaboration Session enter a Password then enter it again to Confirm ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you selected Priva
214. ext box The Leader Alignment list has the following option for anchor point location with respect to the text box Top Left Top Center Top Right Center Left Center Center Right Bottom Left Bottom Center and Bottom Right Text Box Visibility You can choose to hide the surrounding box for the Leader Text and 3D Text markup entities ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 321 Markups FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES 322 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL Printing With AutoVue you can print and preview files Files can be printed on their own or with associated markups and overlays You can also choose which markup layers to make visible so that they can print With the Batch Print option you can senda list of files to print at the same time When printing a file there are print properties that you can define From the File menu select Print to display the following properties Option Print Description Define the print options See Print Options Margins Define the margin settings See Print Margins Headers Footers Define the headers footers to be included on every page printed See Header Footer Watermark Define the watermark to be included on every page printed See Watermarks Pen Settings Change the thickness assigned to a pen See Assigning Pen Settings Print Options With the Options tab you can define print options for the print
215. f a drawing From the Auto Vue toolbar you can also click Z See Displaying Layers for more information Blocks Select and display a block from a drawing From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click ee See Selecting Blocks for more information XRefs Select the XRefs to display in the drawing See Displaying XRefs for more information Overlays Select an overlay to modify See Adding an Overlay for more information Displaying Layers Use this option to configure the layers to display of the current active file TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Layers ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Layers STEP RESULT The Select the Layers to Display dialog appears listing the layers and layer visibility for the current active file 2 Tosort the list of layers in the dialog click Name to sort alphabetically or numerically or click Status to sort by visibility ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 57 WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES You can modify the visibility of a layer or layers by doing one of the following Deselect select the Status check box beside the layers that you want to hide display Click All On to display all the layers or click All Off to hide all the layers Select a layer from the dialog and then click Toggle to hide display the layer Clic
216. f a markup is saved when Digital Mockup is active the contents of the Digital Mockup including all objects and their orientations are saved 48 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL COMPARING FILES INITIATE COMPARE IN AUTOVUE Selecting a File from Agile Bookmarks To use your Agile Bookmarks to select an attachment file TASK 1 From the File Open dialog click Agile Browse STEP RESULT The DMS File Open dialog appears and displays your Agile Book marks in a tree structure NOTE If you have not defined any Bookmarks in Agile PLM the Agile Browse button does not appear in the File Open dialog Click to expand a bookmark and display its item revisions or its file folder versions Click a revision or version row to highlight the file you want to view Click OK in the DMS File Open dialog The selected file name appears in the File Name field of the File Open dialog Click OK in the File Open dialog RESULT The Viewer opens the selected file or if appropriate adds the selected file to the current analysis function Selecting a File with Agile Search You can use Agile Search to perform a quick search to select an attachment file TASK 1 From the File Open Dialog click Agile Search STEP RESULT The Search dialog appears From the Search dialog define your search with the following options and then click Search Option Description Class Select an object class For example Items
217. f the Collaboration Session a transcript of the Chat Window is saved as a Note entity along with the Markup as the Collaboration Session Markup file The Note entity contains session information such who the Host was who was invited and session time and duration The Chat Window contains these menu options Menu Option Description File Send Message Sends text messages to other users Print Prints the contents of the Chat window Quit Closes the Chat window Edit Copy Copy text from the Chat window Clear Clears all the text in the Chat window Find Text Searches for text in the Chat window Select All Selects the entire text in the Chat window Options Users Displays the users in the Collaboration Session 356 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL REAL TIME COLLABORATION CHAT WINDOW Sending a Message to Selected Users TASK 1 From the Collaborate menu select Show Chat Window ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Collaborate status bar you can also click Show Chat Window STEP RESULT The Chat dialog appears Select Selected users STEP RESULT A list of Users appear in the Chat dialog Under Users select the user or users that you want to send the message to ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one user press the Shift or Control key while selecting In the Send Message to field enter your message Click Send RESULT The private message is sent to the selected
218. file also restores the last saved view state From the Markup Navigation Tree right click the markup entity that you want to view and select Go To NOTE Double clicking on a markup entity from the Markup Navigation tree also has the same result as the Go To feature AutoVue displays the markup page containing the entity If you selected a markup entity that is on another page of the Markup file the page containing that entity will be displayed 306 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP ENTITIES Selecting Markup Entities To select a markup entity click the markup entity s outer edge To select multiple entities press the Shift or Control key while selecting The markup entity or entities are selected You can also select the markup entities from the Markup Navigation Tree To select multiple entities press the Shift or Control key while selecting Moving a Markup Entity In the Markup Navigation Tree or in the workspace select the markup entity or entities that you want to move To select multiple entities press the Shift or Control key while selecting In the workspace click and drag the selected markup entity or entities to anywhere in the workspace Transforming Markup Entities NOTE This menu option is only available for 2D and EDA files AutoVue provides the option to rotate markup entities Rotating a selected Markup Entity This feature is only supported for the Text and St
219. folder object Viewing 3D CAD Assemblies in a Multiple file File Folder from the 9 2 2 x or 9 2 1 x Web Client TASK To view a CAD assembly from Web Client Attachments tab a Go to the Attachment tab of the business object that references the assembly Double click the multiple file attachment row that references the CAD assembly ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Or use the Attachment tab View File s button On the business object Attachments tab click to select the multiple file attachment row Click the View File s button s drop down arrow and select View from the menu STEP RESULT The Select Files window appears NOTE A multiple file attachment row is indicated by a file folder icon in the Filename field followed by the filenames of all the files in the file folder 0 In the Select Files window click the radio button to select the option View all files as an assembly starting from the selected file Click to select the file row of the assembly file that indicates the top or starting file of the assembly Click Finish 136 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES UNDERSTANDING 3D BASICS To view a CAD assembly from Web Client Files tab a Go to the Files tab of a file folder object containing the CAD files for the assembly that you want to view b Click to select the row for the top or starting file of the assembly c Click the View File s button s drop down arrow and sele
220. fy and move objects If no objects are selected then drag to perform an auto zoom same as in View mode ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 27 AUTOVUE BASICS OPENING FILES Accessing Commands with Shortcut Menus AutoVue provides shortcut menus to access the majority of its functions To do so right click with the pointer in the View window to access to the appropriate commands Canceling an Operation in Progress To cancel an operation in progress right click the mouse any where in the AutoVue applet For example if while drawing a box you realize that you would prefer to draw a cloud right click while drawing the box to cancel the operation Opening Files You can open base files and Markup files from the File menu and Markup menu respectively Opening a Local File TASK 1 From the File menu select Open a INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Open File STEP RESULT The File Open dialog appears 2 Browse to locate the file that you want to open 3 Click Open RESULT The file opens in the AutoVue workspace 28 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL AUTOVUE BASICS OPENING FILES Opening a URL You can open a file by specifying the URL to the file TASK 1 From the File menu select Open ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Open File ex STEP RESULT The File Open dialog appears 2 From the left panel click Web
221. g appears and displays the AutoVue version number and build date 2 To view version and build information for components click Version Info 3 To export the version information click Export STEP RESULT The Export dialog appears 4 Navigate and select the directory to which you want to export the list Enter a file name the default name is fverinfo txt 6 Click Save STEP RESULT The list is exported to the specified file ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 17 AUTOVUE BASICS AUTOVUE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE 7 When you are finished viewing the file version information click Close 8 Click OK to exit the About dialog AutoVue Graphical User Interface This section introduces you to the basics of working with AutoVue s graphical user interface GUI The following image displays the AutoVue GUI for a 3D drawing Eas a Model Layout a Oe N 4 a amp 2 ws za Markup Entity Author Last Modified A Page Layer I Untitled2 lt M gt Models Views Bookmarks AutoCad3D dw AutoCAD 2004 2006 118 pg 3 3 146220 bytes 2005 07 06 NOTE This is the default view of AutoVue If you are using a customized AutoVue GUI file the menu items and toolbars may vary 18 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL AUTOVUE BASICS AUTOVUE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE PinMe Icon The PinMe feature allows you to keep the current AutoVue window open when opening additional attach
222. g it on behalf of the U S Govern ment the following notice is applicable U S GOVERNMENT RIGHTS Programs software databases and related documentation and technical data delivered to U S Government customers are com mercial computer software or commercial technical data pursuant to the applicable Federal Acquisition Regulation and agency specific supplemental regulations As such the use duplication disclosure modification and adaptation shall be subject to the restrictions and license terms set forth in the applicable Government contract and to the extent applicable by the terms of the Gov ernment contract the additional rights set forth in FAR 52 227 19 Commercial Computer Software License December 2007 Oracle USA Inc 500 Oracle Parkway Redwood City CA 94065 This software is developed for general use in a variety of information management applications It is not developed or intended for use in any inherently dangerous applications including applications which may create a risk of personal injury If you use this soft ware in dangerous applications then you shall be responsible to take all appropriate fail safe backup redundancy and other mea sures to ensure the safe use of this software Oracle Corporation and its affiliates disclaim any liability for any damages caused by use of this software in dangerous applications This software and documentation may provide access to or information on content products and servi
223. ge Area Option Description Select the page area to print Extents Print the extent of the document Displayed Print the area displayed in the View window Option is always enabled Limits Prints the file limits instead of extents Option is disabled when Current is selected for Document Pages NOTE This option is only available for AutoCAD drawings that have the limits defined Selected This option is grayed out by default To enable click Select and then select a print range The Selected option is now enabled Native settings from file This option only applies to Excel files When selected Auto Vue uses Excel s print settings that are saved in the excel document The following print settings are supported Page Orientation Scaling Paper Size Print Areas Page Breaks Row and Column headers Grid lines Left Right Top Bottom margins Force to Black Force all colors to grayscale Output a single page Limits output to a single page when the scaling options selected causes a single page to span over several pages NOTE This option is only enabled when Scale of Factor is selected in the Scaling section Skip Blank Pages This option omits blank pages when printing Print Notes When in Markup mode select this option to print the Note markups of the current file NOTE This option is only available when in Markup mode Print One Note Per Page When in Markup mode sel
224. ght click outside the text area to complete the modification STEP RESULT The text appears on the drawing and in the Markup Navigation Tree To move the text box click and drag it Click and drag the frame handles of the text box to enlarge it ADDITIONALINFORMATION To edit the text double click the text box in the tree or in the workspace Hiding the box surrounding the text TASK 1 Select the text box entity 2 From the Markup menu select Format and then select Markup Entity Attributes STEP RESULT The Markup Entity Properties dialog appears From the Text Box Visibility list select OFF 4 Click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To undo repeat steps 1 through 4 except selectON STEP RESULT The dialog closes and the text box is hidden ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 291 MARKUPS ADDING A NOTE Adding a Note Printing a Note You can attach longer comments as a markup sticky note on the drawing A note displays in the workspace as a standard size graphical symbol 3 Each note is labelled as Note lt n gt where n represents the numerical order of occur rence of the note for example the first note is labelled as Note1 To read the note double click the entity to open it or move the mouse over the entity to display the tooltip NOTE When creating multiple Note entities it is possible to group the entities Once the Note entities are grouped clicking on the group opens the last Note created
225. hanged By User Adding New Users to a Session You can also invite users that are not currently online using the Add New button on the Initiate Session dialog TASK 1 2 In the Initiate Session dialog click Add New STEP RESULT The Add User dialog appears Enter Username 348 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL REAL TIME COLLABORATION COLLABORATION SESSION Select Observer if you want to designate the user as an Observer 4 Select a Layer Color from the list or select Let user choose if you want the user to choose their own color 5 Click OK RESULT The new user is added to the Invited list in the Initiate Session dialog NOTE To add more than one user repeat steps 1 to 5 Opening a Markup While Initiating a Session TASK 1 oN OM From the Collaborate menu select Start Collaboration Session STEP RESULT The Initiate Session dialog appears Click Browse STEP RESULT The Markup Files dialog appears In the Select Markup File s list select the check box beside the Markup that you want to open To import a Markup file click Import STEP RESULT The Select markup file to import dialog appears Locate the file that you want to open Click Open Click OK in the Markup Files dialog In the Initiate Session dialog select Session Markup if you want to open a Session Markup and keep the layer colors and markup entities from the Collaboration Session Click OK RESULT The sel
226. hat you can view are Property Tab Description File Properties Information specific to the current active file such as filename file size date of creation file type number of pages and x y amp z dimensions It also indicates if the file is loaded from a streaming file Resource Resources specific to the current active file such as text font shape Information file line style and external reference files Native Properties Custom properties for file types such as last person who saved the file signature verification and author comments DMS If AutoVue is integrated with a backend DMS PLM ERP system a DMS tab appears that lists file attributes retrieved from the backend system NOTE The Properties dialog varies for each file format that is open As a result some property tabs may be absent when viewing a file Viewing File Properties To view file properties TASK 1 From the File menu select Properties STEP RESULT The Properties dialog appears To view the file properties click the File Properties tab STEP RESULT The File Properties tab displays the file name file size date last modified file type and number of pages the document contains To view resource information click the Resource Information tab STEP RESULT All included resources are listed in the Resource Information tab If a resource that is required to fully display the file is missing it is listed with the M
227. he Actions menu STEP RESULT The Versions dialog appears b On the version row for which you want to view redlines click the Has been redlined icon for versions 9 2 2 x and 9 2 1 x for version 9 3 x ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you need to determine which file folder version is associated with the change order redlines refer to the change order History tab e To view the redlines of previous versions in Java Client a On the Attachments tab of the pending revision select the row you want to view b Click Show Versions ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 233 MARKUPS GUIDELINES FOR MARKING UP OR REDLINING ATTACHMENTS STEP RESULT The Versions dialog appears c On the version row for which you want to view redlines double click Has been redlined ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you do not replace the attachment file on the pending revision item prior to the change order release you can access the redlines only from the released revision of the item The following 234 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS GUIDELINES FOR MARKING UP OR REDLINING ATTACHMENTS diagram shows an example of the change order attachment redlining process See also Product Collaboration User Guide and Getting Started with Agile PLM User Guide The following is an example of the change order attachment redlining process 1 Put item 333 on the Affected Items tab of ECO_045 ECO_045 not released item 333 B ECO_012 Affected Items
228. he analysis functionality you can measure entities compare two files or view drawing information These options are available under the Analysis menu The following table lists all the options from the Analysis menu Measure Menu Sub Menu Description Measure the distance area angle and arc of an entity From the Auto Vue toolbar you can also click ia See also Measuring in 2D Files for more information Compare Compare two files See Comparing 2D Files for more information 66 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES Menu Sub Menu Description Show Drawing Information Select Single Entity Displays information for the selected entity See also Viewing Details of a Single Entity for more information List block attributes and tags See also Viewing Tags Attributes for more information List Tags Attributes View information of a set of entities See also Viewing Information for a Set of Entitiesfor more information Entity Information Comparing 2D Files AutoVue provides the ability to visually compare two files and display color coded comparative data Generally when comparing two files you should first open the newer version of the document and then compare it with the older version When comparing files AutoVue displays three windows e The right window displays the
229. he drawing ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To make another measurement click Reset 8 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 265 MARKUPS 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Measuring Cumulative Distance Use the Cumulative Distance option to measure the distance along a path of multi faceted adjoining points TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Distance ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Measurement Entities dialog appears From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance am 2 From the Measured Distance Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance Select Cumulative 4 Click a point on the drawing to define the starting point Continue clicking points along the path that you want to measure STEP RESULT Each point is joined by a line 6 Right click to complete the measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To make another measurement click Reset STEP RESULT The measured line path cumulated measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The cumu lated measured distance Delta X and Delta Y appear in the Measurement Entities dialog 7 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Calibrating Distance Calibrate the distance measurement TASK 1 Measure distance between two points or measure cumulative distance 2 From the Distance tab click Ca
230. he following Option Description All physical layers Click the All column header One physical layer Select the check box to the left of the layer name You can also select a layer and click Visibility ej One entity type for all Click the column header For example click the Trace column physical layers header to show or hide all trace entities of all physical layers One entity type for one Click a specific check box physical layer Click Apply to view the changes in the workspace You can now save your changes as a user defined layer set Click Close to close the Layers dialog ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Check boxes for physical layers can have four states checked unchecked gray checked and gray unchecked Check boxes that are checked and gray indicate that the entities of a physical layer are neither all visible nor all hidden Gray unchecked check boxes that you cannot select indicate that there is no entity of that type for that layer ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 99 WORKING WITH EDA FILES LAYERS Modifying Visibility for Logical Layers Use the Layers dialog to hide or display specific logical layers in the workspace TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Layers ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Layers STEP RESULT The Layers dialog opens 2 Ifthe Logical Layers section is not open click Expand 3 I
231. heck box and then select the plane from the list 5 From the Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the angle 6 Click two points on the model to define the angle STEP RESULT Angle arms appear with an arc connecting them 7 Click again to complete the measurement STEP RESULT The angle is highlighted and the value of the angle measurement appears in the dialog 8 To take another measurement click Reset Measuring an Arc Use the Arc option to measure the precise radius length and angles of any arc on the model You can also calculate the center point location TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure a STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears 2 Click the Arc tab 194 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES MEASURING IN 3D FILES Select Arc Entity if you want to measure a predefined arc STEP RESULT All arc and circles are highlighted on the model Snapping modes are disabled Select From 3 Points if you want to measure the arc between three points STEP RESULT Snapping modes are enabled Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring From the Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the arc distance If you selected From 3 Points click three points to define the arc STEP RESULT The points are joined by an arc The measurements for center po
232. hen Compare STEP RESULT The File Open dialog appears 4 Select the Document Versions checkbox From the drop down menu select another file folder version of the file for comparison 6 Click OK STEP RESULT AutoVue opens the selected version in a second window A third window displays the differences between the two files 7 To compare another file version select File and then Exit Compare 8 Repeat steps 3 through 6 to select another file folder version ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 37 AUTOVUE BASICS OPENING AGILE ATTACHMENT FILES Viewing Design Object Structures When you open a CAD assembly file in a Design object Agile PLM automati cally opens the subordinate CAD part files in AutoVue allowing you to view the entire CAD design Agile PLM uses the assembly structure as defined in the Structure tab of the Design object and the Structure tabs of its child Design objects NOTE Viewing structured data in a Design data model class object relies on the Structure tab to resolve related objects in the structure This process is seamless and requires no action by the user other than initiating the view function for the assembly file The following list provides details on how Agile PLM extracts CAD Structure files from the Design object and its Structure table for CAD design viewing e The file type of the Design objects selected file must be designated as a CAD Structure file type on the File Association ta
233. hen select Reset Selected To restore the default state for the whole model select Reset All 168 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES TRANSFORMING A 3D MODEL Transforming a 3D Model Using the illustrated transformation buttons or by entering X Y or Z values you can rotate scale or translate a model or any selection of model parts From the Manipulate menu select Transform and then select Define The Transformation dialog appears as follows Transformation Ready Rotate Degree Translation imm X 0 J0 Z 0 Mirror Scale vz O x O xY E Factor 1 Caso NOTE From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Transform ic In the Transformation dialog the buttons on the left correspond to a rotational movement along the three axes and the buttons on the right correspond to a translational movement along the three axes and the scaling up and down ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 169 WORKING WITH 3D FILES TRANSFORMING A 3D MODEL Transforming a Model Using Illustration Buttons TASK 1 po o NADM 11 From the Manipulate menu select Transform and then select Define ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also select Trans form amp STEP RESULT The Transformation dialog appears Select the model part or parts that you want to rotate translate or scale ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one model part
234. highlighted by a line The measured line path measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The X Y and Z coordinates for Position 1 and X Y and Z coordinates for Position 2 appear in the Measurement Entities dialog 9 Click and drag the value box anywhere on the markup 10 To resize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement 11 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Measuring Vertex Coordinates The Vertex Coordinates option provides the coordinates of vertices on the model TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity Measurement and then Vertex Coordinate ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Vertex Coordinate 22 STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears All vertices on the model are highlighted 302 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS 3D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Adding Text Scroll over the vertex whose coordinates you want to add to the markup STEP RESULT The X Y and Z coordinates appear in a tooltip Click the vertex STEP RESULT The X Y an Z coordinates and unit appear a value box entity on the current active markup layer and in the Measurement Entities dialog Click and drag the value box anywhere on the markup ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement STEP RESULT Cli
235. hment ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ECO markups are saved against and associated with the pending revision of the item If the ECO is released without first replacing the file the markups appear against the released revision of the item e To ad hoc markup or redline an attachment file from a File Folder object in the Web Client a On the Files tab of a file folder object select one or more rows and click Redline this button appears only when markups are allowed Add your markups to the attachment ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Ad hoc markups are saved against and associ ated with the version of the file folder object ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 231 Markups GUIDELINES FOR MARKING UP OR REDLINING ATTACHMENTS Java Client ECO Markups TASK e To markup or redline an attachment file from an ECO in the Java Client a Add an item with an attachment to the Affected Items tab of an unre leased ECO The item now has a pending revision associated with the unreleased ECO ADDITIONAL INFORMATION When redlining an attachment through an ECO the pending revision attachment Folder Version must be set to a specific version number If the Folder Version is set to LATEST x you will not be able to create redline markups However you can edit the Folder Version on the Attachments tab of the pending revision so that it refers to a specific Folder Version For example if the pending revision of the item refers to Folder Versi
236. ialog 13 Click Reset to take another measurement 14 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Angle in non Vector Files Use the Angle option to measure the angle between points on a drawing TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure oe INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure m STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears displaying the measurement options 2 Click the Angle tab Select a unit of measurement from the Units list 4 Click points on the drawing to define the angle you want to measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement STEP RESULT Angle arms appear with an arc connecting them The angle measurement appears in the Angle tab 5 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog 78 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 2D FILES MEASURING IN 2D FILES Angle in Vector Files Use the Angle option to measure the angle between points on a drawing TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure G ional INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears displaying the measurement options 2 Click the Angle tab 3 From the Angle Definition section select one of the following From 3 Points Measure the angle between three points Between 2 Lines Measure the angle between two non parallel lines 4 Select the snapping modes that you want to use
237. ialog appears 2 Select From 3 Points if you want to measure the angle between three points Snapping modes are displayed 3 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select all snapping modes click All On To deselect all snapping modes click All Off 4 Select Between 2 lines if you want to measure the angle between two lines 5 From the Measured Angle Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the angle 6 Ifyou selected From 3 Points click three points to define the angle If you selected Between 2 Lines click two lines to define the angle STEP RESULT Angle arms appear with an arc connecting them 8 Right click to complete the measurement STEP RESULT The measured line path measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measured angle appears in the Measurement Entities dialog 9 To change the size of the arc click and drag the it to the desired size 10 To move the value box click and drag it to anywhere on the drawing 11 To resize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement 12 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 287 MARKUPS CREATING EDA MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES Measuring an Arc Use the Arc option to define an arc in the drawing and measure its radius
238. ic to 3D files NOTE When you are creating a markup entity you can press the Escape key to cancel the action The following tables lists common markup entities for 2D and 3D files Option Attachment Description Add an attachment entity to the markup From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Attachment X See Adding an Attachment Hyperlink Attaches a hyperlink as a markup From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Hyperlink Yo See Adding a Hyperlink Signoff Creates an approval stamp containing information about the markup author date and time of creation From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Signoff A See Adding Signoff Entities Symbol Adds a symbol markup to the document From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Symbol i See Adding a Symbol ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 249 Markups MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES Adding an Attachment In AutoVue you can attach a file of any type for example text audio or video as a markup entity The attachment is embedded into the markup entity and displays as an icon the display TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Attach ment ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Attachment X 2 Click on the drawing where you want to add an attachment STEP RESULT The Attach Filedialog appears
239. ick Close to close the Measurement dialog ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 299 MARKUPS 3D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Measuring an Arc Use the Arc option to measure the precise radius length and angles of any arc on the model It also calculates the center point location TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity Measurement and then Arc ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Arc ce STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 2 Select Arc Entity if you want to measure a predefined arc STEP RESULT All arc and circles are highlighted on the model Snapping modes are disabled 3 Select From 3 Points if you want to measure the arc between three points Snapping modes are displayed 4 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring STEP RESULT All entities of the selected entity types are highlighted on the model 5 From the Dist Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the arc distance 6 From the Angles Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the angle 7 Ifyou selected From 3 Points click three points to define the arc STEP RESULT The points are joined by an arc 8 Ifyou selected Arc Entity click the edge of an arc STEP RESULT The arc is highlighted 9 Click to complete the measurement STEP RESULT The measured line path measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup l
240. ides the rest of the model Changing Model Color You can change the color of a specific model part or selected model parts TASK 1 Select the model or model parts whose color you want to change ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If no part is selected the change is applied to the entire model 2 From the Manipulate menu select Visual Effects and then select Color ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Color STEP RESULT The Color dialog appears Select the desired color 4 Click Apply RESULT The selected part or parts change to the selected color NOTE To set the model color to its default color repeat steps 1 to 2 and click Reset in the Color dialog Adjusting the Transparency You can adjust the degree of transparency of a model This function applies to shaded and shaded wire models as well as reflective and reflective wire TASK 1 Select the model or model parts whose transparency you want to adjust 2 From the Manipulate menu select Visual Effects and then select Transparency ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Trans parency STEP RESULT The Set Transparency dialog appears 3 To adjust the transparency move the slider left or right ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 151 WORKING WITH 3D FILES LIGHT SETTINGS 4 Select Apply Dynamically if you want the transparency to simultane ously change with the movement of the slider
241. ieis 118 SS VUE aE aE A E A A E I A 118 Veringa DeSigNe a a tin kek E R EAS 122 Exporting the Design Verification Results essessssssssseeeseessssssssseoseessossnsssesseeeseessnsssssseeseesressss 123 Searching Using Entity Searls csaciiancnaasnanieeanaier A A RR AS 124 Performing an Entity Type based Search sssssssssssecseecsscssessscssccsscsssecssccssesseecssceseesueceseeseeses 125 Performing an Attribute based Search nu ccsscsessssssssnssscssscseesnscsessnssscssscssessseseessscsessnseaceaseseesneess 126 Meastiring in EDA FileSi casa ancsacwiaravatiaanncintnnandedaaindioeaiienonetinadameouane 127 EEDA Snapping VOSS sec cscwscacccv sensuous cuwensca cvs oceesasvvapeastacseteraovosssinassbospsoansesvscal chiescsonssuseoniamenass 127 Measuring DISTANCE rsio A arma RANT ates 129 Calibrating SUING sarno aan a EnA E E E ELR ESTs 129 Measuring Minimum DistanCe esssessssesssssesssseessseeessseeessseessseesesessessseosssesssseeosseessseeessseeessseeesssees 130 Measuring Afel aroni anueiai AAEE RA NATA RR 131 PUN AS UIP IIACH AIA PAIGE Ys cas cecssaessvstedevs ceasooacesexsusvgevesvunecoustrasevasousuonsvssonscisteugieyieloie cus ESR Macsseoneesuareens 132 Measuring aN ANG ieccsdecsa ten eid ease aiiin osin iriiria i iieii iaiia e iieii 133 AUT AT IIA ANAT afc cst c tansy ala dassaasde AERE diese assem cod as AA NARAS 134 Working With 3D PANS cross csssscaceieecoisncsessacecduvossta vend didve dea vn rasbsasva coeaacbev hadia
242. ies To remove a markup entity from the filter deselect the associated check box In the Markup Navigation Tree a filter icon appears in the Markup Entity column header To display markups based on when they were last modified click the Last Modified tab From the list select one of the following options Option Description Anytime Displays all markup entities ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 227 MARKUPS AD Hoc MARKUPS Option Description Before Displays all markup entities modified before the selected date After Displays all markup entities modified after the selected date On Displays all markup entities modified on the selected date Between Displays all markup entities modified between the selected dates In the Markup Navigation Tree a filter icon appears in the Last Modified column header To display markups by page location click the Page tab and select one of the following Option Description All pages Displays markup entities on all the pages Current page Displays markup entities on the currently selected page Page range Displays the markup entities on the selected page range To display markups by layers click the Layer tab and select the check box next to the layer or layers To remove a layer from the filter deselect the associated check box In the Markup Navigation Tree a filter icon appears in the Layer column header NO
243. ies of selected layers of different Markup files Create measurement markup entities that can be moved or resized Note that measurements made in Markup mode have up to a 1 margin of error Navigate markups through a hierarchy tree view markup properties and sort the tree according to each property View markup layers individually or in combination When in Markup mode you can press Shift Left Mouse button to select multiple markups entities in order to drag or copy and paste to a new loca tion Press Esc at any point to cancel the markup creation Markup Navigation Tree When you are in Markup mode a Markup Navigation Tree appears below the workspace If the tree does not appear from the Options menu select Show Panel and then select Markup Panel Markups wa Markup Entity Author LastModified A Page Layer Y Untitled2 I Text JohnDoe 04 09 2008 11 51 06 4M 1 0 H Leader JohnDoe 04 09 2008 11 51 08 AM 1 0 bnb JohnDoe 04 09 2008 11 51 22 4M 1 0 Highlight JohnDoe 04 09 2008 11 51 24 4M 1 0 CO Box JohnDoe 04 09 2008 11 51 294M 1 0 A Line JohnDoe 04 09 2008 11 51 31 AM 1 0 The tree displays a hierarchy of markups or comments created by users You can navigate through the markups A set of properties is generated for each markup You can sort the markups in the tree according to each property by clicking the column headers These properties are Property Description Markup Entity Type of markup entity c
244. ify part of an ID number as a search criteria Search Attachment Content Set this parameter to Yes to search the contents of the attachment files as well 3 In the Search Results table click the next to the object number to expand the list of attachment files for that object 4 Click a revision row or a version row to select the file you want to view Click Load File STEP RESULT The selected file name appears in the File Name field of the File Open dialog 6 Click OK in the File Open dialog RESULT The Viewer opens the selected file or if appropriate adds the selected file to the current analysis function Adding an Overlay When working with 2D files you can overlay other files over the current active file You can also adjust an overlay move an overlay and scale an overlay by defining the X and Y coordinates and the scaling factor ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 63 WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES When working with a raster file it should be used as the base file because raster formats are opaque and would hide files underneath them TASK 1 Open the file that you want to use as the base file for the overlay 2 From the File menu select Import File as Overlay STEP RESULT The Overlays dialog appears 3 Click Add File STEP RESULT The Please Select an Overlay File dialog appears 4 Select a file to overlay and then click Open To add anothe
245. ify the coordinates XOffset and YOffset or enter a scaling factor for the second file TASK 1 While in Compare mode from the View menu select Align and Scale STEP RESULT The Align and Scale dialog appears 2 Select one of the following options Option Description Automatic AutoVue selects the best fit for the two files Select Points to Align Select snapping points to align to Select Points to Align Select snapping points to align and scale to and Scale Custom You can enter a scale factor as well as X and Y offset values XOffset and YOffset are relative to the base drawing and all options are displayed at their current values 3 Click Apply STEP RESULT The align and scale modifications are applied to the file in the second window 4 Click OK to the close the Align and Scale dialog Drawing Information The Drawing Information option is only available with AutoCAD and MicroS tation drawings and is accessed from the Analysis menu The Drawing Infor mation options available are Select Single Entity List Tags Attributes and Entity Information ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 69 WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES Viewing Details of a Single Entity The Select Single Entity option allows you to view information of a single entity TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Show Drawing Information and then select Select Single Entity Click the
246. ight Option Description Vertex Set the color for vertices when highlighted during measurement and markup Face Set the color for faces when highlighted during measurement and markup Edge Set the color for edges when highlighted during measurement and markup Configuring Background With the Background options you can select a gradient or an image to display in the background From the Configuration tree expand 3D and then select Background The Background Gradient and Background Images options appear 214 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR 3D FILES For the Background Gradient option Select either Plain Directional Gradient or Radial Gradient The background is previewed to the rights of the options For the Background Images option This feature adds a single or multiple background images to the workspace TASK 1 Click Add STEP RESULT The Background Image dialog appears 2 Click on the ellipses to the right of the Image File field to browse to the image file ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can only select bmp jpeg or imgfiles 3 From the Stretch Type list select whether to leave the image as is Stretch to fill Zoom to fit or Zoom to fill 4 From the Position in the Background list select where to position the image and then click OK To add multiple background images repeat steps 1 through 4 6 You can change the order of the background imag
247. ile comparison features refer to the Comparing 2D Files on page 67 Comparing a PCB with Artwork on page 115 and Comparing 3D Files on page 176 Note that Markups redlines and comparing Office formats are not supported in AutoVue Compare mode Files in Web Client and Java Client You can select and compare two files from a single file folder Files tab or a single business object Attachments tab To initiate comparing files TASK 1 Display the Attachments tab or the Files tab 2 Select the files you want to compare and then select one of the following For Web Client select View and then Compare For Java Client select View File s and then Compare RESULT The file and the comparison results display in a single viewer window ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 45 COMPARING FILES COMPARING FILES BY SEARCH Comparing Files by Search The Compare Files by Search attribute allows you to Compare files from different released revisions of an item Compare files from different file folder versions Select any file on any business object Attachments tab or on any file folder Files tab and then search for a file to use for comparison Depending on your search you can select a business object and then select a file from the list of related files for that object Or if you have the appropriate priv ileges you can search for file folder objects and then select a file from the list of relate
248. ill of material 180 Bookmarks tab 22 88 140 comparing files 176 177 178 coverting 338 display attributes 149 color 151 transparency 151 visibility 150 entity properties 159 entity search 182 184 attribute based search 185 save results 188 explode 174 175 options 174 save 175 files 135 global axes 140 light setting 152 ambient 152 directional 153 new light source 153 properties 154 remove light source 155 manipulate mode 166 panning model 167 rotating model 167 scaling model 168 manipulating views 147 markup entities 294 markup measure entities create 294 markups 249 293 measuring 189 angle 194 arc 194 calibrating arc 81 134 195 269 281 289 301 calibrating distance 76 129 192 266 277 285 298 distance 191 edge length 196 face surface 197 369 minimum distance 193 snapping modes 189 295 vertex coordinates 196 mockups 146 delete 146 Model Tree 143 144 145 hiding 145 XRefs 144 Models tab 24 138 PMI entities 163 recentering 142 143 entity reference 142 render modes 149 150 sectioning 172 cut options 172 options 172 section plane 173 selecting model parts 141 text markup 303 transformation 169 buttons 170 reset 170 setting values 171 Views tab 25 139 3D dynamic rendering 210 3D Model Tree 24 138 3D rendering 210 3D views 155 camera view 155 default view 155 layers 158 native views 156 perspective 157 user defined view 156 delete 157 view points 158 A About dialog versio
249. imensional box Click and hold the mouse button on the arrow at the end of the axis that you want to pan Drag the mouse to where you want to move the part or parts To exit Manipulate mode click Manipulate 2 or from the Manipu late menu select Manipulate ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To restore the default state of a part of the model from the Manipulate menu selectTransform and then select Reset Selected To restore the default state for the whole model select Reset All Rotating a Model Along the X Y and Z Axis TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Manipulate ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Manip ulate ode STEP RESULT You are now in Manipulate mode Select the model part or parts that you want to rotate ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one part press the Shift or Control key when selecting STEP RESULT A model size representation of the Global Axes appears through the model part or parts and are enclosed by a three dimensional box Click and hold the mouse button on the sphere at the end of the axis you want to rotate ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The initial mouse movement determines which of the two axes will mark the site of rotation If the axis you selected does not rotate ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 167 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MANIPULATING A 3D MODEL around the right axis for the rotation that you want to make click the sphere again and move
250. ined Views and then select Add View ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also right click in the workspace and select Views then selectUser Defined Views and then select Add View STEP RESULT The Add User Defined View dialog appears 156 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES 3D VIEWS 3 Enter a view name for the view that you want to define 4 Click OK to close the Add User Defined View dialog RESULT To see the view you defined click the Views tab and select it from the User Defined Views tree or select Views select User Defined Views NOTE You can also alternate between User Defined Views and Standard Views without affecting your personalized views Deleting a User Defined View TASK 1 Under the User Defined Views tree select the view that you want to delete then right click and select Delete STEP RESULT A confirmation prompt appears 2 Click Yes RESULT The view disappears from the tree Displaying the Perspective Projection of a 3D Model The Perspective option shows objects in three dimensions with distances planes and curved surfaces adjusted to give a sense of depth that reflects the desired perspective to the eye NOTE You can use the Perspective option in any of the 3D Views since it is a projection mode rather than a view point From the Manipulate menu select Visual Effects and then select Perspective The depth of the model changes ORACLE AUTOVU
251. ineering drafts If a plus sign appears to the left of a bookmark click it to expand and view the lower bookmark levels Ifa minus sign appears to the left of the bookmark click it to collapse the lower bookmark levels To go to a destination specified by a bookmark click the bookmark text or the page icon located to the left of the bookmark text Components Tab NOTE The Components tab displays only for the EDA pages of a drawing The Components tab lists component instances and the associated pins The top portion of the tab lists all the instances of the currently displayed page of the drawing The lower portion of the tab lists the associated pins for selected instances 22 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL AUTOVUE Basics AUTOVUE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE Nets Tab When you select a component it appears highlighted on the drawing To select more than one component press the Shift or Control key while selecting All the selected components and their associated pins are highlighted Components wi Components C345 CAP 0402 2 C344 CAP 0402 1 C343 CAP 0402 1 C342 CAP 0402 1 C360 CAP 0402 1 lt Component Pins Name Net Pin U C341 1 3 3VDC UNSF C341 2 GND UNSF aa gt Components Nets Bookmarks NOTE The Nets tab displays only for EDA drawings The Nets tab lists nets and associated net nodes pins connected to a net The top portion of the tab lists all the nets of the drawing s cur
252. ing drafts If a plus sign appears to the left of a bookmark click it to expand and view the lower bookmark levels Ifa minus sign appears to the left of the bookmark click it to collapse the lower bookmark levels To go to a destination specified by a bookmark click the bookmark text or the page icon located to the left of the bookmark text Global Axes By default there is a three axis representation in the lower left corner of the workspace The X axis is red the Y axis is green and the Z axis is blue When transforming a model or defining a viewpoint all operations are applied with respect to these axes 140 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES SELECTING MODEL PARTS Selecting Model Parts You can select model parts from the Model Tree or from the workspace to high light them in the Model Tree and on the model You can also select a model part and have all its identical parts appear highlighted on the model and in the Model Tree You can also configure the Selection Highlight Select Model Parts from the Workspace TASK 1 Select a part or parts on the model in the workspace ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one model part press the Shift or Control key while selecting 2 To select the parent entities of a selected part press the Shift key and select the part again STEP RESULT A pop up appears listing the parent entities of the selected part Select an entity from the pop up l
253. initiate redlining select the attachment row you want to redline and click Redline TASK To markup or redline an attachment file from an ECO in the Web Client a If you have not already done so add an item with an attachment to the Affected Items tab of an unreleased ECO The item now has a pending revision associated with the unreleased ECO ADDITIONAL INFORMATION When redlining an attachment through an ECO the pending revision attachment Folder Version must be set to a specific version number if the Folder Version is set to LATEST x you will not be able to create redline markups However you can edit the Folder Version on the Attachments tab of the pending revision so that it refers to a specific Folder Version For example if the pending revision of the item refers to Folder Version LATEST 7 of the file folder select that row on the Attachments tab double click the Versions field to edit it and then select 7 Click Save to complete the edit process You can now create redline markups for that attachment On the Affected Items tab in the redline Attachment tab select the row and click Redline On the Affected Items tab select the row of the Item you want to redline The redline tabs for the selected item appear in the lower section of the Affected Items tab On the Redline Attachments tab select one or more rows and click Redline this button is only active when markups are allowed Add your markups to the attac
254. int coordinates radius diameter arc length start and end of angle and sweep appear in the Measurement dialog If you selected Arc Entity click the edge of the arc that you want to measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To take another measurement click Reset STEP RESULT The arc is highlighted The measurements for center point coordi nates radius ratio arc length start and end of angle and sweep appear in the Measurement dialog Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Calibrating an Arc TASK 1 2 Measure an arc in the drawing From the Arc tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Radius Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance From the Units list select a unit of measurement to which you want to calibrate the distance Click Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate to a value Click Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate by a factor Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration results appear in the Arc tab Click Close to close the Measurement dialog ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 195 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MEASURING IN 3D FILES Measuring Vertex Coordinates The Vertex Coordinates option provides the coordinates of vertices on the model TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure 3 STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears 2 Click the Vertex tab
255. ion Smooth Shading Description Set by default Turning this option off renders curved surfaces of shaded models as a series of flat surfaces The level of detail is thus reduced but render speed is increased Only affects shaded models Back Face Removal If selected instructs Auto Vue not to render the back faces of the model being displayed This increases the render speed but the model appears less realistic while in motion Only affects shaded models Tristrip If selected enable disable tristripping of mesh data for display Dynamic Rendering The Dynamic Rendering options let you select the rendering mode for a model in motion The options you can select are 210 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR 3D FILES Menu Option Fast Frame Description Model spins or rotates at a fast rate The level of detail is reduced which enables faster rendering when the model is in motion Wire Frame Model is displayed as wire framed during rotation or spinning Flat Shading Smooth shading is not performed on curved surfaces while the model is in motion Wire Polygons Render the model in wire polygon mode while in motion Vertex Cloud Model is displayed as a skeleton of vertices when in motion Bounding Box Model parts are enclosed by bounding boxes when the model is in motion Current Render Mode Model
256. ion see the following documents in the Oracle AutoVue documentation library Installation and Configuration Guide Viewing Configuration Guide Client Server Deployment Security Guide Release Notes Supported Formats List Product Variations Feature Matrix ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 13 PREFACE CONVENTIONS Conventions The following text conventions are used in this document Convention Meaning boldface Boldface type indicates graphical user interface elements associated with an action or terms defined in text or glossary italic Italic type indicates book titles emphasis or placeholder variables for which you supply particular values monospace Monospace type indicates commands within a paragraph URLs code in examples text that appears on the screen or text that you enter 14 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL Introduction Oracle s AutoVue suite of enterprise visualization solutions provides native document viewing markup and real time collaboration capabilities that enable Web based document review on hundreds of native document types including 2D 3D CAD EDA Office and graphic formats AutoVue enterprise visualiza tion solutions address the challenge of accessing reviewing and collaborating on documents both internally and with globally dispersed teams and partners in a secure and reliable manner without compromising security or precision Improved team productivity reduc
257. iple occurrences of a selected component do the following a From the Navigation Panel select a component in one file that has multiple component occurrences in the other file b From the dialog of the file with multiple component occurrences select one of the components from the Occurrences list or click Next or Previous to switch between component occurrences Chapter 6 scm Scope Automatic Type Occurrences Counter NET19 11 Select any entity in the schematic drawing RESULT The same entity is highlighted in the PCB design Cross Probing Between 2D and 3D Views of the Same File The Cross Probe option lets you select entities to highlight in the 2D and 3D views of the same file TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Cross Probe ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Cross Probe 5 STEP RESULT The Cross Probe dialog appears 2 Click Add File In the Open dialog that appears select the same file then click Open 4 Inthe Cross Probe dialog click OK STEP RESULT The file appears in a new AutoVue window The views that display in each window depend on the contents of file you are cross probing 5 If the file does not contain a schematic one window shows the 2 dimensional view of the PCB and the other shows the 3 dimensional view of the PCB 6 Ifthe file contains a schematic as well as a PCB the schematic view displays in one window and the 2D PCB view
258. is rendered in the same mode whether moving or static Frame Rate The Frame Rate slider lets you define the frame rate for rotating and dynamic zooming on 3D files Drag the slider to specify the frame rate Drag the slider to the left for a lower frame rate and to the right for a higher frame rate A higher frame rate results in a lower resolution Optimized Rendering Select the Enable Optimized Rendering option to accelerate the rendering time of drawings Note that NOTE You must restart your Auto Vue client after selecting or deselecting this option to apply the setting Model The Model configuration options let you control the streaming method the dynamic load mesh resolution and the visibility of model parts ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 211 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR 3D FILES Loading From the Category tree expand 3D and then select Model to load the Loading Dynamic Load Mesh Resolution Initial Visibility and PMI Initial Visibility options Control the streaming method with the Dynamic Loader option When the option is selected AutoVue loads enough detail to display an accurate visual representation of the model The data is loaded based on the level of detail that is necessary at that point in time When the option is deselected AutoVue requests data in 10 chunks until it reaches full resolution for the file You would see the model initially at coarse resolution bu
259. isely identify the location of the anchor point and whether the associated entities are visible or hidden Nesting Markup Entities You can add a Note or Hyperlink markup entity as a nested child to other markup entites TASK 1 Add a markup entity to a file for example a Box entity 2 From the workspace or Markup Tree select the Box entity ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 305 MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP ENTITIES 3 From the Markup menu select Note or Hyperlink ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Note or Hyperlink Ye RESULT In the Markup Tree the selected markup entity appears as a child of the Box parent entity Working with Markup Entities With AutoVue you can assign a markup entity its own color the same color as the current active layer or a custom color You also have the option of grouping markup entities When you group markup entities you can manage the group as you would a single entity In Markup mode there are several options for modifying an entity You can apply these options to selected pre existing entities or to new entities that you add NOTE You can edit certain markup entities after they have been created To do so in the Markup Navigation Tree right click the markup entity and then select Edit Go To a Markup Entity The Go To feature restores the view state to when an entity was first created Opening an existing Markup
260. issing Resource icon 3 If a resource is found it appears with the Found Resource icon amp If a required resource is missing and AutoVue substitutes it ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 31 AUTOVUE BASICS OPENING AGILE ATTACHMENT FILES 4 To view native properties click the Native Properties tab 5 Click OK to close the Properties dialog Navigating a Document with Multiple Pages AutoVue provides navigation buttons in the AutoVue toolbar to allow you to flip through a drawing for example Office 2D EDA or 3D files that contains multiple pages The navigation buttons appear by default The toolbar contains frequently used tools Previous Page Next Page p and Page Number Qa You can also access the navigation buttons from the View menu by selecting Page and then the required navigation button Opening Agile Attachment Files You can view files from either the Attachments tab of a business object or from the Files tabe of a file foder object NOTE When multiples files are displayed in Auto Vue use the document naviga tion buttons in the viewer toolbar to select the document that apperas in the viewer window Viewing Files from Web Client Attachments Tab To view a file from Web Client Attachments tab TASK 1 Goto the attachments tab of a business object that references the file 32 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL AUTOVUE BASICS OPENING AGILE ATTACHMENT FILES 2 Click the file name link in
261. ist The selected part or parts appear high lighted on the model and in the Model Tree 3 To select a group of parts from the Edit menu select Select then click and drag the mouse around the parts RESULT The entities within the box are selected and highlighted in the Model Tree If the selected entity is hidden in the Model Tree the Model Tree expands to display the selected entity Selecting All Identical Parts of a Model Select a model part in the workspace or from the Model Tree Right click and select Select Identical Parts All identical parts are highlighted on the model and in the Model Tree If there are no identical parts found a message appears indicating No identical parts found You can also select sub assemblies and Select Identical Parts to display all identical sub assemblies ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 141 WORKING WITH 3D FILES RE CENTERING Re Centering The Re center option repositions the model back to the center of the View window You can use a model part as a central reference point to reposition a model You can select several model parts to use as one collective central refer ence point Re Centering a Model to a Selected Model Part Re Center All Entity Reference TASK 1 Select the model part or parts that you want to re center 2 From the View menu select Re Center and then select Selected RESULT The model is repositioned using the selected model part or part
262. ith the newer file Click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you apply a change from the View menu all three windows display the synchronized change STEP RESULT AutoVue displays three windows the first displaying the newer file the second displaying the older file and the third displaying the compar ison results To access the Compare options right click in any of the windows ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To maximize any of the windows click the 0 button on the title bar of the window that you want to maximize To minimize click the button To restore the window click the E button STEP RESULT A menu appears displaying the Compare options When comparing AutoCAD files you can view a file without viewports To do so from the View menu select View Without Viewports To maximize any of the windows double click the title bar of the window that you want to maximize To restore the window double click the title bar To exit Compare mode from the File menu select Exit Compare ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Exit Compare Moden RESULT 68 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES The newer file appears in the workspace Align and Scale You can scale or translate a file in order to compare files accurately With the Align and Scale option you can select to automatically align the files select points to align and scale mod
263. itiating Actions from the Design Object Version Palette To initiate actions from the Design object Version palette Comparison Report Design objects only Click the Comparison Report drop down menu to select one of the following options Compare Select any two version rows and click Compare to compare the Designs in the Comparison Report drop down menu A Design Comparison Chart displays a comparison report Comparison by Search Select a version row and click Compare by Search in the Comparison report drop down list A Compare by Search palette opens In the drop down list select either Latest Version or All Versions Enter a search string enter to search for ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 41 AUTOVUE BASICS OPENING AGILE ATTACHMENT FILES any design object and execute a quick search Choose from a list of Designs to compare with the original Design object The Design Comparison Chart displays a comparison report Design Comparison Chart The Design Comparison Chart displays reports of the compared Design objects The plus sign expands the Design object to display a list of child objects attached to it You can collapse the object using the minus sign Click the grey dot icon to see more details about Attributes and Files Colors indicate the state of the Design object For example Blue Added Orange Modified Red Deleted e Purge Version Design objects store large CAD files which are updated regularly The
264. ity and then select Symbol ADDITIONA INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Symbol N STEP RESULT The Symbols dialog appears Symbols Symbols Libraries Symbol Library E Drag and drop symbol into AutoYue Draft APPROVED z Scaling Isotropic Anisotropic Selected Symbol Source File Symbol Name Description 2 Click the Symbols tab 3 From the Symbol Library list select the library from which you want to select a Symbol STEP RESULT The Symbols appear for the selected library 4 Click Isotropic if you want to scale the Symbol proportionately Click Anisotropic if you want to scale the Symbol disproportionately ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 257 MARKUPS MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES Drag the Symbol onto the workspace ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To add more Symbols repeat steps 3 to 5 STEP RESULT The Symbol appears on the drawing and in the Markup Naviga tion Tree Close the Symbols dialog Creating a New Symbol Library Once a Symbol library is created the existing library should not be modified If it is modified it will not be possible to add or remove existing symbols TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Symbol The Symbols dialog appears ADDITIONA INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Symbol amp i Click the Libraries tab Click Create STEP R
265. ity toolbar click Minimum Distance ass EDA Snapping Modes The snapping modes allow you to click to precise geometrical or electrical points For example when you select Snap to Pin move the cursor over the pin you want to select until the pin is highlighted then click Highlight and click a second pin to measure the distance between them The snapping modes allow you to snap to the middle center and end points of an entity as well as a pin via and symbol The following table outlines the avail able snapping modes Button Snap To Description S End point Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when moving the cursor near the entity s end point 282 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS CREATING EDA MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES Button Snap To Description Mid point Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when moving the cursor near the halfway point of a linear entity Center point Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when moving the cursor near the center of an entity Pin Electrical snap mode where a snap box appears when the cursor touches a pin Via Electrical snap mode where a snap box appears when the cursor touches a via Symbol origin Electrical snap mode where a snap box appears when the cursor touches a component Bx Free snap Allows snapping at any point on the drawing IZ Net Allows snapping to a net S
266. k double click on it from the workspace The hyperlink file opens in the window you selected in the Establish Hyperlink dialog Editing a Hyperlink TASK 1 In the Markup Navigation Tree or from the workspace select the hyper link that you want to edit From the Markup menu select Format and then select Edit Hyper link ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also right click the hyperlink and select Format and then select Edit Hyperlink STEP RESULT The Establish Hyperlink dialog appears ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 253 Markups MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES 3 Edit the information that you want 4 Click OK to close the Establish Hyperlink dialog RESULT The changes are saved Deleting a Hyperlink TASK 1 Inthe Markup Navigation Tree or from the workspace select the hyper link that you want to delete 2 From the Markup menu select Format and then select Remove Hyperlink ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also right click the hyperlink and select Format and then select Remove Hyperlink You can also delete the hyper link by selecting the hyperlink and pressing the Delete key on your keyboard RESULT The hyperlink is deleted Adding Signoff Entities The Signoff entity is an approval stamp containing information about the markup author date and time of creation You create a signoff entity when the Markup file is finalized NOTE If a markup is modified after a signoff is creat
267. k OK to close the dialog and to apply your changes Selecting Blocks Use this option to select a block to display from the current active file TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Blocks ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Blocks STEP RESULT The Select a Block to Display dialog appears listing the blocks for the current active file From the list select the block that you want to display Click OK STEP RESULT The selected block is displayed Displaying XRefs AutoVue references various sources to obtain all the data required to completely and correctly display files These sources can be internal to the file like layers and blocks External reference files XRefs are located outside the file Use the XRefs option to display the external references of the current active file TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select XRefs STEP RESULT The Select the External References to Display dialog appears listing the external reference files associated with the current active file 58 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES 2 You can modify the visibility of the XRefs by doing one of the following Deselect select the Status check box beside the XRef that you want to hide display Click All On to display all the XRefs or click All Off to hide a
268. k the part or entity type STEP RESULT The model parts appear in the list under Set 1 and are highlighted on the model and in the Model Tree All entities of the selected entity type are highlighted on the model 6 Click BY Set 2 7 Repeat step 5 STEP RESULT The model part appears in the list under Set 2 8 From the Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance 9 Click Compute STEP RESULT The minimum distance from the first set of entities to the second set is highlighted by a line The measured minimum distance X Y and Z coor dinates for Position 1 and X Y and Z coordinates for Position 2 appear in the Measurement dialog 10 Totake another measurement click Reset 11 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 193 WORKING WITH 3D FILES MEASURING IN 3D FILES Measuring an Angle Use the Angle option to measure the precise angle between any three vertices or any two edges planes faces or any combination of these entity types TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure B STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears 2 Click the Angle tab 3 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring STEP RESULT Entities of the selected types are highlighted on the model 4 To measure the angle between an entity type and a plane select the With Plane c
269. key while moving the cursor To draw a Leader with multiple line segments repeat steps 2 and 3 as often as you like You can click then drag as often as you like Right click to end the Leader A text box appears at the end of the Leader In the text box enter the text you want to attach to the Leader STEP RESULT The height of the text box will resize to fit the entered text To change text box font properties from the Markup menu select Format and then select Font ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the respective font property lists on the Markup Properties toolbar you can also modify the font type style and size STEP RESULT The Font dialog appears allowing you to change the font type style and size Click OKto implement the font changes and to close the Font dialog To change the line properties or fill color of the Leader select the Leader then from the Markup menu select Format and then select the property or properties you want to change ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the respective line property lists on the Markup Properties toolbar you can also modify the line style line thickness fill types and fill colors ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 263 MARKUPS 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS 10 Right click outside the text area to complete the modification ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To edit the Leader text double click the Leader in the tree or in the workspace STEP RESULT The text appears on the drawing and in the Ma
270. king When you select the Lock View to Presenter option you are also prop agating your markup modifications to the other participants in the session Lock View to Presenter is the default for all participants in a session TASK 1 From the Collaborate menu select Lock View to Presenter ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Collaborate status bar you can also click Lock View to Presenter RESULT The Lock View to Presenteroption is highlighted Viewing Session Information TASK 1 From the Collaborate menu select Session Information STEP RESULT The Session Information dialog appears displaying the Session Subject Session ID File Name Host and Users of the session 2 Click Close Leaving a Session Only a Host can close a Collaboration Session All other participants can leave a Collaboration Session and rejoin at a later time if it is still in session From the Collaborate menu select Leave Collaboration Session ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 355 REAL TIME COLLABORATION CHAT WINDOW The other participants are notified that you left the Collaboration Session and AutoVue returns to View mode Chat Window The Chat Window is a tool you can use to communicate with other users You send each other messages via the Chat Window The Chat Window is also useful in giving you Collaboration Session updates such as which users are present and which users have joined or left the session At the end o
271. l or from the Model Tree ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one model part press the Shift or Control key while selecting STEP RESULT The selected part or parts appear highlighted on the model and in the Model Tree 2 To hide the selected part or parts right click a selected part on the model or from the Model Tree and select Hide Part STEP RESULT The selected part or parts are hidden on the model 3 To display the selected part or parts and hide the rest of the model right click a selected part on the model or from the Model Tree and select Hide Rest STEP RESULT The selected parts are displayed in the workspace and the rest of the model is hidden Creating 3D Mockups You can import other 3D Models into the current active file ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 145 WORKING WITH 3D FILES CREATING 3D Mockups The imported files must be 3D and have similar dimensions TASK 1 From the File menu select Import File for Mockup STEP RESULT The Mockup dialog appears 2 Click Add STEP RESULT The Open dialog appears Enter the file name or browse to locate the file you want to import 4 Click Open STEP RESULT The file appears in the Mockup dialog To import more than one file repeat steps 2 to 4 5 The Enter Markup Mode check box is selected by default If you dese lect it any modifications you make to the mockup are not saved 6 Click OK to the close the Mockup dialog ADDITIONAL INFOR
272. le Batch Printing You can print original files along with their Markup files and selected markup layers together so that they appear as one file TASK 1 2 Open the file you want to print To print the associated markups open the Markup file or files you want to print If you are printing Markup files and you want to print the visible layers from the Markup menu select Markup Layers STEP RESULT The Markup Layers dialog appears Select the markup layers you want visible Click OK to close the Markup Layers dialog From the File menu select Print ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Print STEP RESULT The Print Properties dialog appears Configure the print properties To view a partial view of the file click Partial Preview STEP RESULT The Partial Print Preview dialog appears Click OK to print RESULT The Print dialog appears indicating the document is printing With the Batch Print option you can send a list of files to print at the same time You can also generate a batch by simultaneously opening all the files included in the batch print TASK 1 From the File menu select Batch Print STEP RESULT The Batch Print dialog appears ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 335 PRINTING BATCH PRINTING To add a file to be printed click Add STEP RESULT The Open dialog appears Enter the file name or browse to locate the file or files that you want to add
273. le and size STEP RESULT The Font dialog appears allowing you to change the font type style and size Click OK to implement the font changes and to close theFont dialog To change the line properties or fill color of the text box select the text box then from the Markup menu select Format and then select the property or properties you want to change ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the respective line property lists on the Markup Properties toolbar you can also modify the line style line thickness fill types and fill colors Right click outside the text area to complete the modification STEP RESULT The text appears on the drawing and in the Markup Navigation Tree To move the text box click and drag it to anywhere on the drawing To resize the text box select it and then click and drag the frame handles ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To edit the text double click the text box in the tree or in the workspace Adding a Note You can attach longer comments as a markup sticky note on the drawing A note displays in the workspace as a standard size graphical symbol 3 Each note is labelled as Note lt n gt where n represents the numerical order of occur rence of the note for example the first note is labelled as Note1 To read the note double click the entity to open it or move the mouse over the entity to display the tooltip While editing a Note entity you can continue to make selections from the AutoVue toolba
274. lect the Fix Position check box STEP RESULT The location of the entity appears in the From led field 5 Click inside the To field to select the entity type that you want to measure to 6 Select the snapping modes that you want to select as the end point for the measurement STEP RESULT All entities of the selected entity types are highlighted on the model 7 On the model select the entity you want to measure to STEP RESULT The location of the entity appears in the To field 8 Click again to complete the measurement STEP RESULT The measured line path appears in a value box entity on the current active markup The measured distance Delta X Delta Y and Delta Z appear in the Measurement Entities dialog 9 Drag to move the measured line path 10 Click on the measured line path 11 To move the value box click and drag it to anywhere on the drawing 12 To resize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement 13 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Calibrating Distance Calibrate the distance measurement TASK 1 Measure distance between two points or measure cumulative distance 2 From the Distance tab click Calibrate STEPRESULT The Distance Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance 3 From the Units list select the unit to which you want to calibrate the distance 4
275. left right or Mouse middle button click and drag left right Side step left right Ctrl Up arrow Ctrl Down arrow Ctrl click and drag up down Look up down Ctrl Left arrow Ctrl Right arrow Ctrl click and drag left right Rotate 200 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES WALKTHROUGH Keyboard Action Mouse Action Function Alt double click Places camera perpendicular to selected plane Adding Markups in Walkthrough Mode When walking through a 3D model you can add a Note markup entity NOTE The Note markup entity is the only markup supported in Walkthrough mode TASK 1 From the Markup menu select New ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click New Markup STEP RESULT AutoVue enters Markup mode Create a Note markup entity See Adding a Note for more information on how to create Note markup entities ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can continue walking through the model while creating new Note markup entities Save your new markups See Saving a New Markup File for more infor mation STEP RESULT The markups are saved To exit Markup mode from the Markup menu select Close All To view the 3D model s associated Markup files select Open from the Markup menu See Opening Markup Files for more information ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Note markup entities appear in the M
276. librate STEP RESULT The Distance Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance 3 From the Units list select the unit to which you want to calibrate the distance 4 Select Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance to a value 5 Select Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance by a factor 266 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS 6 Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration result appears in the Measurement dialog 7 Click Close to close the Distance tab Measuring Area Use the Area option to measure the area and perimeter of a region TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Area ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Area Z STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 2 From the Measured Area Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the area 3 From the Perimeter Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the perimeter To cumulate a Net Area Result of different areas select Add To subtract an area from the Net Area Result select Subtract Select Clear to clear the Net Area Result field Click a point on the drawing to define the starting point on nw S Continue clicking points on the drawing to define the area you want to measure STEP RESULT Each point is joined by a line
277. librate the distance to a value 5 Select Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance by a factor 6 Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration result appears in the Measurement dialog 7 Click Close to close the Distance tab 192 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES MEASURING IN 3D FILES Measuring Minimum Distance With theMinimum Distanceoption you can measure the minimum distance between model parts as well as any two points from the selection sets vertices edges mid edges arc axes arc centers faces or any combination of entity types TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure OPIN INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure jam STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears 2 Click the Min Distance tab Click M Set 1 4 From the Snapping Mode section select one of the following Select Entity if you want to measure the distance between model parts Snapping modes are disabled Select Geometry if you want to measure the distance between entity types Snapping modes are enabled 5 Ifyou selected Entity select a part or parts on the model If you selected Geometry select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To reset a set click Clear To clear items from a set select the items and press the Delete key To deselect a part or entity type on the model press the Control key and left clic
278. lity color or physical layer TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Layers ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Layers STEP RESULT The Layers dialog opens 2 Ifthe Logical Layers section is not open click Expand 3 Click the column header of an attribute RESULT Layers are sorted according to the attribute header you click For example if you click the Color o column header the logical layers in the section are grouped according to their color NOTE To restore the original sort order click the Order column header A layer set is comprised of all the physical and logical layers in the drawing Layer sets differ in the attributes of the different layers for example z order visibility and color You can also define your own layer sets to control which layers you can view and print 102 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES LAYER SETS Viewing Layer Sets AutoVue lists top bottom and default layer sets as well as any layer set that is stored in the file You can choose to display any layer set you need You can also create user defined layer sets and display them later To view a layer set take the following steps TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Layers ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Layers STEP RESULT The Layer
279. ll path of document v Document Drive d Document Directory b Document Base name e Document file extension n Total document pages p Current page number N Total tiled pages P Current tile number Y Date Year M Date Month D Date Day W Date Day of week H Time Hour U Time Minute S Time Seconds r New line F Native Print Settings Excel NOTE A literal percentage mark is entered manually as You can also print system variables in headers and footers Select a variable from the Insert Variable list Some Insert Variable options are user name browser and java home 328 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL PRINTING HEADER FOOTER Adding a Header and Footer Native Print Settings In the Headers Footers tab you can manually enter text or choose from a list of Insert Codes to appear in the headers and footers You can also print system variables TASK 1 po o NA 11 12 From the File menu select Print ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Print STEP RESULT The Print Properties dialog appears Click the Headers Footers tab Click in the Left Center or Right field and enter the text that you want to appear in the header and footer or choose an Insert Code or Insert Variable To Insert Codein the header or footer click Left Center or Right then select a code from the list To Insert Variablein the header or footer click
280. ll the XRefs Select a XRef from the dialog and then click Toggle to hide display the XRef ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Raster XRefs cannot be toggled on off for AutoCAD and MicroStation drawings 3 Click OK to close the Select the External References to Display dialog RESULT The selected XRefs are displayed Displaying Details About Resources Resource information for a file is displayed in the left of the AutoVue status bar Ifa file is missing resources the Missing Resource icon appears to the left of the AutoVue status bar These missing resources can be XRefs text fonts linestyles or shape files If a missing resource has been substituted for another resource NOTE In order to correctly display a file you must make sure all required resources are provided to AutoVue See Viewing Missing XRef Notification Icon for information on missing XRefs TASK 1 Click the Missing Resource icon or the Substituted Resource icon ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the File menu you can also select Properties STEP RESULT The Properties dialog appears 2 Click the Resource Informationtab to display details about missing or substituted resource information required to properly display this file ADDITIONAL INFORMATION A green check mark indicates the resources that AutoVue is able to access A red amp indicates that resources are not accessible substituted for another resource 3 Click OK to close the Properties
281. lor Index that you want to assign a new pen thickness ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To change more than one color indices press the Shift or Control key while selecting 4 From the Units list select the unit of measure that you want to set the thickness 5 Enter the new thickness STEP RESULT The new Thickness appears beside the Color Index 6 Inthe Print Properties dialog configure other print properties Configure other print options 8 To view a partial view of the file click Partial Preview STEP RESULT The Partial Print Preview dialog appears 332 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL PRINTING PARTIAL PREVIEW OF A FILE 9 Click OK to print STEP RESULT The Print dialog appears indicating the document is printing Creating a New Pen Setting TASK 1 Set the thickness for the color indices that you want 2 Click Save As The Save As dialog appears 3 Enter a file name with a c2t extension then click OK STEP RESULT The new pen setting appears in the Current Pen Settings list 4 Inthe Print Properties dialog click OK to print RESULT The Print dialog appears indicating the document is printing Deleting a Pen Setting TASK 1 Select the pen setting that you want to delete from the Current Pen Settings 2 Click Delete STEP RESULT The pen setting disappears from the list 3 Click Cancel to close the Print Properties dialog Partial Preview of a File The Partial Print Preview dialog
282. lt when you re enter walkthrough mode the last view displays Select the Show walkthrough dialog at startup option to display the Walk through dialog when you enter Walkthrough mode Deselect the option to disable the Walkthrough dialog on startup NOTE If you want to re enable the Walkthrough dialog on startup from the Options menu select Configure From the Configuration dialog select Miscella neous and then select the Show walkthrough dialog at startup checkbox Refer to Configuring AutoVue for 3D Files for more information Walking Through a 3D Model If you want to position yourself on a surface of the 3D model press the Alt key and double click a point on the surface For example to walk through a 3D model of a house you can Alt double click the landing in front of the door Once you are at your desired view point of the 3D model you can use the arrow keys or mouse to navigate through the model The following table lists the available keyboard mouse actions and their func tion Keyboard Action Up arrow Down arrow Mouse Action Click and drag up down or roll the mouse wheel forward and backward Function Move forward backward Left arrow Right arrow Click and drag left right Turn left right Alt Up arrow Alt Down arrow Alt drag up down or Mouse middle button click and drag up down Move up down Elevation Alt Left arrow Alt Right arrow Alt drag
283. m the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Note EZ See Adding a Note Signoff Create an approval stamp containing information about the markup author date and time of creation From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Signoff A See Adding Signoff Entities Creating 3D Markup Measure Entities When marking up 3D files you can create markup measure entities The measure options in Markup mode work slightly different than in View mode When measuring in Markup mode the specified measurement lines and values are displayed on the current active markup layer as entities These entities can be moved resized or deleted 294 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS 3D SPECIFIC MARKUPS NOTE Ifyou manipulate a part of a model the measure entity values do not update accordingly AutoVue provides the option to snap to different entity types on the model In Markup mode you can choose from several measurement options to create markup measure entities From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Measurement to access the following measure options Name Description Angle Measure the precise angle between three vertices or any two edges planes or faces From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Angle 4 Arc Measure the precise radius length and angle of any arc and calculate the center point location From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Arc
284. ment File To use your Agile Bookmarks to select an attachment file TASK 1 Select an available Viewer menu option File gt Open URL Analysis gt Compare File gt Import File as Overlay File Import File for Mockup Analysis gt Cross Probe Follow any dialog prompts until the File Open dialog appears From the File Open dialog click Agile Browse ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you did not define any bookmarks in Agile PLM then the Agile Browse button does not appear in the File Open dialog STEP RESULT The DMS File Open dialog appears and displays your Agile Book marks in a tree structures Click to expand a bookmark and display its item revision or its file folder versions Click a revision or version row to highlight the file you want to view From the DMS File Open dialog click OK STEP RESULT AutoVue opens the selected file or if appropriate adds the selected file to the current analysis function Quick Search to Select an Attachment File To perform a quick search to select an attachment file TASK 1 Choose an available Viewer menu option File gt Open URL Analysis gt Compare File gt Import File as Overlay File gt Import file for Mockup only available of a 3D model is active Analysis gt Cross Probe Follow any dialog prompts until the File Open dialog appears From the File Open dialog click Agile Search STEP RESULT The Search dialog appears
285. ments Located in the top right corner of the AutoVue window clicking the PinMe icon pins or locks the current AutoVue window so that it stays open As a result when viewing an additional attachement a new AutoVue window opens and you can switch between open windows to compare or refer to multiple viewed files Menu Bar The menu bar is the main access to all the menu commands The selection of commands changes according to the tasks being accomplished by AutoVue Toolbars AutoVue has three toolbars Auto Vue toolbar Markup Properties toolbar and Markup Entity toolbar AutoVue Toolbar The AutoVue toolbar displays below the menu bar when you open AutoVue It is the default toolbar and includes the most commonly used functions when viewing a file open a file create a new markup print zoom and many others Depending on the file that is opened the toolbar buttons will change For example the following image shows the AutoVue toolbar when a 3D file is open A 27 h e3 DRED AUS 24 8 aM jars es Markup Properties Toolbar Y he Untitled1 The Markup Properties toolbar displays below the AutoVue toolbar when you enter Markup mode It includes the available property and formatting options for the markup entities save markups change font fill type line style and many others The following image shows the default Markup Properties toolbar soceses _ _ v mn B I U Arial 14 e S B nE ORA
286. n and buid information 17 archive files 30 arrow style 319 AutoVue 15 basics 17 graphical user interface 18 GUI 370 menu bar 19 toolbars 19 AutoVue GUI AutoVue properties toolbar 19 AutoVue toolbar 19 Markup entity toolbar 20 AutoVue properties toolbar 19 AutoVue toolbar 19 base font 208 batch print 323 Bill of Material BOM 116 Bookmarks tab 22 88 140 build information 17 bylayer 315 C calibrating arc 81 134 195 269 281 289 301 calibrating distance 76 129 192 266 277 285 298 change color markup layer 245 Components tab 22 85 configure 203 2D 208 colors 209 snap settings 209 3D 210 align with current UCS 216 background 215 background gradient 215 background images 215 color 213 dynamic load mesh resolution 212 dynamic rendering 210 frame rate 211 geometry highlight 214 initial visibility 212 loading 212 miscellaneous 216 model 211 PMI filtering 213 PMI initial visibility 213 rendering 210 section highlight 214 selection 216 217 show global axes 216 tree level 216 base font 208 CAD file options 204 common 214 220 desktop office 223 EDA 217 3D PCB view 218 3D view 221 colors 220 cross probing 219 dim unselected 217 218 highlight entity 217 synchronize layers 219 thicken highlighted entity 218 tooltips 218 font paths 207 general options 204 graphic files 222 measurement 208 paths 206 raster files 205 rendering 205 resources 205 XRef paths 206 convert 337 file 340 options
287. n the left or the tree on the right ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The tree on the left is the base file and the tree on the right is the compare file STEP RESULT The selected entities appear in the Set 1 list 5 Click Set 2 6 Select the entities from the other tree that you did not select for Set 1 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To compare entities from the same file select the enti ties for Set 1 and Set 2 from either the base file or the compare file STEP RESULT The selected entities appear in the Set 2 list ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 179 WORKING WITH 3D FILES GENERATING A BILL OF MATERIAL 7 Click OK STEP RESULT The Compare Tree and the three windows are updated with the set comparison results 8 To restore the comparison files from the Analysis menu select Compare Files RESULT The files appear in the three windows Generating a Bill of Material For 3D files you can obtain a list with a count of the parts required for manu facturing the item featured in the file To generate a Bill of Material BOM TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Generate Bill of Material STEP RESULT The Bill of Material dialog appears Bill of Material Count Part Names SDPROE_BODY PRT 3DPROE_STEM PRT 3DPROE_COVER_SEAT_1 PRT 3DPROE_COVER_SEAT_2 PRT SDPROE_COVER_SEAT_GUIDE PRT SDPROE_COVER PRT 3DPROE_COVER_SCREW PRT 3DPROE_TOP_BALL PRT SDPROE_BACK_BALL PRT SDPROE_TOP_SEAT_GUIDE PRT SDPROE_BACK_SE
288. nce permission by the system administrator or the backend values can be read when requested the attribute is configured with the Read permission by the system administrator The following describes each attribute If an attribute is configured with the Edit permission then you can modify the value of the attribute on the Stamp e Ifan attribute is configured with the Write permission then you can save the value on the Stamp to backend system NOTE Provided that you have permissions to update the attribute on the backend system ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 271 MARKUPS 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS e Ifan attribute is configured with the Hidden permission then you cannot see the attribute on the Stamp However you can view the attribute in the Edit dialog and when editing the Stamp 272 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS e Ifan attribute is configured with the current date or user name default values then these values are displayed on the Stamp only if no value is retrieved from the backend system 1 You can view the attributes of a Stamp by double clicking the Stamp markup entity The DMS Attributes dialog appears and lists all attri butes of the Stamp DMS Attributes To edit the value double click on it Name Yalue Value From DMS title Administrator keywords M unknown M unknown r_modifier 2009 05 27 08 01 5 Administrator ADDITIONAL INFORMATION All a
289. ndow Initiate Compare in AutoVue The following sections describe how to initiate a compare in AutoVue ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 47 COMPARING FILES INITIATE COMPARE IN AUTOVUE Initiating Compare in AutoVue To initiate comparing files in AutoVue TASK 1 View an appropriate file for compare 2 Display the Attachments tab or the Files tab 3 Select a file row you want to work with and choose Web Client View gt View Java Client View Files s STEP RESULT AutoVue opens and displays the selected file 4 In the AutoVue Analysis menu choose Compare STEP RESULT The File Open dialog appears 5 Use one of the following File Open dialog methods to select a file to compare Browse to browse your local directories to select and open files from the AutoVue window Agile Browse to use Agile bookmarks to open files from the AutoVue window Agile Search to perform an Agile Quick Search to select and open files from the AutoVue window Selecting a File From Local Directory You can select an attachment file by browsing your local directories TASK 1 From the File Open dialog click Browse 2 Use the Look in drop down list to select the directory you want 3 Select the file you want and click Open 4 Click OK in the File Open dialog STEP RESULT The Viewer opens the selected file or if appropriate adds the selected file to the current analysis function RESULT I
290. ne word wrapping in the PDF In some PDF files when copying text that includes line spaces AutoVue may not insert the spaces This is because the line spaces are not saved in the PDF file 72 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 2D FILES MEASURING IN 2D FILES Measuring in 2D Files AutoVue provides the ability to perform measurements in 2D files Measure ment options vary between vector and non vector files For vector files Auto Vue provides the option to snap to fixed points on the drawing For non vector files the Snapping Modes option is disabled However you can free snap to any point on the drawing AutoVue provides several measure options that you can choose from You can access the measure options from Analysis menu and selecting Measure or from the AutoVue toolbar click Measure i The measure options are as follows Name Description Distance Measure the distance between two points See Distance in non Vector Files Distance in Vector Files Area Measure selected area See Area in non Vector Files Area in Vector Files Angle Measure the angle between selected points or between two lines See Angle in non Vector Files Angle in Vector Files Arc Measure an arc entity See Arc in non Vector Files Arc in Vector Files 2D Vector Snapping Modes The available snapping modes allow you to click to precise geome
291. ne aesthetics 80 PPCM VECON FUNC S ates ascites eco cet nea choca tea e ia te aa cade torent toetas IEEE STEE EEEo 80 Calibrating AEM ARF anen pe este aE 81 Working With EDA Piles i suisssiesiintniiansusieaiosieiniaiicesmsnunnianniemiinadieni ann CiS asirio eisite 83 Navigation Panel is iesscricsseinensnatscvnca cars nina ERA EEA ied E EE a 83 Customizing COMIN essaninnanannjanii r E Ea en ei SEs 84 components Tabus senean eree n oeaks oe oneties outed dSguasas becsaza drscsisondasucinvansciascns 85 Nets TaD a AE ca te aco ihe N N E N aN 86 Bookmarks Tabien iea anita mr e E eO T E e at 88 Selecting ENTITIES a iE dawn A A A A E enna E AE RNS 88 From the Navigation Panel icc sssasusnateossteontwvatauateastocasniestu state ntadenkeod ose eatin 89 From the MVS pa Cen nonin seernes oes resio ioaea swsnseysacishonseastncesd oudeane NESO eeaeee Eees 89 From the Entity Search Dialog sssssssesssssessesesssesoosseseessescoseeereereeeeeeeeereererreereeereeeereerereersresressessessrsssss 90 Zooming to a Selected Entity sessessesssssssessssesoesoeseesseseeseeeeoseeseeseeereeeteererrerreereereeeseeeerereereresresreseessessssssss 90 Filtering Entity Type Seosaineet eae Saa naisi 91 E tity Properties scicssuscscacsascsasusedsasensesensasvduastvesoasesedosdonssuecoudd E E REEE EE E EE AEE RERE E 91 Viewing the Properties of an Entity ssessessessosseseoseoseeseeeeeeeeserseeeereereeeseeseeeerereereerserseeserssessesssss 93 Navigating
292. newer version of the document e The left window displays the older version of the document The bottom window displays the comparison results By default the result windows display added deleted and unchanged entities In the Comparison Result window you can specify whether you want to display only the additions deletions or unchanged or any combination of the three To access these options right click in any window and select an option from the pop up menu By default the Comparison Result window displays the unchanged deleted and added information NOTE The Compare feature performs a graphical comparison not a geometrical comparison The comparison results are displayed in different colors to differentiate the results of the file comparison The comparison options and corresponding colors are ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 67 WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES Option Color Description View Additions Green Displays data that is present in the newer file but not in the older file View Deletions Red Displays data that is missing in the newer file but present in the older file View Unchanged Blue Indicates that there is no change between the newer file and old file TASK View the newer file in AutoVue From the Analysis menu select Compare STEP RESULT The File Open dialog appears Enter the file name or browse to select the file that you want to compare w
293. nformation on cross probing between two or more EDA files displaying the net connectivity when cross probing and cross probing between 2D and 3D views of the same file Initiate Cross Probing In Agile cross probing feature is initiated from either the business object Attachments tab or the file folder Files tab rather than from the viewer menus Use cross probing to interrogate ECAD schematic and layout files in separate viewer windows NOTE The Agile administrator must specify the ECAD file extension in the Files Types list in Agile Administrator Viewer amp Files node in order for you to view the ECAD files You can select both needed files from the same Attachments tab or the same file folder Files tab from which you launch the Cross Probe action Or you can 106 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES CROSS PROBING select one file on the current tab and then search for the remaining file from the attachments of any other object The View gt By Search gt Cross probe option allows you to find other files in the system which you may want to use to cross probe without having to select two files from the same Attachments tab or Files tab that is you can search and select one attached file from Part 234 and another attached file from Part 765 Alternatively you can view a single ECAD file and then initiate cross probing within the viewer by adding another file from your desktop NOTE AutoVue support
294. ng To view the mass properties of the entire 3D model make sure no parts are selected ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also make your selection after you open theEntity Properties dialog 160 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES ENTITY PROPERTIES 3 From the Analysis menu select Show Entity Properties ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also right click in the workspace and select Show Entity Properties or in the Model Tree select the model part or parts then right click and select Show Entity Properties STEP RESULT The Entity Properties dialog appears 4 Click the Mass Properties tab to view the properties of the selected mass STEP RESULT When amass property cannot be calculated N A displays in red for that property When this is the case you can also click Error Report for a list of mass properties that could not be calculated 5 To change the density change measurement units or configure computation of inertia tensor click Options STEP RESULT The Options dialog appears 6 Click OK to close the Options dialog Click Close to close the Entity Properties dialog Configuring Mass Properties From the Mass Properties tab you can change the density the measurement units or configure the reference point of inertia tensor TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Show Entity Properties ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also right click in the workspace and select Show E
295. noen laine nonin 241 Exportingia Mar KUD FILE sissien ni a eaa R E Ee Eeo TENs 242 Setting the Active Markup File sssssssseeesssssssssssseecseesssssssseosseesssesnsssesseeesseosssssesseeeeeesnsssssseeseeeesssss 243 Changing the Active Markup File ou cssssessssssssssssscsscsessscssccssssscssscsessnssscsncescssseseesssaesncesceneesees 243 Working with Markup Layers ss ssssssssessessesseseeseeseeereeeeeecerteereereersereeereereererererrereerrsrrsrssessnssessssssssssssssssse 244 Creating a Markup Layer sssssssssessesesessssssssessesssssssssssessessensensessseseeseseoseeseeseeseeseesereereereeeeerereeerereeesees 244 Setting the Active Markup Lay f sssessssssssssssssssssssssssessessessesseeseseeseoseeseeseeseeseesereereerreeeereeeeerereereees 245 Changing the Color of a Markup Layer sessessssssssessssssssossosseseesseseeseoseeseeseeeeeeeeeereereerserereeeeseeeeeeee 245 Renaming a Markup Layer sssesssssessessesseseeseeeeeereeeeereeeteeteereererrserseereeeeereereeresrrsrrseessesnssnssnssssssssssss 246 Toggling between Markup Layers ssscsssssscsscsssessesssecssecssesssccssccssessscsscceseesscesscesseesscesseeseesseees 246 Deleting a Markup Layer ssssssssssssesseseessesseseesseereereereerteerereeeseeerereerseereereerrsrrsrrsrrserssesstssessssssssssssse 247 Moving a Markup Entity to Another Layer ssssssssssssssessssesssssnssssssssssssssssssssessessesseneeneesesseeseeereeeee 247 Consolidating Mark p Files sni
296. nsssesreeeses 196 Measuring the Length of an Edge sssssssssssseesssssssssesseeessessssssssseossessnsssssseoseeessossnsssessresrrssnsssesseesres 196 Meas ring Face S rface mesna a aaia Gaiam gene AR SN 197 Walkthr gRisssisssinrississssisssresssaspsnesrsssnsisinisrs esk ss ear Eos OESE o EE mene OS EEN ERES NE TEETE S 198 Walkthrough Dial OG rnanan na E EO A A E ER Ra aS 199 Walking Through a 3D Model ssssssssessesssssssssseecseesssssssssesseesssssnsssesseeesernsnsssssseeseessosssssseeseeessesssssssse 200 Adding Markups in Walkthrough MOde sssssssssssssscsssssssssssncsssssscsssssscseesnsssessncsecssscsesnceacensess 201 Configuring AUtO VUS s oa E EAEE E A NENTS 203 General COGIC Sse tinn o ere e a a E AEA Ea TE s 204 Configuring Options for CAD Files sssssssssssseessssssssseeseeessesssssesstecseessossssssoocreesssssssseossteserssnsssesseesees 204 Raster FileSiisisiiksssrsii iisisti sargai cine ab ac cllepsscegnraacbppdadaczaleananeshargeeltes 205 RenderiN Osaer en ARA A EAA ERARA 205 RESOUTCO Sinuna in Eaa E E E E ER R i 205 SoTa Ko Lelea 1e FACING E E E E IE AE A AE AEA ES EEEE ESA 206 MEASUPEMENT sscssisniecisssscisnanssasbevasssecondeassneouiondeasansevassasasobunbansnazonitsegnciunk coun eshaokeonaaosieasnaan RERNE S 207 Configuring the Base Font for Archive and Text Files ssssssssssssoscseesssssssseoseeesssssnssseseeesses 208 Configuring AUtOVUe for 2D Files esessessesssessessscsscssscssssssssusssccssssecsuscacsuseas
297. nthe Logical Layers section you can show or hide the following Option Description One logical layer Select the check box in the Visibility column e Multiple logical To select more than one layer press the Shift or Control key while layers selecting and then click Visibility el 4 Click Apply to view the changes in the workspace 5 You can now save your changes as a user defined layer set 6 Click Close to close the Layers dialog 100 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES LAYERS Modifying Polarity From the Logical Layers section of the Layers dialog you can invert the polarity of the selected layer if polarity exists in the selected file TASK 1 Select the layer and then click the Polarity icon to toggle the polarity or select deselect the checkbox in the Polarity column When positive polarity is selected the layer appears as is When negative polarity is selected the layer image is inverted the enti ties in the layer are displayed as transparent and the remainder of the layer appears as a solid color Changing Layer Color You can modify the color of any physical or logical layer from the Layers dialog TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Layers ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Layers STEP RESULT The Layers dialog opens If necessary click Expand to open th
298. nthe Markup Navigation Tree or the workspace select the group that you want to ungroup 2 From the Markupmenu select Object and then select UnGroup RESULT The group of entities appear on the markup as individual entities Deleting Markup Entities TASK 1 Select the markup entity that you want to delete To select multiple markup entities press the Shift or Control keys while selecting 2 From the Markup Properties toolbar click Delete Markups RESULT The selected entity or entities are deleted from the current active file NOTE You can also press the Delete key to delete the markup entities Alterna tively right click the entity in the workspace or Markup Navigation Tree and select Delete Formatting Markup Entity Properties With AutoVue you can modify the formatting of a markup entity via the Format option from the Markup menu or via the Markup Entity Properties dialog See Using the Markup Entity Properties Dialog When creating a markup entity you have the option to change the line color line style line thickness arrow style fill color and fill type Additionally you can assign the markup entity the same color as the layer 310 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES Changing Line Color TASK 1 Select the markup entity or entities for which you want to change the line color 2 From the Markup menu select Format and then
299. ntity Properties or in the Model Tree select the model part or parts then right click and select Show Entity Properties STEP RESULT The Entity Properties dialog appears 2 Click the Mass Properties tab 3 Click Options STEP RESULT The Options dialog appears 4 To change the density enter a value in the Density field To change the density units select the unit for Mass and Length from their respective lists in the Units section 6 To apply the density to model parts with unknown density select Use Only for Parts with Unknown Density To apply the density to all model parts select Use for All Parts 8 To change the display units select the unit for Mass and Length from their respective lists in the Display Units section ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 161 WORKING WITH 3D FILES ENTITY PROPERTIES Viewing Extents 9 To compute the inertia tensor based on output coordinate system select Output Coordinate System Origin 10 To compute the inertia tensor based on the center of gravity select Center of Gravity 11 Click OK to close the Options dialog STEPRESULT Mass properties are instantly calculated and displayed in the Mass Properties tab When a mass property cannot be calculated N A displays for that property When this is the case you can also click Error Report for a list of mass properties that could not be calculated 12 To save the changes click Save As STEP RESULT The Save Mass Pro
300. o close the Measurement Entities dialog Measuring Cumulative Distance Use the Cumulative Distance option to measure the distance along a path of multi faceted adjoining points TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Distance ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance lt STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 2 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring 3 To select all snapping modes click All On To deselect all snapping modes click All Off 4 Fromthe Measured Distance Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance 5 Select Cumulative 6 Click the first entity to define the starting point 284 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS CREATING EDA MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES 7 Continue clicking points along the path that you want to measure STEP RESULT Each point is joined by a line 8 Right click to complete the measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement STEP RESULT The measured line path measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measured distance Delta X Delta Y and the Manhattan Distance appear in the Measurement Entities dialog 9 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Calibrating Distance Calibrate the distance measurement
301. o the operation you are performing STEP RESULT Only business objects with attached files appear in the search results table For example a business object that you viewed recently will not appear on the Recently Visited list of the Shortcuts tab if it has no attachments 4 When the results of your search are returned select a row in the results table and the related files for that object appear in the Related Files table 5 Inthe Related Files table select the file you want If the selected search object is a file folder use the Version drop down list in the Related Files table to select the file folder version you want If the selected search object is an item in the Related Files table displays item attachments for each released revision of the item the file name followed by the revision number or letter for example widget dwg A and widget dwg B NOTE For item objects Introductory revisions and unreleased pending revisions do not appear in the related files list If the selected search object is a business object select the Show Matching File Types Only checkbox to display only the related files that are the same file type as the file with which you want to compare 6 When finished click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can continue to run multiple searches or short cuts until you are finished selecting the attachments you want RESULT The files and the comparison results appear in a single viewer wi
302. o the operation you are performing ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Only business objects with attached files appear in the search results table For example a business object that you viewed recently will not appear on the Recently Visited list of the Shortcuts tab if it has no attachments 4 When the results of your search are returned select a row in the Results table and the related files for that object appear in the Related Files table 5 Inthe Related Files table select and move attachments to the Selected Files table 6 You can continue to run multiple searches or shortcuts until you are finished selecting the attachments you want 7 When you are finished click OK Each file is displayed in a separate viewer window 8 Begin cross probing Cross Probing Between Two or More EDA Files The Cross Probe option lets you select entities in the schematic drawing or the PCB design to highlight in all the open files TASK 1 Open an EDA file to cross probe ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 111 WORKING WITH EDA FILES CROSS PROBING From the Analysis menu select Cross Probe ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Cross Probe 5 STEP RESULT The Cross Probe dialog appears Click Add File In the Open dialog that appears enter the file name or browse to locate the file you want to cross probe then click Open ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To add multiple files to the Cross
303. ociated to files that have the same file extension as the file you are viewing Select the markup files you want to promote to the current markup Click OK ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 237 MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP FILES STEP RESULT The promoted markups display in the file you are currently viewing To save the promoted markups with the current file folder version save the markups before exiting the viewer In the AutoVue Markup menu choose one of the Save commands e To promote file folder ad hoc mark ups in Java Client a b Open the file folder object and display the Files tab Click the Do Redlining or Has been redlined on the row of the file you want to redline This button is available only when markups are allowed When AutoVue opens create a new markup In the viewer Markup menu select New In the AutoVue Markup menu choose the Open command STEP RESULT The Markup Files dialog appears Click the All Revisions check mark STEP RESULT AutoVue displays all valid markups The available markups are associated to files that have the same file extension as the file you are viewing Select the markup files you want to promote to the current markup Click OK STEP RESULT The promoted markups are displayed in the file you are currently viewing To save the promoted markups with the current file folder version save the markups before exiting the viewer In the AutoVue Markup menu choose one of the
304. olbar will override the Bylayer Z color and will not change 6 Click OK to close the Markup Layers dialog Renaming a Markup Layer After you create a markup layer you have the option to rename the layer TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Markup Layers The Markup Layers dialog appears 2 From the Markup Layers list select the markup layer you want to rename 3 Click Rename STEP RESULT The New Markup Layer dialog appears 4 Enter the new layer name Click OK STEP RESULT The markup layer is assigned the new name 6 Click OKto close the Markup Layers dialog Toggling between Markup Layers From the Markup Layers dialog you can choose to show or hide a layer and its associated markup entities TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Markup Layers The Markup Layers dialog appears 246 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS WORKING WITH MARKUP LAYERS 2 To show hide a layer or layers perform one of the following a Select a layer and click Toggle The layer s check box will switch between selected and deselected To view all the markup layers click All On To hide all markup layers click All Off b From the Markup Layers list select the check box next to the layer or layers you want visible and deselect the check box next to the layer or layers you want to hide 3 Click OK RESULT The markup entities belonging to the selected layer or layers appear in the work spa
305. on LATEST 7 of the file folder select that row on the Attachments tab click the Edit button and use the Folder Version drop down list in the Edit dialog box to select 7 Click OK to complete the edit process You will now be able to create redline markups for that attachment Select the added item on the Affected Items tab of the ECO On the Redline Attachments tab select the row containing the file you want to redline and click the Do Redlining icon in that row When AutoVue opens click Markup This button is available only when markups are allowed Add your markups to the attachment ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ECO markups are saved against and associated with the pending revision of the item If the ECO is released without first replacing the file the markups appear against the released revision of the item e To ad hoc markup or redline an attachment file from a file folder object in the Java Client a b Double click the row containing the file you want to redline When AutoVue opens click Markup This button is available only when markups are allowed Add your markups to the attachment ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Ad hoc markups are saved against and associ ated with the version of the file folder object Redlining Markups for Change Orders The change order redlines of 2D 3D and EDA files are based on the pending revision of the item The markup changes are visible from either the change 232 ORACLE AUTOV
306. on 343 Collaboration user tree 343 Controller 344 Host 344 Lock View to Presenter 344 Observer 345 Pointer 346 session 347 add new users 348 assign host 352 close session 353 initiate 347 invite users 351 join 350 layer color 348 leave collaboration session 355 Lock View to Presenter 355 open a markup 349 350 pass control 352 remove users 351 request control 354 save session markup 353 session information 355 show presenter window 354 track changes 354 Unlock View to Presenter 354 Session ID 346 Session Information 346 Session Markup file 346 Session Object 346 Show Preseneter Window 346 Unlock View to Presenter 344 real time collaboration Open Local File 345 real time collaboration Open URL 345 rename markup layer 246 render modes 149 resolve local resources 205 Resource icon 27 S save markups 241 selecting entities 88 selecting views 65 Session Markup file 346 Show Net Connectivity 93 snap settings 209 375 snapping modes 2D 73 275 3D 189 295 EDA 128 282 specifying a view point 66 streaming file 30 Substituted Resource icon 27 59 substituted resources 59 T text box visibility 321 toggle between layers 246 toolbars 19 tooltips 218 V version information 17 exporting 17 View tab 25 139 W walkthrough 198 watermarks 330 workspace 89 X XRef paths 206 375
307. on options let you define how AutoVue indicates that an object is selected Option Description Highlight Bounding Box Selection is enclosed in a wireframe box Highlight Enti Selection is indicated by changing color guig ty y ging 216 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR EDA FILES Walkthrough The following Walkthrough options let you configure the view to use when you enter walkthrough mode and to control whether or not you want to see the Walkthrough dialog at startup Option Description Restore Last View Select this option to save the last view of the model before exiting walkthrough mode As a result when you re enter walkthrough mode the last view displays Show Walkthrough Select this option if you want the Walkthrough dialog to display dialog on startup when you start walkthrough mode Clear this option if you do not want to see the Walkthrough dialog on startup Configuring AutoVue for EDA Files There are configuration options that allow you to customize your work envi ronment when working with EDA files To access the EDA configuration options from the Options menu select Configure In the Configuration dialog that appears select EDA in the tree Customizing Selections Configure how you want selected components to be highlighted From the Configuration tree select EDA There are two selection options Highlight Entity and Dim
308. onfiguration options that the Controller set in the Configure menu NOTE For all users except for the Controller view options are disabled To unlock your view from the presenter s from the Collaborate menu again select Lock View to Presenter or from the Collaborate status bar click Unlock View to Presenter f Observers can take part in a Collaboration Session but cannot create Markup entities They can observe and make comments in the Chat window The Host can designate a user as an Observer when the Host invites the user to the Collab oration session A user can also decide to take part as an Observer in the Collab oration Session by selecting Observer in the Join Session dialog There can be more than one Observer during a Collaboration Session Opening a File The Controller is the only user who can open a file during a Collaboration Session To open a URL from the File menu select Open URL To open a local file from the File menu select Open Local File The File Open dialog appears letting you specify the file to open When AutoVue is integrated with a Document Management System DMS clicking Open URL opens a dialog that lets you view a DMS file You can work on this file opened through Open URL during the Collaboration Session When the Host is the same as the Controller and the Host opens a URL the host is prompted to save the Session Markup When the Controller opens a URL the Host is prompted to save the Ses
309. ons field appear in the Results list 8 To view the description of a violation result select the violation from the Results list STEP RESULT The description appears in the Description field The description includes information such as the type of violation the location where it occurs x and y coordinates the component or entity it affects and the actual value measured When you select a violation result AutoVue zooms to the entity or set of enti ties that were affected and highlights them on the drawing 9 Continue to select violation results to view its description ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to restart a new check 10 Click Close to close the Verify Design dialog Exporting the Design Verification Results You can export the design verification results into a text file TASK 1 Verify the design 2 Inthe Verify Design dialog click Export STEP RESULT The Export Results dialog appears Navigate and select the directory where you want to export the results 4 Enter a file name Click Save STEP RESULT AutoVue saves the design verification results in a txt text ora csv Comma Separated Values file listing each violation result and its descrip tion 6 Click Close to close the Verify Design dialog ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 123 WORKING WITH EDA FILES SEARCHING USING ENTITY SEARCH Searching Using Entity Search You can search for an entity in a schematic drawing or a PCB de
310. or which you want to change the arrow style 2 From the Markup menu select Format and then select Arrow Style Select the new arrow style from the options provided RESULT The arrow style changes for the selected markup line entity or entities NOTE From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click Arrow Style S Alternatively right click the entity in the workspace or Markup Navigation Tree select Format and then select Arrow Style NOTE Any new entities that you create will have the new arrow style Changing Fill Type TASK 1 Select the markup entity or entities for which you want to change the fill type From the Markup menu select Format and then select Fill Type ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click Fill Type Alternatively right click the entity in the workspace or Markup Navigation Tree select Format and then select Fill Type STEP RESULT The Fill Type dialog appears ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 313 Markups FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES From the Fill Type list select the fill type that you want for the markup entity Select Solid Fill if you want the fill color to be solid Select Transparent Fill if you want the fill color to be transparent Select No Fill if you do not want any fill color Click OK RESULT The fill type changes for the selected markup entity or entities Any new markup entities that you crea
311. ou become the Controller of the Collaboration Session NOTE If the Controller does not respond within 10 seconds control is automati cally granted to the user who requested it Tracking Changes Unlocking a View The Show Presenter Window option allows you to simultaneously track the Controller s base file view changes and everyone s markup changes while your markup file remains unchanged You must be in an unlocked view state before selecting Show Presenter Window From the Collaborate menu select Show Presenter Window You can now track changes without affecting your view If you do not want to see the Controller s view changes clear the Lock View TASK 1 From the Collaborate menu click Lock View to Presenter ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Collaborate status bar you can also click Unlock View j STEP RESULT The Lock View to Presenter option is deselected 2 From the Collaborate menu select Show Presenter Window if you want to simultaneously track the Controller s base file view changes 354 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL REAL TIME COLLABORATION COLLABORATION SESSION Locking a View and everyone s markup changes while your markup file remains unchanged RESULT You can now track changes without affecting your view NOTE The Show Presenter Window option is only available when the view is unlocked The Lock View to Presenter option allows you view changes the Controller is ma
312. ouped PMI entities are highlighted in the Model Tree PMI entities can also include hyperlinks To fire a PMI hyperlink do the following TASK 1 From the Model Tree or workspace double click the PMI hyperlink entity STEP RESULT The 3D Hyperlink dialog appears if there are multiple hyperlinks associated with the selected PMI entity 2 From the 3D Hyperlink dialog select a link and then click Fire RESULT The selected link opens Manipulating a 3D Model You can rotate 3D CAD models along a specific axis You can scale a model part up and down as well as translate the model In Manipulate Mode you can resize translate and or rotate selected parts of the model When you select one or more model parts AutoVue displays a model size representation of the Global Axes going through the selected part or parts of the 3D model 166 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES MANIPULATING A 3D MODEL Panning a Model Along the X Y and Z Axis TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Manipulate a INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Manip ulate STEP RESULT You are now in Manipulate mode Select the model part or parts that you want to pan ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one part press the Shift or Control key while selecting STEP RESULT A model size representation of the Global Axes appears through the model part or parts and are encased by a three d
313. p to open the host can also open a Markup file while a session is in progress The Host can invite other users to join the Collaboration Session during the session or at initiation of the session The Host can also save the collaboration markup called the Session Markup The host is the only one who can save the Session Markup The Controller Lock The Controller is the person who controls the base file s view during the Collab oration Session Other participants in the Collaboration Session can choose between displaying or hiding the Controller s View changes When a session is initiated the Host is also the Controller The Controller can change the base file anytime during the Collaboration Session However when the Controller is not the the Host opening a new file has to be approved by the Host At any time during a session a participant who is not an Observer can request control of a Collaboration Session Any user who is not the Controller of the Collaboration Session can choose to display the Controller s View modifications on the base file and the other partic ipants modifications on the Markup file made during the Collaboration Session To do so from the Collaborate menu select Lock View to Presenter or from the Collaborate status bar click Lock View to Presenter 344 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL REAL TIME COLLABORATION OBSERVER Observer When you lock your view the file displayed will have the same C
314. pending on how the Stamp is configured it may appear as a fized size in the workspace or it may be resizable If it is resizable you can select the stamp outline and drag to the desired size If the isotropic option is selected on the stamp it resizes proportionally in all directions To resize the stamp non proportionally your system administrator must update the Stamp defini tion Depending the format of the background image when resizing the Stamp attri butes and or text may not align properly with the background image To avoid this issue Enhanced Metafiles EMF should be used as the background image Refer to the Oracle Auto Vue Client Server Deployment Installation and Config uration Guide for more information If the Stamp is configured to retrieve backend system attributes then the values of these attributes are displayed on the Stamp in the workspace To modify the text font on the Stamp select the required font and style from the Markup toolbar The Copy Paste feature for Stamps is not supported If you copy a group of enti ties that has a Stamp the Stamp is excluded from the Copy Paste function Viewing Modifying Stamp Attributes The section describes how to view and modify Stamp attributes If your Stamp is configured to read backend attritbutes then the Stamp entity displays these backend attributes Reading values from the backend can be done once during Stamp creation the attribute is configured with the ReadO
315. perties As dialog appears 13 Specify the path where you want to store the file and enter the file name then click Save STEP RESULT AutoVue saves the results in a txt file 14 Click OK to close the Entity Properties dialog The Extents tab displays the orientation coordinates and center coordinates of the X Y and Z axes as well as the width height and depth measurements for any model or selection TASK 1 Select the part or parts for which you want to view Extents To select multiple parts press the Shift or Control key while selecting 2 To view the Extents of the entire 3D model make sure no parts are selected ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also make your selection after you open the Entity Properties dialog 3 From the Analysis menu select Show Entity Properties ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also right click in the workspace and select Show Entity Properties or in the Model Tree select the model part or parts then right click and select Show Entity Properties STEP RESULT The Show Entity Properties dialog appears 4 Click the Extents tab 162 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES PMI ENTITIES File Properties 5 You have three extents options a Select Transformed if you want to view the extents after you have transformed the model b Select UnTransformed if you want to view the extents of the model without transformation c Select Oriented if you want to view
316. r a part of a PCB Component density The quantity of components on a unit area of a PCB Component hole A hole in the printed circuit board that corresponds to a pin or wire of a component This hole serves the dual function of attaching the component to the board and establishing the electrical connection between the pin or wire and the remainder of the board circuitry ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 359 APPENDIX A EDA TERMS AND DEFINITIONS EDA Term Definition Component library A computer data file that contains the footprint patterns for a number of components Component side The uppermost or top layer of a board on which most components are placed Component silkscreen The silkscreen markings of the printed circuit board that appear on the component side The silkscreen is applied over the solder mask Component solder mask The colored usually translucent coating applied to the board over the etched copper It protects the selected areas from the soldering process Connection An unrouted partially routed or completely routed path between two pads In a net with n pads there are exactly n 1 connections Copper pour A method by which a copper zone is filled with a specified pattern with objects that cross the zone or lie within the zone being avoided Copper zone An area on a board designed to be covered by a layer of copper when manufactured Also known as a
317. r and menubar Clicking in the workspace saves the last modified state of the Note and closes the Note dialog 304 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS 3D SPECIFIC MARKUPS When creating multiple Note entities it is possible to group the entities Once the Note entities are grouped clicking on the group opens the last Note created TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Note ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Note STEP RESULT The Attach To dialog appears 2 Inthe Attach To dialog click the entity type that you want to attach the note to 3 Select the entity on the model that you want to attach a note to STEP RESULT The Note dialog appears 4 Enter the text that you want in the dialog From the File menu select Information STEP RESULT The Note Information dialog appears 6 To change the default font select Font and the type of font 7 Close the Note dialog STEP RESULT The note symbol appears on the entity and in the Markup Naviga tion Tree 8 Right click outside the note area to complete the modification ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To edit a note double click on the note ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Whenever an entity is attached to a 3D model the anchor point the point at which the entity is attached is highlighted by a small square The square is visible only when the anchor point is visible This feature allows you to prec
318. r file repeat steps 3 through 4 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can hide display certain overlays by selecting deselecting corresponding check boxes in the Visibility column 6 When done click OK to close the Overlays dialog RESULT The base file is displayed with the selected overlay files on top of it Modifying an Overlay TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Overlays STEP RESULT The Modify Overlay dialog appears Select the overlay that you want to modify Click the Action that you want to apply to the overlay Click Move if you want to move the overlay Click a point on the base file where you want to set the lower left corner of the overlay Click another point where you want to set the upper right corner of the overlay ADDITIONAL INFORMATION As you select the point to define the position of the upper right corner you can resize the destination box Click Scale if you want to resize the overlay Enter the XOffset and YOffset coordinates and or the Scale Factor ADDITIONAL INFORMATION XOffset and YOffset are relative to the base drawing and all options are displayed at their current values 64 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES Click Warp to adjust the overlay Click a point on the overlay and drag the cursor to where you want the overlay starting point Click another point and drag the cursor to where you want the overlay to end ADDITIONALINFORMATION
319. r ga See Adding a Leader Line Click and drag to draw a line From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Line A To draw a line and force it to be aligned to the closer axis horizontal or vertical press and hold theShiftkey while you click and drag See Aligning a Line Segment to the Vertical or Horizontal Axes 260 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Markup Entity Measurement Entity Information Create markup measure entities From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance Manas Avent Angle a Arc or Minimum Distance See Creating 2D non Vector Markup Measure Entities Creating 2D Vector Markup Measure Entities Creating EDA Markup Measure Entities Note Add a note to the markup From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Note See Adding a Note Polygon Click and drag to draw a polygon From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Polygon A Polyline Click and drag to draw a polyline From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Polyline a To force a line segment in a Polyline entity to be aligned to the closer axis horizontal or vertical press and hold the Shift key while you click and drag for that line segment See Aligning a Line Segment to the Vertical or Horizontal Axes Stamp Adds a Stamp to a document that includes specific documen
320. rching in a vector file select a text string from the list You can refine your search by selecting Match Whole Word Only or Match Case Click Find Next STEP RESULT AutoVue highlights the text and zooms into the text area For PDF files AutoVue highlights the text but maintains the current zoom level Click Close to close the Find dialog 2D Viewing Options From the View menu you can change how the active file is displayed in the workspace For example you can zoom into an area of the drawing magnify a part of the drawing and rotate a file s orientation clockwise counterclockwise You can access these options from the View menu The options are 52 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 2D FILES 2D VIEWING OPTIONS Zoom Menu Sub Menu Zoom Box Description Click and drag to draw a box around an object that you want to enlarge to fill the window From the Autovue toolbar right click in work space and select from pop up menu Zoom In Zoom in by a factor of 2 From the Auto Vue toolbar you can also click A Zoom Out Zoom out by a factor of 2 From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Q Zoom Previous Reverts to the previous zoom level From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Q You can also right click the workspace and select Zoom Previous Full Resolution Display the file at full resolution From the AutoVue toolbar
321. rchy If you select an entity that has multiple parents the Ascend Hierarchy dialog appears displaying the parent pages Select the Parent page you want to go to then click OK AutoVue returns to the selected parent page Ascend Hierarchy Please select a page 15 Channel CD Data Flow 17 Channel AB Data Flow 18 Channel EF Data Flow 20 Channel GH Data Flow Cancel NOTE You can also select the entity in the Entity Search dialog then right click and select Ascend Hierarchy Navigating using Descend Hierarchy Layers On the parent page of your schematic s design hierarchy select any hierarchical block in the workspace or in the Navigation Panel then from the View menu select Descend Hierarchy AutoVue opens the page with the selected child schematic You can also right click the hierarchical block in the workspace and then select Descend Hierarchy When working with EDA files Auto Vue lets you view all the physical layers and associated logical layers of the EDA drawing you can view all layer sets for that file or create your own Additionally from the Layers option you can manipu late certain layer attributes such as visibility color polarity and ordering To 96 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES LAYERS display the Layers dialog from the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Layers From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Layers 5 NOTE For
322. reated Author The name of the user who created the markup entity 226 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS FILTERING MARKUPS Property Description Last Modified The date and time the markup entity was last modified Page Page number of the original document on which the markup entity is created Layer Markup layer on which the markup entity is created When a markup entity is created it appears in the tree and the information is recorded and saved in the Markup file NOTE Hover your mouse over an entity to display its author and date properties Filtering Markups When viewing markups you have the option to filter the Markup files or enti ties that are displayed based on their metadata information To do so from the Markup menu select Filter and then select one of the following options By Author By Entity Types By Last Modified By Page and By Layer The Filter Markup Visibility dialog appears NOTE From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click Markup Filter To display markups created by a specific author click the Author tab and select the check box next to the author s name To remove an author s markup from the filter deselect the associated check box In the Markup Navigation Tree a filter icon appears in the Author column header e To display markups by entity type click the Markup Entity tab and select the check box next to the markup entity or entit
323. rectory paths for any external reference files associated with 2D 3D or EDA files Font The directory paths for fonts required by AutoVue s vector files Configuring XRef Paths XRef Paths are the directory paths for any external reference files associated with 2D 3D or EDA files TASK 1 2 From the Category tree expand General and then select XRef Paths Click Add STEP RESULT The Add Path dialog appears Enter the directory path or scroll to locate the directory where the external reference files are located To browse all subdirectories below the current path type two aster isks at the end of the file path For example C samples results in browsing all subdirectories below samples To browse one subdirectory below the current path type one asterisk at the end of the file path For example C samples results in browsing one subdirectory below samples Click OK ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To add more than one path to the list repeat steps 3 to 5 STEP RESULT The directory path appears 206 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL CONFIGURING AUTOVUE GENERAL OPTIONS To change the order select the path you want to move then click Up or Down to move the path to where you want it in the list To remove a path select the path and click Remove Click OK to close the Configuration dialog Configuring Font Paths Measurement Font Paths are the directory paths for fonts
324. rement dialog 13 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Measuring an Angle Use the Angle option to measure the precise angle between points on a drawing TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Angle ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Angle lt STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 2 Select From 3 Points if you want to measure the angle between three points The snapping modes are displayed STEP RESULT The snapping modes are displayed Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring 4 Select Between 2 lines if you want to measure the angle between two lines 5 From the Measured Angle Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the angle 6 Ifyou selected From 3 Points click three points on the drawing to define the angle If you selected Between 2 lines click two lines on the drawing to define the angle STEP RESULT Angle arms appear with an arc connecting them 7 Click again to complete the measurement STEP RESULT The measured line path measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measurement appears in theMeasurement Entities dialog To change the size of the arc click and drag it to the desired size To move the value box click and drag it to anywhere on the markup ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 279 MARKUPS CREATING 2D VECTOR M
325. rently displayed page The lower portion of the tab lists the associated net nodes for the selected nets All selected nets are highlighted on the drawing To select more than one net press the Shift or Control key while selecting Alternately in the Nets panel ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 23 AUTOVUE BASICS AUTOVUE GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE you can click and drag in the Navigation Panel list to select multiple nets The Nodes on Net panel lists the associated nodes for the selected nets nes Cosme Name Parti User LOG D14 No NO proje A D13 NO NO proje D12 NO NO proje D11 No NO proje D10 NO NO proje D1 No NO proje D0 NO NO proje CLRCNT NO No proje s JE gt Nodes on Net Name Net Pin Use Pads N RS 2 clk4 UNSPEC smps50 1 U23 9 CLK4 IN SMDSO 1 U22 13 CLK4 jout smD50 1 Components Nets Bookmarks 7 J Models Tab and Model Tree The Models tab displays the Model Tree The tree displays the model s hierarchy inter relation of different parts assemblies and bodies The tree also indicates if a required external reference XRef is missing With the tree you can select different parts and modify their attributes such as color visibility render mode or transformation See Displaying XRefs for more information on XRefs 24 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MAN
326. rk text or the page icon located to the left of the bookmark text Selecting Entities Selecting an entity or entities is often the first step to many of the operations that you perform with EDA files The following sections provide information on how to select entities from the workspace Navigation Panel and the Entity Search dialog To specify which types of entities you can or cannot select use the Entity Filter dialog See Filtering Entity Types for more information on the Entity Filter dialog Once an entity is selected you can zoom to it in the workspace and perform other operations with the EDA file 88 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES SELECTING ENTITIES From the Navigation Panel To select an entity from the Navigation Panel perform the following steps To select one entity click the component net associated pin or net node in the Navigation Pane To select multiple entities press the Shift or Control key while selecting The selected entity or entities are highlighted in the workspace If the selected entity is small a flash box appears indicating the location of the highlighted entity in the workspace See Zooming to a Selected Entity From the Workspace To select an entity from the workspace perform the following steps Click an entity in the workspace to select it To select more than one entity press the Shift or Control key while selecting The selected entit
327. rkup Navigation Tree Creating 2D non Vector Markup Measure Entities When marking up 2D non vector files in addition to all the markup options available for 2D files you can create markup measure entities The measure options in Markup mode work a bit differently than in View mode See 2D Specific Markups When measuring in Markup mode the specified measurement lines and values are displayed on the current active markup layer as entities These entities can be moved resized or deleted You can also modify the font of a measure entity align a free snap measure entity to the horizontal or vertical axis as well as add units of measure and symbols to a measurement and have them appear on the drawing NOTE When you are creating a markup entity you can press the Escape key to cancel Measure options vary between vector and non vector files For vector files AutoVue provides the option to snap to fixed points on the drawing For non vector files you can only free snap In Markup mode you can choose from several measure options to create markup measure entities From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Measurement to access the following measure options Option Description Angle Measure the angle between selected points From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Angle 2 Arc Measure an arc entity From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Arc a Area Meas
328. rom the Users list select the user that you want to grant control to 3 Click OK RESULT The user you selected has control of the Collaboration Session 352 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL REAL TIME COLLABORATION COLLABORATION SESSION Saving a Session Markup The Host owns the Session Markup and is the only one who can save it TASK 1 Atthe end of the Collaboration Session from the Markup menu select Save As STEP RESULT The Save Markup File As dialog appears 2 Enter the Markup ID ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Markup Information is optional 3 Click OK to save RESULT The session Markup is saved and appears as a markup note entity with the control history and chat transcript Closing a Session Only a Host can close a Collaboration Session TASK 1 From the Collaborate menu select Close Collaboration Session STEP RESULT The Save Markup dialog appears prompting you to save the Session Markup 2 Click Yes RESULT All users are notified that the Collaboration Session is closed ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 353 REAL TIME COLLABORATION COLLABORATION SESSION Requesting Control of a Session TASK 1 From the Collaborate menu select Request Control ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Collaboration status bar you can also click Request Control SS STEP RESULT The Controller receives a message that you have requested control 2 The Controller clicks OK RESULT Y
329. rom their respective lists and buttons The font changes are implemented Changing Measurement Units and Symbols You can change the unit of measure and add a symbol to a measurement and have it appear on the drawing TASK 1 2 Create the markup measure entity that you want Double click the measurement that you want to change the unit of measure or add a symbol to STEP RESULT The appropriate Measure dialog appears Deselect Display Unit check box if you want to hide the unit on the drawing It is selected by default From the Units list select the unit that you want to change the measurement to From the Symbol list select the symbol that you want to add to the measurement Click OK RESULT The unit of measure changes and the selected symbol is added to the measurement and appears in the workspace Using the Markup Entity Properties Dialog You can use the Markup Entity Properties dialog to modify markup entities TASK 1 Select the markup entity you want to modify To select multiple markup entities press the Shift or Control key while selecting 316 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES Line Color From the Markup menu select Format and then select Markup Entity Attributes ADDITIONAL NFORMATION You can also right click a markup entity in the Markup Navigation Tree or the workspace select Format and then select Markup Entity Attribute
330. rs and the layer attribute options you can modify visibility order color and polarity To modify the attributes for both physical and logical layers first select the layers you want to modify and then use the settings to make the changes you want When you select physical layers and modify settings from the Layers dialog a message displays at the bottom of the dialog to indicate your last action When you are satisfied with the changes click Apply to make the changes in the workspace You can also create layer sets to save your modified layer settings to reuse them later When you open a file it displays all layer sets for that file You can choose the layer set you need or create your own ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 97 WORKING WITH EDA FILES LAYERS Changing the Order of Layers You can change the order in which layers display in the workspace Specifically you can change the z order of layers TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Layers amp ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Layers STEP RESULT The Layers dialog opens 2 Ifthe Logical Layers section is not open click Expand 3 Select the layer or layers that you want to move To do so you can do one of the following Select a physical layer from the Physical Layers section Logical layers associated with the selected physical layer are also selected When you make ch
331. rts that are present in the newer file but not in the older file View Deletions Red Displays parts that are missing in the newer file but present in the older file View Unchanged Blue Indicates that there is no change between the newer file and older file The following steps describe how to compare files TASK 1 2 View the newer file From the Analysis menu select Compare STEP RESULT The Open dialog appears Enter the file name or browse to locate the file you want to compare with the newer file Click Open STEP RESULT AutoVue displays the Compare Tree and three windows The first window displays the newer file the second displays the older file and the third displays the comparison results To view the properties of a modified or moved entity in the newer file and in the older file select the modified or moved amp entity from the tree then right click and select Entity 1 Properties STEP RESULT The Entity Properties dialog appears displaying the properties of the entity in the base file ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 177 WORKING WITH 3D FILES COMPARING 3D FILES 6 Select the entity again then right click and select Entity 2 Properties STEP RESULT The Entity Properties dialog appears displaying the properties of the entity in the compare file 7 To compare the results of the entity in the newer file to the older file select the entity from tree th
332. s Option Description Decimal Digits Lets you specify the number of decimal digits displayed for each measurement Enter a number from 1 to 18 Default File Units Lets you specify the units to use for drawings when the drawings do not contain units Measurement Units Lets you specify the default unit to use for measurements Configuring the Base Font for Archive and Text Files The Base Font option lets you define the font properties for archive text and spreadsheet files TASK 1 From the Category tree expand General and then select Base Font 2 Select a font from the Font list 3 Select a font size from the Size list 4 Select the Bold option Italic option or both optionsto change the font style ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can see a preview of the text in the Sample area 5 Click OK to apply the font change and close the Configuration dialog Configuring AutoVue for 2D Files You can configure background color snap and overlay extents settings for 2D files TASK 1 From the Options menu select Configure STEP RESULT The Configuration dialog appears 208 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR 2D FILES Snap Settings 2 Select 2D in the tree STEP RESULT The 2D options appear In measurement mode when you move the cursor within a predetermined snap radius the snap box appears for the entity to be selected To change the
333. s TASK 1 Select the markup entity you want to change the fill color To select multiple markup entities press the Shift or Control key while selecting From the Fill Color list select the color that you want for the markup entity lt r ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Selecting Bylayer changes the markup entity color to the color of the layer Defining a Custom Color To define your own color take the following steps TASK 1 From the Fill Color list select Custom Color STEP RESULT The Color dialog appears 2 Select a color and click OK STEP RESULT The fill color changes for the selected markup entity or entities 3 Click OK to close the Markup Entity Properties dialog RESULT The fill type changes for the selected markup entity or entities 320 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES NOTE Any new markup entities that you create will have the new fill color Markup Layers You can move selected markup entities to a specific layer the markup entities will inherit the properties of the layer TASK 1 From the Markup Layer list select the layer you want to make active 2 Click OK to close the Markup Entity Properties dialog RESULT The selected layer appears in the workspace See Setting the Active Markup Layer Leader Alignment With the Leader markup entity you can adjust the location of the leader line s anchor point to the t
334. s STEP RESULT The Markup Entity Properties dialog appears Change the line color the selected markup entity or entities TASK 1 Select the markup entity or entities for which you want to change the line color From the Line Color list select the color that you want for the entity ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Selecting Bylayer changes the entity color to the color of the layer Click OKto close the Markup Entity Properties dialog Defining a Custom Line Color To define a custom line color take the following steps TASK 1 From the Line Color list select Custom Color FA STEP RESULT The Color dialog appears Select a color and click OK Click OKto close the Markup Entity Properties dialog ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you selected markup entities prior to specifying a custom color only the selected entities will have the new line color To apply the new line color to any new markup entity you create make sure no markup entity is selected before opening the Markup Entity Properties dialog RESULT The line color changes for the selected markup entity or entities ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 317 MARKUPS FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES Line Style Change the line style for a selected markup entity or entities TASK 1 Select the markup entity you want to change the line style To select multiple markup entities press the Shift or Control key while selecting 2 From the
335. s Giese eaaccte antereneteeease aiden ones 218 Modifying 3D Vie Wiren e Bsc eea cae Seca cena aoe cect oeoa rederi nn testre snes ai 218 Synchronizing Layers when Comparing Files ssssssssssssessessssssssssssssssssssssssesseneensenseneenseseeseeeeeeeee 219 Configuring Zoom Behavior when Cross Probing sesesssssseseseesssssssseocseesssssssseoseeesssssnssseseresees 219 Modifying CON ONS sisne a a a E E NE a SS N at 220 Enhanced Display OPtioNSii anann kann eect ore ete an E A TA 221 Configuring Background Colors for Graphic Files essessessssseesssssessecsecssscsscsssssecsscesscsncsscesseseeees 222 Configuring Background Colors for Desktop OFFICE cesssssessssssessssseesssssessesscssscseesnsssssnsescessesees 223 Mar k p Ssnin a e Rn couse rasta te Gand rasa ois tacts es tonnes esas 225 Markup Navigation Treeneri sickens cdessvedasenasdeshashacasbsvachegsvasva i iia E stsnedosele i int 226 Filtering Marku pS anian a R a E S 227 Ad HOC MAArKUD Shree Teresari ees dsavvcepsaihatpsivtcasbdaay ons Savenanedenceaiseiuaen A EEE SO IATE SE EEA TRESE aS 228 Guidelines for Marking Up or Redlining Attachments seesssssseeessesssssssssseseeessssssssosseeessessnssesseeesees 229 Web Client ECO Markups for Agile PLM 9 2 2 x OF 9 2 1 X ccscsssssssssesssessesnsssessncseessseseesneencensess 230 Web Client ECO Markups for Agile PLM 9 3 X sssssssssssseesssssssssssseeessesssssssssecseessosssssseeseeesossssssesse 231 Javea Client ECO Wear Uns ic
336. s and enables correct view of ECAD files For Example When an emp or emn file is selected for view or markup treat the file sent to the viewer applet is the same as MCAD files such as asm and prt files The following sections describe how to initiate cross probing in AutoVue Viewing a File for Cross Probing To view an appropriate file for cross probing TASK 1 Display the Attachments tab or the Files tab 2 Select a file row you want to work with and choose Web Client View gt View Java Client View File s STEP RESULT AutoVue opens and displays the selected file 3 In the AutoVue Analysis menu select Cross Probe STEP RESULT The File Open dialog appears 4 Use one of the following File Open dialog methods to select a file for cross probing Option Description Browse Browse your local directories to select and open files from the AutoVue window Agile Browse Use Agile bookmarks to open files from the Auto Vue window Agile Search Perform an Agile Quick Search to select and open files from the AutoVue window ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 107 WORKING WITH EDA FILES CROSS PROBING Browsing Local Directories to Select File You can browse your local directories to select an attachment file TASK 1 From the File Open dialog click Browse 2 Use the Look in drop down list to select the directory you want 3 Select the file you want and click Open 4 Click
337. s as the central reference point The Selected option is only available when one or more model parts are selected The Re Center All option repositions the entire model back to the center of the AutoVue workspace TASK 1 From the View menu select Re Center and then select All STEP RESULT The model is repositioned to the center of the workspace You can use an entity as a central reference point to reposition a model The entities are as follows Entity Description Vertex All vertices are highlighted Select a vertex to use as the central reference point A snap box appears when moving the mouse over a vertex 142 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES MODEL TREE Entity Description Edge All edges are highlighted Select an edge to use as the central reference point A snap box appears when moving the mouse over an edge Midedge Highlight all edges in the model Select a mid edge to use as the central reference point Arc Center Highlight all arcs and ellipses in the model Select an arc center to use as the central reference point A snap box appears when moving the mouse over an arc or ellipses indicating the center of the arc Face Select a face to use as the central reference point When moving the cursor along a model face the face is highlighted Re Centering a Model to an Entity Model Tree To re center a model to an entity perform the following
338. s column header to group by visibility Select the check box beside the layers that you want to display 158 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES ENTITY PROPERTIES 4 Deselect the check box beside the layers that you want to hide 5 Click OK to close the Select the Layers to Display dialog RESULT The selected layers are displayed Entity Properties You can view properties such as visibility color transparency mass properties and extents of a model or model parts General Attributes The Attributes tab displays a model or model part s attributes The list of attri butes varies depending on the model Some of the viewable General attributes are as follows Attribute Description Color Color of the selected model part Density The density of the model or selected model parts Name The model part name or the displayed page name of the model Render Mode The dynamic rendering used for displaying model or model part For example Shaded Shaded Wire and Wireframe Transparency The value between 0 and 1 representing the model or model part s degree of transparency 0 opaque 1 transparent Visibility The value True visible or False invisible for a model or model part If you are displaying the 3D view of an EDA design AutoVue displays the general attributes mentioned above In addition AutoVue displays attributes specific to the Printed Circuit Board PCB such as component
339. s dialog opens 2 From the Layer Sets list select the layer set you want to display 3 Click Apply STEP RESULT The selected layer set displays in the workspace 4 To restore the default layer set from the Layer Sets list select Default Click Close to close the Layers dialog ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can also view the layer sets from the Layers list beside the Layers button amp on the AutoVue toolbar Creating User Defined Layer Sets You can define a layer set and save it for the duration of the session The layer set you defined is added to the Layer Sets list in the Layers dialog and to the Layers list on the AutoVue toolbar By default the Top Bottom and Default layer sets and any other layer sets belonging to the file are listed in the Layer Sets list TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visibility Control and then select Layers ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Layers STEP RESULT The Layers dialog opens 2 Click Add STEP RESULT The Add Layer Set dialog appears 3 Enter the layer set name ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 103 WORKING WITH EDA FILES LAYER SETS 4 Click OK STEP RESULT The new layer set appears in the Layer Sets list 5 To modify the attributes of the new layer set select one or more layers and change the Visibility Order or Color 6 Click Apply to save the changes and to display the new layer set in the workspace 7
340. s option also applies when adding a Markup Measure entity to the PDF file ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 71 WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH PDF FILES Text Search NOTE For Angle and Arc entities only 3 point snapping is available See Measuring in 2D Files See Creating 2D Vector Markup Measure Entities You can perform a text search in vector based PDF files where the scanner performs Optical Character Recognition OCR AutoVue highlights the text search result in the workspace and maintains the current document zoom level If the text is very small AutoVue zooms in to the highlighted text If the text if outside the visible workspace area AutoVue scrolls pans to display the high lighted text See Searching Text Text Selection Copy You can select and copy text from a vector based PDF file where the scanner performs Optical Character Recognition OCR To do so highlight the text and then select Copy from the Edit menu alter nately you can use the shortcut key Ctrl C You can then paste the text to the Note markup entity or a third party application for example MS Word NOTE Note the following behaviors when copying text from a PDF file in AutoVue It may not be possible to copy text if the PDF file has a security restriction When copying text from PDF files AutoVue displays the text as it appears in the PDF That is Auto Vue inserts a line break if text continues to a next li
341. secesses 103 Deleting User Defined Layer Sets ssssssssssscssssscssccssesssecssecsessuscesccesesssscasesssecscessesssessscesceeseeses 104 Saving User Defined Layers Sets With Markup c ssscssscssccssecssecssccssesssecsccssecssecsscesseeseeeseerses 105 Manipulating EDA VIEWS sccz scc ucvaasseeceiscurrateaeotatrurectunute teasers asa a E aE NE e e s 105 BD VEW a A a A eae ha ne ee A NRS 106 EKOE PFO ISIN PEREA AEE EE E E E A EA EE ES 106 Initiate Cross Probihgzsenssngniennnennnimnenenn aan a a a iaia 106 Cross Probing in Web Client and Java Client s ssssssessssssceeseessssssssseoceeessossssseoseeesssesnssseseeesees 110 Cross Probing Between Two or More EDA Files c sesssssessssesssssecsessncesscescsesssessncesccsscescenseaseees 111 Cross Probing Between 2D and 3D Views of the Same File sssssssssssseesssssssssssceessssssssesseeesees 113 Showing the Net Connectivity when Cross Probing sssesssssssssssssssssssseesoeseesoeseesseseeseeseeeeeereeeee 114 Zooming when Cross Probing ssesssssssseeesssssssssssseecseesssssssseoseeessossnsssesseeeseeossssessereseresesssssseeseeesresss 114 Comparing a PCB with ArtWorkK sssissssvcsvessssivesevessssnsessivivensssecunssnate eeasoassxssanabe escouevenesapedboneibiepeiaeinseateaens 115 Generating Bill of Material BOM ccccsscsessssssssssccsssscssssssssussncsssssscsuscsscsussaccascescssssaecsncsaseasesecsusesseens 116 Design Verificati Nn ean nans eia E A a SEE Ea E Ee SEEE SiE S
342. sees 259 2D Specific MarkUpS anssen E A AN AASS 259 2D AV ear USE PACH Cl OS asaran raa aa e ARE aO a ise NE ean ERIE iras 260 Adding a Freestyle Entitas a a a n E ORN RONS 261 Aligning a Line Segment to the Vertical or Horizontal AX S cssssssccsscscsssecseecseccssesneesscess 262 AGING a ECAC SN sonnis Seas a ig enna gu sls nanan e genes 263 Creating 2D non Vector Markup Measure Entities cesessccssssseessscsessnssscsssssscsnsssessnssseeseesees 264 Creating chy St aM Peseiro aeaiee aiaia aan Sei iene acres oaaae otioti oaase naaede ataare aes 270 Creating 2D Vector Markup Measure Entities c cccsesssesssssccsessecsssssssssssscssscscsssssessnseasessesscessenscees 274 2D Ve tor Snapping Modes sisssesisissssssssoiiessiississcceersie ioris eesriie tn asnes oeit 275 M asuring DIStaniCe AEAEE A 276 Measuring Cumulative Distance cesesssssssssssssssessesscsncsssssscsscsuscsscssccnsssscsscesscsecssscasesscssceseesecens 277 Calibrating Dista CE sii assantonincasensaennnnsiannrinnsanena suntansnacmuaah AOAR 277 M as ring Atansi nannini R AEE REE E R eF 278 MEEA Ea AS ET E E E E E TOE E E E E E E S 279 Measuring an Af Cesena an dean E REAA aaa eE Ao ER eee ees 280 Calibrating an ATE matinee E EA E AE E sis 281 Creating EDA Markup Measure Entities cccsssssssssssecsssssessnssncsssssscsssssecsnssacssscsscssscsesnseaceensencessesees 281 EDA Snapping MOdES 5 cssxsiiexshssivarseissntesiniscrsniieaen esnin tek E Enin 282 Meas
343. select Line Color ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click Line Color Alternatively right click the entity in the workspace or Markup Navigation Tree select Format and then select Line Color STEP RESULT The Line Color dialog appears 3 From the Line Color list select the color that you want for the entity ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Selecting Bylayer Z changes the markup entity color to the color of the layer 4 To define a custom line color from the Line Color list select Custom Color Y 5 From the Color dialog that appears select a color and click OK 6 Click OK to close the Line Color dialog RESULT The line color changes for the selected markup entity or entities NOTE Any new entities that you create will have the new line color Changing Line Style The current line style is highlighted in the Line Style option TASK 1 Select the markup entity or entities for which you want to change the line style 2 From the Markup menu select Format and then select Line Style Select the new line style from the options provided RESULT The line style changes for the selected markup entity or entities ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 311 Markups FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES NOTE From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click Line Style zs Alternatively right click the entity in the workspace or Markup Navigation Tree select Format and then
344. select Line Style NOTE Any new entities that you create will have the new line style Changing Line Thickness The current line thickness is highlighted in the Line Thickness option TASK 1 Select the markup entity or entities for which you want to change the line thickness From the Markup menu select Format and then select Line Thick ness Select the new line thickness from the options provided The line thickness changes for the selected markup entity or entities ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click Line Thickness 5 Alternatively right click the entity in the workspace or Markup Navigation Tree select Format and then select Line Thickness To define a custom line thickness from the Markup menu select Format select Line Thickness and then select Customize STEP RESULT The Custom Thickness dialog appears In the Line Thickness field enter an integer value in pixels Click OK to close the Custom Thickness dialog ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Any new markup entities that you create will have the new line thickness 312 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES Changing Arrow Style AutoVue gives you the option to add an arrow head to certain markup entities For example you can change the arrow style of the line polyline arc freestyle and polygon markup entities TASK 1 Select the markup line entity or entities f
345. server and cannot be implemented on the client machine If the adminis trator is unable to resolve the issue please contact Oracle Corp General Inquiries Web Site http www oracle com us products applications auto Vue index html Blog https blogs oracle com enterprisevisualization Customer Support Web Site http www oracle com autovue index html ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 367 FEEDBACK My ORACLE SUPPORT AUTOVUE COMMUNITY My Oracle Support AutoVue Community Web Site https communities oracle com portal server pt Sales Inquiries E mail autovuesales_ww oracle com 368 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL Index Numerics 2D marku ps 259 markup entities 260 markups 249 measuring 73 non vector angle 78 arc 80 area 76 calibrating distance 76 129 192 266 277 285 298 distance 74 snapping modes 73 275 vector angle 79 arc 80 area 77 calibrating arc 81 134 195 269 281 289 301 vector files distance 75 non vector markup measure entities 264 text search 51 vector files 56 analyzing 66 comparing 67 displaying layers 57 displaying xrefs 58 manipulate 56 overlay 64 modify 64 remove 65 selecting blocks 58 vector markup measure entities 274 viewing options 52 pan and zoom window 55 selecting views 65 specifying a view point 66 369 working with 2D files 51 3D 3D views 155 advanced 3D search 187 b
346. sign using the Entity Search option To filter entities apply attribute or entity type filters as search criteria You can select entities from the results list to highlight them in the workspace and the Navigation Panel You can also export the search results to a csv file If the selected entity is small a flash box appears indicating the location of the highlighted entity in the workspace To open the Entity Search dialog from the Edit menu select Entity Search From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Entity Search If your sche matic has multiple pages a Defining Scope dialog appears Defining Scope Scope Current Schematic Page Entire Schematic Design Cancel Select Current Schematic Page to browse through only one page Select Entire Schematic Design to browse through all schematic pages Click OK after making your selection The Entity Search dialog appears Entity Search Entity Types Attributes Attribute Name v Add Filter Value v Attribute Value Entity Types Net Name Pin List Net Class 38 EC1 81C12 41 Unclassed 5 109 51012 8 Unclassed 6 1 9 21012 11 Unclassed 15 105 21C11 101 Unclassed 24 1011 41C8 41C Unclassed 25 EC1 10041 5 Unclassed 39 R3 1 R4 2 DA Unclassed 40 EC1 9 0A1 1 Unclassed POS EC1 13C9 10 Unclassed VNEG EC1 15C9 20 Unclassed 44 EC1 11A3 20 Unclassed NET19 1C11 1 ICT1 31 Unclassed DATA Fra 2171113
347. sion Markup ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 345 REAL TIME COLLABORATION POINTER Pointer The Pointer is the cross hair marker the Controller uses to point to a specific place in the file Session Information The Session Information option is available from the Collaborate menu during a Collaboration Session It displays the Session Subject the name assigned to the Collaboration Session the Session ID the name of the base file viewed the Host and the list of users participating Session Markup This is the Markup file created during the Collaboration Session All partici pants can add Markup entities to the Session Markup file NOTE Only the Host can save the Session Markup Save and Save As are disabled for all other users Show Presenter Window The Show Presenter Window option in the Collaborate menu is available to any user whose view is set to unlocked When you select Show Presenter Window from the Collaborate menu the Presenter Window appears displaying a bird s eye view of the base file viewed and the Markup changes done during the Collaboration Session When you use Show Presenter Window you can simultaneously track the Controller s base file view changes and everyone s markup changes in the Presenter Window while your main window display remains unaffected by 346 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL REAL TIME COLLABORATION COLLABORATION SESSION anyone s modifications It is like having a locked vi
348. snap radius change the value in the Snap Radius field The snap radius is configured in pixels NOTE You must restart the AutoVue client for the configuration to take effect Overlays Extents Settings When you add overlays AutoVue automatically tries to scale the overlay extents to match the base file extents If you wish to disable this behavior clear the Match Extents checkbox in the Overlays section of the 2D Configure dialog Configuring Colors The Colors settings let you modify colors for 2D files From the tree expand 2D and then select Colors to display the following options Option Description Background Change the color of the background for 2D files Measurement Modify the color you want displayed when taking measurements on 2D files ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 209 CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR 3D FILES Configuring AutoVue for 3D Files There are configuration options that you can set to customize the work environ ment when working with 3D files TASK 1 From the Options menu select Configure STEP RESULT The Configuration dialog appears 2 From the Category tree select 3D STEP RESULT The Rendering Dynamic Rendering and Frame Rate options appear Rendering The Rendering options let you modify the manner in which the model is rendered Changing these options affects the level of detailed displayed The Rendering options are Opt
349. snssscsnssscessssssnscsessnsescesscssesass 294 Adding TEX sscssciindinsendannncesnutincatunniseanenn EEEE Sr Ne EEE ESE S ESENTE 303 PO GING GNOCE wsevosasiessssaesaseteiascesansacsanannceacaiasuniboeaedrel inion mae laa on aim auans 304 Nesting Markup ERtities ijsscicasseassotrnsnnticniannannneiciinimdunatasiniguniendonenemnnn 305 Working with Markup Entities ssessscssssseccsscseesscssccsssscsnecsessssssessscsecssscsessnscasssnscaceseessesusesscsnsescessesees 306 GOTO a Mark p Ebi V scscisie costes aust wotscits a clas ich tet redaci a a ae 306 Selecting MarkupENVItiE Sise neii nei n t a a eia 307 M vinga Markup ENtity seisine eiaeia EE a NE N ns 307 Transforming Markup BRUGES asia civncaiccnind iron uomieiauadnemueannues 307 Rotating a selected Markup Entity sssssssscssssscssccssecssecseecssesssccsccescessscssesssecsscessesscessscsscersesses 307 Changing Object Orders enori e EA A A EOR ARONS 308 Hiding All Mark p Entities caiccricciaaccirectsnaaitsieeaacnnindn i tianeniaiandeneahbudieinennonate 308 Aiding MAF CUED Fil Szeenen iE e hasta ait eisai dann AES 309 Grouping and Ungrouping Markup Entities cccsssssesssssessscseessscsessncsncessssecsnssseesnsseeseesees 309 D leting Markup Entities ssni iat ase e vata iii ies 310 Formatting Markup Entity Properties ss ssesssssessessssseeeeereereereerserseeeeerereresreeeeereeeserrsersreseesessessessssssssssss 310 Changing LNE COl sacs nisssninaeanommeusneusensnaianemnanand
350. sscsscsseestesncencensees 167 Scaling a Model Along the X Y and Z AXiIS c ccsscssssssssesssesssseesecssessecsscesssescssssaecsnscssssncescesseaeeaes 168 Transforming a 3D Modeliseinsainessioiieria asti Sedu taedian costed bonedouediscalbanstnntaons 169 Transforming a Model Using Illustration ButtonS esssssssssssseeesesssssssssseocsesssssssssosseeessesssssesse 170 Resetting the Transformation Of a 3D Model sssssssssssssesseessssssssoeseeesssssssssesseeesessnsssssseeseessessss 170 Transforming a Model by Setting Values ssessssccsscsecssecssecseccssecssesseccsseesecsuecssesseeeseecscsueesseess 171 SCENT VUNG REA E EEE ENE E E 172 Section Plane OPti NSssisscesseanonnnannnn nann a a a 172 C t Options saarni erin tan eee Used cae IT Len eo ee eae Coe et oa 172 Defining the Section Plane and CUt through scsscssscsssssesscsssssssscssscseesnssasssssseeeseeseesnseecenees 173 ESI OGIIIC a there EE E EEEE A manvanancub audit E ebm 174 2 0 o1 O 8 i109 caeemrene tener leaia tents E E A S SON A in en Err arr inrT 174 Exploding as Model sasscsicociessstietnconeennconssennn inane iam noes 175 Saving an Exploded View of a 3D MOdel cssssssssssssssesssssssssssessssseesnsssessncescessesseessestecnseacessesees 175 Comparing 3D Files zaneo ninnan E basses tev Gar ie aad oH 176 Comparing 3D File Sarai neninn nen n din neh e eei SEN ESES 177 Comparing Entity SOUS pras sscev cased ccrseodopcss covessavapbeovudcabesdsonnvtcsenasohaeconsae
351. sseesseessssssssseeseeesessnsssossereserssnssssseeeereesressssseeseressesssssesse 329 Native Print Settings secede ccvstes cess becdecwasdavecs ars cs Genus c cocnscosscves Slesareeash decses iea soas ieaie iin Cuveeesnddbenceeewteertecs 329 WAG IAMS osc catstececsssctscascacheas a Ceosdia stalled ar iateatbeas a Alain E E EAN n ias 330 Adding a Watermark gijcacustaiiasneaurneiseao mana omadeoumam anne enna wiowauains 331 Assigning Pern Settings isise essensies siaressentsei nonsese ir ases eeane ars saecedlstaiscceneeleeiouaes 332 Creating a New P n Setting ieicecscissaccssecicccdasisesieadenscscsastaccisstesoeensessaanueataidiessanecedicaaahtasennboaldiocainecniaes 333 D l tinga Pen SSE EIN Ch a ieni eeen aea aa aiea EEEE S ES NESA S ISSER TE 333 Partial Preview ofa File issccciscrisas arctenrecuue a a a A r E E E A E 333 Previewing a File Before Printing cccsscsssssssssssscesssscsssnscsecsnssasessssucsascsscsnccasssscsecsssssecsuceaceasesecsssesesaes 334 Printing a File e ehscoscavepnsctseneesuasvesiaink scaya na EE RE E E E A R NARS 335 Batch Pree VELA gisan aE A E ENAN RAN SR aA RT 335 EAN SION EEEE EA E A E OEE E EE 337 CONVEFSION OPT ON S EE A ARE aie paces ATEA A E 337 Conv rting a SO WOE sscs secscinsescciseernupsensesssdeucresestoueaeatieneotesoagsruietionnsen iin earners musemnennmannorncnnits 338 PUD EEEE E AA AE NEE 339 DTe e V AEE EEEE AEA ONENE 339 C nve rtinga File ssiccensidedcaconaniaeanaienadananieaietsmteie E A EE Ra 34
352. ssssseseeesees 152 S tting Directional Lighting ssssessnissiasssiihsiiniiieiei nia esia i eito 153 Adding a New Light SOUrCE ss sseeesssssssssesseeessesssssssstecseesssssssseeseeessossnsssessteesreonssssesseeeereoesssssseeerresnssss 153 Changing the Light Properties ccssessssssessscsesssscssssecsecsncsssssscsessssssecsscessssscsscssecsuseacesssescessesesans 154 REmoOving a Light SOUNCE esssescisice cassadesuernsnrrsearstashetoaniiern A E AS 155 SDMEWS naerma tna a pion n a a a sli pd a dese E ania a ET T 155 DIAEA I E E AE E T A AE 155 Setting Standard or Camera VieWS ccscssssssssssssssssssssseesnsssessnssacssssseesusssessnceaccssssscssssaessnceacensesees 155 Setting Native VIEWS n s eieniiesiionn seise causnsausddacsicesincesupeseestupuslusseatehanwenesnonahitanenciets 156 Creating a User Defined VIE Waen E V A E AE S 156 Deleting a User Defined View cccssessssssscssssessssssesssssscsssssecsusssessnssassssssscssssssssussascsnceasesseseesnseseeasees 157 Displaying the Perspective Projection Of a 3D Model cssessssssssscsecssccssecseecsseeseesseesseeseeeses 157 Viewing a Model from a Particular View POINt secssssssssessscsssssssssessscstssucsacssscescesecsesncencensess 158 Configuring LA yOrs ois ctveieett ed te ect ieea lee an AEE aniisi eii E 158 Entity PROP GRU GS s5scz cuscissscasecsasscuscvsteapssavsansesenscavdasosns ited uowsatvvs svi uavease se eria sana oes tusoas va Daou dussiienavastonvobus 159 General Attn D
353. surement dialog Calibrating Distance Calibrate the distance measurement TASK 1 2 Measure distance between two points or measure cumulative distance From the Distance tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Distance Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 129 WORKING WITH EDA FILES MEASURING IN EDA FILES 3 From the Units list select the unit to which you want to calibrate the distance 4 Select Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance to a value 5 Select Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance by a factor 6 Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration result appears in the Measurement dialog 7 Click Close to close the Distance tab Measuring Minimum Distance Use the Minimum Distance option to measure the minimum distance between two nets TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure oe INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure load STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears 2 Click the Min Distance tab 3 To measure the minimum distance between entities that are not on the same physical layer select Across Layers ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If a physical layer does not exist this option deter mines whether or not the minimum distance should be calculated across logical layers 4 Select First Set to select the entities that you want to m
354. suring an Angle Use the Angle option to measure the angle between points on a drawing TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure er ONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure pm STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears 2 Click the Angle tab 3 From the Angle Definition section select one of the following From 3 Points Measure the angle between three points Between 2 Lines Measure the angle between two non parallel lines 4 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring To select all snapping modes click All On To deselect all snapping modes click All Off See EDA Snapping Modes 5 Select Between 2 Lines if you want to measure the angle between two lines 6 From the Measured Angle Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the angle 7 Ifyou selected From 3 Points click three points to define the angle 132 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH EDA FILES MEASURING IN EDA FILES 8 Ifyou selected Between 2 Lines click two lines to define the angle ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To take another measurement click Reset STEP RESULT Angle arms appear with an arc connecting them The angle measurement appears in the Measurement dialog 9 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Measuring an Arc Use the Arc option to define or select an arc in the drawing and measure its arc length start and end of angle sweep radi
355. t STEP RESULT The measured line path measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measurements for arc center coordinates radius diameter ratio arc length start and end of angle and sweep appear in the Measurement Entities dialog 10 To move the value box click and drag it to anywhere on the markup 280 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS CREATING EDA MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES 11 To resize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement 12 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Calibrating an Arc TASK 1 Measure an arc in the drawing 2 From the Arc tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Radius Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance 3 From the Units list select a unit of measurement to which you want to calibrate the distance 4 Click Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate to a value Click Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate by a factor 6 Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration results appear in the Arc tab 7 Click Close to close the Measurement dialog Creating EDA Markup Measure Entities When marking up EDA files in addition to all the markup options available for 2D files you can create markup measure entities The measure options in Markup mode work slightly different than in
356. t it appears in the same state as when it was last saved If disabled view of the design may differ if child components were revisioned that is standard Agile BOM resolution logic is followed You can select any document revision for viewing including a pending revision If the CAD Revision attribute is enabled when viewing a pending revision all active pending revisions that were saved from CAD will be displayed within the structure All AutoVue operations support CAD Structure file types including View Markup Compare Cross Probe Overlay and Digital Mockup Using the Version Browser When a File Folder object is open in Web Client you can view object version information by selecting View All Versionsfrom the Action menu When a Design object is open you can view Design version revision informa tion by selecting View All Versions from the Action menu Switching Versions of a Design Object in Web Client To switch between versions of a Design object in Web Client from the Version drop down list at the top of the Design object select the version revision you want to view NOTE A version number in brackets for example 4 indicates a version that has not yet been checked in That is for example when version 3 was checked out a pending version 4 was created Selecting 4 from the drop down list allows you to view and work with the pending version Select View All Version from the Actions menu to open the
357. t and user information metadata pulled directly from the DMS ERP PLM UCM system From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Stamp 2 See Creating a Stamp Text Add text to the markup From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Text AL See Adding Text Adding a Freestyle Entity You can create a freestyle markup entity You have the option of making the entity non contiguous or contiguous Creating a Contiguous Freestyle Entity TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Freestyle ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Freestyle ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 261 MARKUPS 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS 2 Click a point on the drawing where you want to start the Freestyle entity Move the cursor to create the Freestyle entity 4 Right click to end the Freestyle entity Creating a Non Contiguous Freestyle Entity TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Freestyle ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Freestyle De 2 Click a point on the drawing where you want to start the Freestyle entity Move the cursor to create the Freestyle entity 4 Clicka point on the drawing where you want to interrupt the Freestyle entity 5 Click another point on the drawing where you want to restart the Free style entity ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can int
358. t continuously refining Dynamic Load Mesh Resolution Control the initial resolution with the Dynamic Load Mesh Resolution slider When you select Dynamic Loader you can control the initial resolution by setting the Dynamic Load Mesh Resolution When you set the Dynamic Load Mesh Resolution to High the file displays at a higher resolution when you zoom resulting in a smoother look For more information refer to the Installation and Configuration Guide With the Initial Visibility options you can specify the visibility of model parts when first opening a 3D file Option Description Default Visibility Load model with default visibility options All Visible Force all parts ON in the display All Invisible Force all parts OFF in the display To display model parts select the part s from the Model Tree 212 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL CONFIGURING AUTOVUE CONFIGURING AUTOVUE FOR 3D FILES PMI Initial Visibility PMI Filtering With the PMI Initial Visibility option you have the option to set a threshold for the number of PMIs to display for large models To do select the Don t display PMI for large models check box and then enter the number of PMIs to display in the PMI Threshold field From the tree expand 3D and then select PMI to display the PMI options The PMI Filtering options let you configure which types of product and manu facturing information to display The check boxes in the Tr
359. t segment segment points connecting the connecting the connecting the point and the point and the arc point and the line plane Line Distance between The line and axis The distance two lines must be parallel between the line Distance between and the plane NOTE The lines i the line and arc must be parallel NOTE The line axis must be parallel to the plane Arc Distance between Distance between Center the axes of the the arc axis and arcs the plane NOTE Arc planes NOTE The plane must be parallel and the arc plane must be perpen dicular Plane Distance between the two planes NOTE The planes must be parallel TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add Entity Measurement and then Distance ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities dialog appears 2 From the Measured Distance Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance 3 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring ADDITIONAL INFORMATION See 3D Snapping Modes for more information STEP RESULT All entities of the selected entity types are highlighted on the model ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 297 MARKUPS 3D SPECIFIC MARKUPS 4 Onthe model select the entity you want to measure from ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you want to take more than one measurement from the same starting point se
360. t the unit in which you want to measure the area 6 From the Perimeter Units list select the unitin which you want to measure the perimeter 7 To cumulate a Net Area Result of different areas select Add in the Measurement Entities dialog 8 To subtract an area from the Net Area Result select Subtract 9 Select Clear to clear the Net Area Result field 10 If you selected Between Points click points on the drawing to define the area STEP RESULT Each point is joined by a line and the measurement appears in the Measurement Entities dialog 11 If you selected Shape click the edge of a predefined shape on the drawing STEP RESULT The shape is highlighted 12 Right click to complete the measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement STEP RESULT The measured line path measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The area and perimeter measurements appear in the Measurement Entities dialog 13 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog 286 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS CREATING EDA MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES Measuring an Angle Use the Angle option to measure the angle between points on a drawing TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Angle ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Angle 2 STEP RESULT The Measurement Entities d
361. tained check box If the check box is deselected then an entity only has to match one dimension in order to appear in the Results list ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 187 WORKING WITH 3D FILES PERFORMING AN ADVANCED 3D SEARCH 10 Enter the minimum and maximum dimensions in their respective fields From the Units list select the unit you want to set for the Volume dimensions To search for entities by location select the Enabled check box ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you want to search for entities that match all three dimensions select the Fits completely check box If the check box is dese lected then an entity only has to match one dimension to appear in the Results list From the Units list select the unit you want to set for the Location dimensions Enter the dimensions for Point 1 and Point 2 Click the 3D Search tab Click Search STEPRESULT Alist of entities matching the search criteria appears in the Results list Click Close to close the Entity Search dialog Saving Search Results TASK 1 Perform a 3D entity search 2 Click Search STEPRESULT A list of entities matching the search criteria appear in the Results list displaying the type and name 3 To save the results click Export STEP RESULT The Save As dialog appears 4 Specify the path where you want to store the file and enter the file name then click Save RESULT AutoVue saves the results in a csv Comma Separat
362. tance Use the Distance option to measure the distance between two vertices edges arc axes faces or any combination of these entity types The following table details how the distance between two entities are measured using snapping modes 190 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES MEASURING IN 3D FILES Snapping Vertex Line Arc Center Plane Mode Entities Vertex Distance The shortest The shortest The shortest between two segment segment segment points connecting the connecting the connecting the point and the point and the arc point and the line plane Line Distance between The line and axis The distance two lines must be parallel between the line Distance between and the plane NOTE The lines i the line and arc must be parallel NOTE The line axis must be parallel to the plane Arc Distance between Distance between Center the axes of the the arc axis and arcs the plane NOTE Arc planes NOTE The plane must be parallel and the arc plane must be perpen dicular Plane Distance between the two planes NOTE The planes must be parallel TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ae one INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure STEP RESULT The Measurementdialog appears 2 Click the Distance tab 3 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring ADDITIONAL INFORMATION See 3D Snapping
363. te and chose not to set password when you click OK a confirmation dialog appears asking if you are sure you do not want to set a password 8 From the Users list select the users that you want to invite ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Users list shows all users connected to the AutoVue server ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 347 REAL TIME COLLABORATION COLLABORATION SESSION 10 11 Click Add ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To remove a user select the user from the Invited list and click Remove STEP RESULT The user you selected appears in the Invited list To designate a user as an Observer select the check box under Invited Click OK RESULT AutoVue goes into Collaboration mode and the session is started The user or users that are invited receive a tooltip notification that he or she has been invited to join the session The notification message indicates the Session Name File and Initiator Changing a User s Layer Color of a Session TASK 1 In the Initiate Session dialog click Layer Color STEP RESULT The Layer Color dialog appears 2 Select a Layer Color from the list or select Let user choose if you want the user to choose their own color 3 Click OK STEP RESULT In the Initiate Session dialog the selected layers color appears beside the Username in the Invited list RESULT If you selected Let user choose a custom color icon appears beside the User name indicating that the color can be c
364. te or Hyperlink ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Note or Hyperlink Ys RESULT In the Markup Tree the selected markup entity appears as a child of the Box parent entity 3D Specific Markups When marking up 3D files you can attach text or a note as well as create markup measure entities The measure options in Markup mode work slightly different than in View mode NOTE When you are creating a markup entity you can press the Escape key to cancel ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 293 MARKUPS 3D SPECIFIC MARKUPS 3D Markup Entities You can create many different types of markup entities To access the markup entities from the Markup menu select Add Entity The markup entities are Option Description Text Add text to the markup From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click 3D Text Ge See Adding Text Attachment Add an attachment entity to the markup From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Attachment N See Adding an Attachment Hyperlink Click the workspace to attach a hyperlink From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Hyperlink w See Adding a Hyperlink Measurement Create markup measure entities From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance am Areata Angle Arc Boor Minimum Distance lanes k See Creating 3D Markup Measure Entities Note Add a note to the markup Fro
365. te will have the new fill type Changing Fill Color TASK 1 Select the markup entity or entities for which you want to change the fill color From the Markup menu selectFormat and then select Fill Color ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the Markup Properties toolbar you can also click Fill Color Alternatively right click the entity in the workspace or Markup Navigation Tree select Format and then select Fill Color STEP RESULT The Fill Color dialog appears From the Fill Color list select the color that you want for the markup entity P ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Selecting Bylayer changes the mark p entity color to the color of the layer it is on and selecting Line Color assigns the same color as the markup entity s line To define a custom line color from the Line Color list select Custom Color Y From the Color dialog that appears select a color and click OK STEP RESULT The fill color changes for the selected markup entity or entities Click OK to close the Fill Color dialog ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Any new markup entities that you create will have the new fill color 314 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS FORMATTING MARKUP ENTITY PROPERTIES Assigning a Markup Entity the Same Color as the Layer Changing Font TASK 1 Select the markup entity or entities for which you want to assign the color of the layer that they belong to To assign the line color From the Markup m
366. tems Search Parameter Enter a text string or a number Agile PLM searches the object ID number attribute and the object Name or Description attribute A Quick search behaves like a Contains search for text strings The search criteria is treated as a single string and Agile PLM searches for names or descriptions that contain the search parameter string In the case of ID numbers Agile PLM searches for an exact match however you may use wildcard characters to specify part of an ID number as a search criteria Search Attachment Content Set this parameter to Yes to search the contents of the attachment files as well 3 In the Search Results table click the next to the object number to expand the list of attachment files for that object 4 Click a revision row or a version row to select the file you want to view Click Load File STEP RESULT The selected file name appears in the File Name field of the File Open dialog 6 Click OK in the File Open dialog RESULT The Viewer opens the selected file or if appropriate adds the selected file to the current analysis function ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 109 WORKING WITH EDA FILES CROSS PROBING Cross Probing in Web Client and Java Client To run cross probing TASK 1 Display the Attachments tab or the Files tab 2 Select both file rows you want to work with and choose 9 2 2 x or 9 2 1 x Web Client View gt Cross Pro
367. that item to open the Redlines page On the Affected Items tab click the Do Redlining icon or Has been redlined icon next to the item to open the Redlines page On the Redline Attachments tab click the Do Redlining icon or Has been redlined icon on the row of the file you want to redline This icon appears only when markups are allowed Add your markups to the attachment ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ECO markups are saved against and associated with the pending revision of the item If the ECO is released without first replacing the file the markups appear against the released revision of the item e To ad hoc markup or redline an attachment file from a File Folder object in the Web Client a On the Files tab of a file folder object click the Do Redlining icon or Has been redlined icon on the row of the file you want to redline This icon appears only when markups are allowed Add your markups to the attachment ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Ad hoc markups are saved against and associ ated with the version of the file folder object 230 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS GUIDELINES FOR MARKING UP OR REDLINING ATTACHMENTS Web Client ECO Markups for Agile PLM 9 3 x NOTE Ifthe item has already been redlined then the Has been redlined icon is displayed for that item row in the Affected Items table An icon appears on the Redline Attachments tab to indicate that the attachment in that row has been redlined To
368. the Attachments tab select the required attachment row 42 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL AUTOVUE BASICS OPENING AGILE ATTACHMENT FILES 2 From the tab menu select Menu and then View Versions STEP RESULT The Versions dialog appears 3 From the Versions dialog select the required row then select the Get View or Print from the dialog menu ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Optionally select two version rows and then choose Compare or Overlay from the View action button drop down menu Switching Between File Folders Version in Java Client To switch between versions of file folders from an object s Attachments tab in Java Client TASK 1 From the Attachments tab select the required attachment row 2 Click Show Versions STEP RESULT The Versions dialog appears Select the version rows that you want to access 4 Click the appropriate action Get Open View or Print ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Optionally click the Has Been Redlined icon to open AutoVue and to display the redlines Select two version rows then select either Compare or Overlay from the View action drop down menu ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 43 AUTOVUE BASICS OPENING AGILE ATTACHMENT FILES 44 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL Comparing Comparing Files In Agile a file comparison is initiated from either the File tab of the File Folders or from the Attachments tab of business objects NOTE For detailed information on f
369. the attachment entity in the tree select Attach ment and then select one of the following Editing an Attachment Open The attachment opens in AutoVue If A new applet window was selected while attaching the file it will open in a new AutoVue window If Current applet window was selected while attaching the file it will open in the current AutoVue window Open With You have the option to open the attachment with AutoVue or its Associated Application TASK 1 In the Markup Navigation Tree right click the attachment and select Edit or double click the markup entity STEP RESULT The Attach File dialog appears Make your changes and click to OK STEP RESULT The dialog closes and modifications are implemented Adding a Hyperlink A hyperlink is a link between the current file and a new file a third party soft ware applicaiton ora Web page URL You can create hyperlinks in your current file so that your outside files software applications and Web pages only a click away The main benefit of adding hyperlinks is that the files are accessible from one location but the information is referenced not duplicated This ensures a manageable file size when loading If changes need to be made to a linked file they need to be done in one location the linked file itself ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 251 Markups MARKING UP 2D AND 3D FILES Creating a Hyperlink TASK 1 From the Markupmenu select
370. the file Opening Agile Attachment Files form the Viewer Window When the AutoVue window is open you can use the viewer menus to select additional Agile files For many viewer functions this is a preferred method when compared to pre selecting the files in the Agile client The available Auto Vue menu options that allow you to select another attach ment file are as follows NOTE The list of available Auto Vue menu selections for an Agile attachment file varies These menu options are dependent on the function originally selected in the Agile PLM when Auto Vue was opened that is View Compare or Overlay were selected and the file type of the currently viewed file As a result some of the following menu options may not be available to choose in a specific viewer session File gt Open URL Analysis gt Compare e File gt Import File as Overlay only available if a 2D file is active e File gt Import File for Mockup only available if a 3D model is active e Analysis gt Cross Probe Selecting one of these menu options opens the File Open dialog From this dialog you can select a file to view or to add to the current analysis view The Agile Browse button in the dialog allows you to use your Agile bookmarks to select a file The Agile Search button in the dialog allows you to perform a quick search and select a file 34 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL AUTOVUE BASICS OPENING AGILE ATTACHMENT FILES Select an Attach
371. the mouse in a different direction Clicking on an axis sphere allows rotation around one of the other two axes Move the mouse to rotate the model by the selected axis ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you want to rotate the selection freely as done in Rotate Mode press the Control key during rotation To exit Manipulate mode click Manipulate 2 or from the Manipu late menu select Manipulate ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To restore the default state of a part of the model from the Manipulate menu select Transform and then select Reset Selected To restore the default state for the whole model select Reset All Scaling a Model Along the X Y and Z Axis TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Manipulate ae INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Manip ulate 3 STEP RESULT You are now in Manipulate mode 2 Select the model part or parts that you want to scale ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To select more than one part press the Shift or Control key while selecting STEP RESULT A model size representation of the Global Axes appears through the model part or parts and are encased by a three dimensional box 3 Clickand drag a corner cube of the box up or down to scale the selected model part 4 To exit Manipulate mode click Manipulate z or from the Manipu late menu select Manipulate RESULT To restore the default state of a part of the model from the Manipulate menu select Transform and t
372. then click Open ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To add more files to the list repeat steps 2 to 3 To remove a file s select the file from the List of files to be printed and click Remove STEP RESULT The files appear in the List of files to be printed Click Print in the Batch Print dialog STEP RESULT The Print Properties dialog appears Configure the print properties Click OK to print STEP RESULT The Print Progress dialog appears It displays document name number of pages and printing status OK Canceled or Printing When the print job completes the dialog remains open and displays the print status of each job paas Printing documents W 2d Visio V2000 Visio_Samples Flowchart Audit Flo 1 1 W 2d Visio V2000 Visio_Samples Flowchart Auto ay 2 2 W 2d Visio V2000 Visio_Samples Flowchart Basic Flow WE W 2d Visio V2000 Visio_Samples Flowchart Cause an m F W 2d Visio v2000 isio_Samples Flowchart Datafiow 1 2 inting W 2d Visio V2000 Visio_Samples Flowchart Horizontal S W 2d Visio V2000 Visio_Samples Flowchart Hoshin Flo W 2d Visio V2000 Visio_Samples Flowchart IDEFO Dia SS ss Sai D pe wre T lt m Cancel Job To cancel a print job select a check box to the left of the file and click Cancel Job s ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Clicking the dialog close icon minimizes the Batch
373. tity you can press the Escape key to cancel In Markup mode you can choose from several measure options to create markup measure entities From the Markup menu select Add Entity and then select Measurement to access the following measure options 274 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS CREATING 2D VECTOR MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES Option Angle Measure the angle between selected points From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Angle Description Measure an arc entity From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Arc g Area Measure a selected area From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Area l Distance Measure the distance between two points From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance x i l 2D Vector Snapping Modes The available snapping modes allow you to click to precise geometrical points on a drawing For example if you select Snap to End Point and you move the cursor over an end point of a line the end point will be highlighted by a snap box The snapping modes allow you to snap to the mid center and end points of an entity Button Snap to Description a End point Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when moving the cursor near a linear component s end point Mid point Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when acl moving the cursor near the halfway point of a linear component
374. trical points on a drawing For example if you select Snap to End Point and you move the cursor over an end point of a line the end point will be highlighted by a snap box The snapping modes allow you to snap to the mid center and end points of an entity ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 73 WORKING WITH 2D FILES MEASURING IN 2D FILES ao Button Snap to Description End point Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when moving the cursor near a linear component s end point acl Mid point Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when moving the cursor near the halfway point of a linear component Center point Geometric snap mode where a snap box appears when moving the cursor near the center of an elliptical component x Free snap Allow snapping at any point on the drawing NOTE When selecting a snapping mode you also have the option to select all snapping modes All On or to turn off snapping modes All Off The below table lists snapping locations for certain measurements Measurement Snapping Location Area Snaps to a shape on the drawing Arc Snaps to an arc on the drawing Angle Snap to two non parallel lines Distance in non Vector Files Use the Distance option to measure the distance between two specific points TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click
375. ts generate BOM perform intelligent measurements analyze nets and components set enhanced display options and global transparency and much more For information on the available features for EDA files refer to the following sections Navigation Panel The Navigation Panel displays by default on the left hand side of the AutoVue workspace when you view a drawing For example when viewing an EDA drawing it allows you to navigate through a list of component instances nets and the associated pins and net nodes pins connected to a net present in the current schematic drawing or Printed Circuit Board PCB design NOTE To hide or display the Navigation Panel click ig The columns displayed in the Navigation Panel are determined by the profile of the entity types in the current schematic drawing or PCB design Lists can be sorted in order to group similar component instances ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 83 WORKING WITH EDA FILES NAVIGATION PANEL mation Components va Components RefDes Part Type Location U4 BOFPCE 29 0001 C1 CAPAE1 51 0001 C2 CAPC321 7 00001 C3 CAPC321 7 00001 C4 CAPC321 7 00001 U1 SOP63P 50 0001 U2 SOP63P 50 0001 SSOP50 _ 50 0001 SSOP5O 50 000 RESC16 7 0000 RESC16 7 00001 R2 RESC16 7 00001 R1 RESC16 7 00001 RN1 RESCAX 9 00001 RN2 RESCAX 9 00001 RN3 RESCAX 9 00001 RN4 RESCAX
376. ttributes tagged as Hidden during Stamp design also display in the DMS Attributes dialog The dialog contains three columns that include attribute values defined in the design stage The Name column displays the attribute name as defined in the design stage It either displays the backend DMS ERP PLM UCM system defined attribute name or the user defined name The Value column displays the value that is currently on the Stamp The Value from DMS column displays the value assigned from the backend system 2 To modify any value of the Stamp double click the Value cell corre sponding to the attribute If the attribute does not have Edit permissions the value cannot be modified If the attribute is defined as Hidden then the attribute is displayed in the DMS Attributes dialog You may edit the value of a Hidden attribute but it does not display in the workspace If the attribute is a non constrained list then you may either select a value from the list or enter your own value If the attribute is a constrained list you may only select from the list If the attribute is a multi valued list then you may select a value from the list AutoVue appends this value to any pre existing values using a semi colon as a separator ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 273 MARKUPS CREATING 2D VECTOR MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES If an attribute is defined with Hidden permissions then the value from the DMS column reflects the
377. umber of different view options For example you can zoom into an area of the drawing magnify a part of the drawing and rotate a file s orientation clockwise counterclockwise When viewing 2D vector files you have access to entity information views saved in the drawing and the ability to intelligent snap when performing measurements All the information is obtained by AutoVue by referencing various sources either internal files or external reference files that are located outside the file In addition to the features mentioned this chapter provides detailed informa tion on how you can modify AutoVue to suit your needs and preferences through a broad range of configuration options Searching Text You can perform a text search on 2D vector and text based documents AutoVue provides search options that you can use to customize a search These options are as follows NOTE You cannot perform a text search on raster files ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 51 WORKING WITH 2D FILES 2D VIEWING OPTIONS Option Description Match Whole Word Only Match a complete word Match Case Search for a word or text string with specific capitalization Search backward in the document Down Search forward in the document From the Edit menu select Find Text STEP RESULT The Find dialog appears Enter the word or phrase that you want to find in the Find What field ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you are sea
378. ure a selected area From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Area gt 264 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL MARKUPS 2D SPECIFIC MARKUPS Option Description Distance Measure the distance between two points From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance Measuring Distance Use the Distance option to measure the distance between two specific points See Changing Measurement Units and Symbols Changing Font TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Add entity select Measurement and then select Distance ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The Measurement Entities dialog appears From the Markup Entity toolbar you can also click Distance lt 2 Fromthe Measured Distance Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the distance Click a point on the drawing to define the starting point 4 Click another point on the drawing to define the end point STEP RESULT The measured line path appears as an entity on the current active markup 5 Move the cursor and click a location on the drawing to display the measure distance STEP RESULT The measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measured distance Delta X and Delta Y appear in theMeasurement Entities dialog 6 To resize the value box select it and then click and drag the frame handles 7 Youcan click and drag the text box anywhere on t
379. urfaces are have a reflective sheer to accentuate the model s shadows Reflective Wire An outlined solid model constructed of planes and surfaces The outline is a solid line and the model s surfaces have a reflective sheer to the model s shadows Changing the Render Mode To change the render mode of the selected model or model parts perform the following TASK 1 From the Manipulate menu select Visual Effects and then select Rendering ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Render Mode STEP RESULT Render mode options are listed 2 Select a render mode from the list STEP RESULT The selected render mode is highlighted RESULT The model or selected model parts change to the selected render mode Changing the Visibility You can choose to show or hide selected parts this can be done from either the Model Tree or the workspace From the Model Tree deselect the check box beside the model part or parts that you want to hide Conversely select the check box beside the model parts that you want to set visible RESULT The selected model parts appear or disappear from the model 150 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL WORKING WITH 3D FILES DISPLAY ATTRIBUTES NOTE You can also hide model parts by selecting them on the model or from the Model Tree then right clicking and selecting Hide Part Selecting Hide Rest displays the selected model parts and h
380. us center and diameter TASK 1 From the Analysis menu select Measure oo INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Measure B STEP RESULT The Measurement dialog appears 2 Click the Arc tab 3 Select From 3 Points if you want to measure the arc between three points Snapping modes are displayed 4 Select the snapping modes that you want to use for measuring To select all snapping modes click All On To deselect all snapping modes click All Off See EDA Snapping Modes Select Arc Entity if you want to measure a predefined arc 6 From the Arc Information section select the unit in which you want to measure the distance of the arc 7 From the Measured Angle Units list select the unit in which you want to measure the angle 8 Ifyou selected From 3 Points click three points to define the arc STEP RESULT The points are joined by an arc The measurements for center point coordinates radius diameter arc length start and end of angle and sweep appear in the Measurement dialog ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 133 WORKING WITH EDA FILES MEASURING IN EDA FILES 10 If you selected Arc Entity click the edge of the arc that you want to measure ADDITIONAL INFORMATION To take another measurement click Reset STEP RESULT The arc is highlighted The measurements for center point coordi nates radius diameter arc length start and end of angle and sweep appear in the Measurement
381. ute Sinnani a acct le eet E A cael ashen aice 159 Viewing AttriDUtES moreen eenonsh sin esena EE eoi edes noino N Eas ESEE Ee eRe a Ne 160 Viewing Mass Properties wunitcacasades evade cinch tanta codeine a a a a ai 160 Configuring MASS Properties ccscesssessesssccsessesssessecsscssessncssccsccssecsssaessucescesscseecsessecsuscaceascescsneeseeses 161 Viewing EXt Nnts niscintrona ir irani ddan aa iaae ae i eae aes 162 File PFODeMIES lt nargacuauucondin aver E R E AA R O SEN 163 PMI ENtItE Sicer aneian aas esee nean N a eaer eane enasini Sie ooie 163 PRUE BOM u n a a a oa haart Ne nse E AS 164 Aligning toa IVP ENMU ssns anani ana e eiai iers 164 Go to a Displayed PMI Entity ssssessesesseesessessessesssssessessessessessesnssssssessessnssssssssssenssssenseneenesseseeseeeeeee 164 PMI Configuration Entities ss eesessssssssssoseeesssssssseoseeeseessnsssssseeseeessosssssoeseerosesnssssesseeeseosnsssssseeeeesressss 165 PMI FY PO rinks s sccsrescsscsustsnttesstanssonescescstesonctusnticansteqcscdesnsaseuchvnsdoseetbcassscn cncdhenauptasgsvoenacadussdaytnetssaplonmnidens 166 Manipulating a 3D Model ssssssssssssseseesssssssssesseessssssssseeseeeseessossssseesseeossssssssesseeesressssssesseeesresnsssssseeeresressss 166 Panning a Model Along the X Y and Z AXiS cccsessssssssseessssseesncssssssssecsssssesnscsecsnccecssseseesncenceasees 167 Rotating a Model Along the X Y and Z AXIS sessessssssssseesssssessscsssssscsecssecsessnccace
382. ve 6 Click the first entity to define the starting point 7 Continue clicking points along the path that you want to measure STEP RESULT Each point is joined by a line 8 Right click to complete the measurement ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Click Reset to take another measurement STEP RESULT The measured line path measurement and unit appear in a value box entity on the current active markup layer The measured distance Delta X Delta Y and the Manhattan Distance appear in the Measurement Entities dialog 9 Click Close to close the Measurement Entities dialog Calibrating Distance Calibrate the distance measurement TASK 1 Measure distance between two points or measure cumulative distance 2 From the Distance tab click Calibrate STEP RESULT The Distance Calibration dialog appears displaying the measured distance ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 277 MARKUPS CREATING 2D VECTOR MARKUP MEASURE ENTITIES Measuring Area 3 From the Units list select the unit to which you want to calibrate the distance 4 Select Calibrate to and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance to a value 5 Select Set Factor and enter a value if you want to calibrate the distance by a factor 6 Click OK STEP RESULT The calibration result appears in the Measurement dialog 7 Click Close to close the Distance tab Use the Area option to measure the area and perimeter of a region TASK 1
383. veral Markup files simul taneously you can set one as the active Markup file Any changes you make is applied to the current active markup TASK 1 From the Markup menu select Open ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Open Markup s amp or from the bottom left corner of the status bar you can click Markup Indicator If the Markup Indicator icon does not display the file you opened has no existing markups associated to it STEP RESULT The Markup Files dialog appears 2 From the Markup list select the markup or markups you want to open 3 From the Active Markup list select the markup you want to make active ADDITIONAL INFORMATION An active markup displays in bold in the Markup Navi gation Tree 4 Click OK RESULT The selected markups appear in the AutoVue workspace Changing the Active Markup File When you have multiple Markup files open you can change the active markup NOTE An active markup displays in bold in the Markup Navigation Tree Take one of the following steps e Inthe tree right click the name of the Markup file you want to make active then select Set Active From the Markup toolbar you can set the active markup by selecting a markup from the list on the Markup Properties toolbar e Take the following steps From the Markup menu select Set Active The Set Active Markup dialog appears From the Select Active Markup list select the markup you want to
384. version information 17 files archive 30 open from server 29 30 open local 28 open url 29 properties 31 streaming file 30 fill color 315 320 fill type 319 filtering entity types 91 font 315 font paths 207 frame rate 211 From 70 G GUI 18 H header footer 328 import Markup file 241 insert codes 328 372 L layer sets 102 user defined layers sets create 103 delete 104 save with markups 105 viewing 103 layers 97 158 219 changing color 101 changing order 98 logical layer visibility 100 logical layers 97 sorting 102 physical layer visibility 99 physical layers 97 leader alignment 321 line color 315 317 line style 318 line thickness 318 M makrups hyperlink 293 306 Markup Entity Properties dialog 316 Markup entity toolbar 20 Markup file 16 Markup files 238 Markup Filter 227 Markup Indicator 27 225 markup layers 321 Markup Navigation Tree 26 226 Markup Panel 26 226 markups 225 238 2D 259 markup entities 260 2D non vector measure 264 angle 268 299 arc 268 area 267 calibrate arc 81 134 195 269 281 289 301 calibrate distance 76 129 192 266 277 285 298 cumulative distance 266 distance 265 2D vector measure 274 angle 279 arc 280 300 area 131 278 calibrate arc 81 134 195 269 281 289 301 calibrate distance 76 129 192 266 277 285 298 cumulative distance 277 284 3D 293 text 303 3D markup entitites 294 3D measure angle 279 arc 280 300 create 294 minimum distanc
385. w Java Client View File s STEP RESULT AutoVue opens and displays the selected file 4 From the AutoVue menu choose Import File as Overlay STEP RESULT The File Open dialog appears 5 Use one of the following File Open dialog options to select a file to overlay Option Description Browse Browse your local directories to select and open files from the AutoVue window Agile Browse Use Agile bookmarks to open files from the AutoVue window Agile Search Perform an Agile Quick Search to select and open files from the Auto Vue window ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 61 WORKING WITH 2D FILES WORKING WITH 2D VECTOR FILES Browsing Local Directories to Select File You can browse your local directories to select an attachment file TASK 1 From the File Open dialog click Browse 2 Use the Look in drop down list to select the directory you want 3 Select the file you want and click Open 4 Click OK in the File Open dialog RESULT The Viewer opens the selected file or if appropriate adds the selected file to the current analysis function Using Agile Bookmarks to Select File You can click Agile Browse to use your Agile Bookmarks to select an attachment file TASK 1 From the File Open dialog click Agile Browse STEP RESULT The DMS File Open dialog displays your Agile Bookmarks in a tree structure NOTE If you have not defined any Bookmarks in Agile PLM Agil
386. y or entities appear highlighted in the workspace and in the Navigation Panel If the selected entity is small a flash box appears indicating the location of the highlighted entity in the workspace You can also apply selection filters when selecting entities in the workspace See Filtering Entity Types When you hover the mouse over an entity in the workspace a tooltip with infor mation about the entity s attributes appears The tooltip displays whether or not you select the entity ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 89 WORKING WITH EDA FILES ZOOMING TO A SELECTED ENTITY From the Entity Search Dialog To select and entity from the Entity Search dialog perform the following steps TASK 1 Perform an attribute based or entity type based search using the Entity Search dialog 2 Select an entity or entities from the Entity Types list or the Attributes list of the Entity Search dialog To select more than one entity press the Shift or Control key while selecting RESULT The selected entity or entities appear highlighted in the workspace and in the Navigation Panel If the selected entity is too small a flash box appears indicating the location of the highlighted entity in the workspace See Searching Using Entity Search Zooming to a Selected Entity To zoom to a selected entity perform the following steps TASK 1 If you selected an entity from the workspace or Navigation panel right click
387. yle of font insert Watermark information print system variables To insert Watermark information AutoVue provides a list of codes that you can choose from These codes are f Full path of document v Document Drive e d Document Directory b Document Base name e Document file extension e n Total document pages p Current page number e N Total tiled pages P Current tile number Y Date Year M Date Month 330 ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL PRINTING WATERMARKS D Date Day e W Date Day of week H Time Hour U Time Minute S Time seconds r New line NOTE A literal percentage mark is entered manually as You can also print system variables in watermarks Select a variable from the Insert Variable list Some Insert Variable options are user name browser and java home Adding a Watermark TASK 1 From the File menu select Print ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Print STEP RESULT The Print Properties dialog appears 2 Click the Watermark tab Enter the Watermark Text that you want to appear on the file 4 To insert a code in the watermark select a code from the Insert Code list ADDITIONAL INFORMATION For example if you select n Total document pages the total number of pages for the selected file will appear in the Water mark You can insert more than one code 5 To insert a s
388. ystem variable select a variable from the Insert Variable list ADDITIONAL INFORMATION For example if you select browser version the version of the browser that the file is displayed in will appear in the Water mark ADDITIONAL INFORMATION You can insert more than one system variable 6 To set the orientation of the watermark click Diagonal Horizontal or Vertical 7 To change the Font click Set Font The Font dialog appears a From the Font list select the type of font b From the Size list select the size of font 8 Inthe Print Properties dialog configure other print properties ORACLE AUTOVUE USER MANUAL 331 PRINTING ASSIGNING PEN SETTINGS 9 Toviewa partial view of the file click Partial Preview STEP RESULT The Partial Preview dialog appears 10 Click OK to print RESULT The Print dialog appears indicating the document is printing Assigning Pen Settings From the Pen Settings tab of the Print Properties dialog you can set the thick ness of the color indices for the print file NOTE AutoVue uses the default pen color indices of the native document for the vector file being viewed You will not be able to change the color assigned to a pen with AutoVue TASK 1 From the File menu select Print ADDITIONAL INFORMATION From the AutoVue toolbar you can also click Print STEP RESULT The Print Properties dialog appears 2 Click the Pen Settings tab 3 Under From To select the Co

AutoVue for Agile User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents